mssasgmi>mismmm 



ird 



cl s S 



ed I i 



rv||(;;r 



r I I I "^', I % 



|f«^fc!i<5^:;>«VJ/-;:'/^''. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



Chap Copyrioht No.. 

s ■ 

Shelf ^,.C>_ 47 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



CHARDENAL'S 



FRENCH EXERCISES 



FOR ADVANCED PUPILS 



REVISED SY 

DELPHINE DUVAL 

PROFESSOR OF FRENCH AT SMITH COLLBGB 



Boston 

ALLYN AND BACON 

1900 



_47695 

■•wo Cowts t€cc,»eo 
SEP 15 1900 

OROt«0«V»SION, 

SfP 19 1900 



T 



\\ 



C'^^ 



c.^'\ 



COPYKIGHT, 19 00, BY 
DELPHINE DUVAL. 

80068 



Norbjoato Press 

J. S. Gushing & Co. — Berwick & Smith 
Norwood Mass. U.S.A. 



PREFACE. 

In this edition of Cliardenars " Advanced Exer- 
cises " it has been my intention not so much to 
correct the book as to adapt it to the needs of 
American pupils, and to the scope of our courses 
of study. 

As the book is intended for pupils who have had 
one year of French in college, or two years in ele- 
mentary or preparatory schools, some words in 
vocabularies and some foot-notes in the first part, 
with which the student should be perfectly familiar, 
have been omitted. In the second part, the sen- 
tences in the French exercises have been reduced 
in number from eighteen in each exercise to eleven 
or twelve, and those in the English, with some 
changes, from thirty-six to twenty-five, thus avoid- 
ing too much repetition. 

For the greater convenience of the student, instead 
of two lists, one which refers both to the idiomatic 
verbs and to the idiomatic expressions has been sub- 
stituted. Many obsolete idioms have been omitted, 
and all the idioms in each exercise will be found in 
the section correspondingly numbered in the list. 

D. D. 

August 6, 1900. 



CONTENTS. 



■ PAET FIEST. 

PAGE 

Syntax 1 

The Article . . . . . . . . 1 

The Partitive Article 3 

The Article used before plus, mieux, etc. . . 4 

The Noun 4 

Plural of Compound Nouns 5 

Collective Nouns 6 

The Adjective. Agreement of Adjectives . . 6 

The Place of Adjectives 7 

The Government of Adjectives .... 8 

The Comparison of Adjectives .... 9 

Possessive Adjectives 10 

Indefinite Adjectives 11 

Numerals 13 

The Pronoun. Place of Personal Pronouns . . 14 

Order of Personal Pronouns before the Yerb . 16 

Order of Personal pronouns after the Verb . . 17 

^n and F 18 

The Pronoun Soi 19 

The Pronoun Le 20 

Possessive Pronouns 20 

Demonstrative Pronouns 21 

Interrogative and Relative Pronouns ... 24 

Indefinite Pronouns 26 

V 



VI CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

The Verb. Agreement of Verbs .... 28 

The Place of the Subject 29 

Passive Verbs 30 

Pronoramal Verbs 31 

The Past Tenses. 1. The Imperfect ... 32 

2. The Preterite Definite . . . . - . 32 

3. The Preterite Indefinite 33 

The Future and the Conditional .... 34 

The Subjunctive 35 

Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive ... 39 

• The Infinitive 41 

The Participle. The Present Participle . . 42 

The Past Participle 43 

The Adverb. Place of Adverbs .... 46 

Particular Pules on Ne 47 

The Preposition. De . . . . . .49 

The Translation of To 50 

Depuis, Pendant, Pour ...... 50 

Dans and En 51 

A and En 51 

Fi^om .52 

Pepetition of Prepositions . . . . . .52 

The Conjunction Que 52 

II. Exercises on Syntax 54 

PAET SECOND. 

I. Exercises on Idioms 105 

IT. Idiomatic Verbs and Phrases .... 183 

III. Popular Sayings ... , . . 255 



PART FIRST. 



I. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 

THE ARTICLE. 

Rule 1. — The article is used in French before nouns 
denoting a general class, and must be repeated before 
each ; as, — 

Men fade away like floioers, Les hommes passent comme les 

fleurs. 
Moderation is the loise man' streas- La moderation est le tresor du 

ure, sage. 

The father and mother of that Le pere et la mere de cet enfant 

child are old, sont ages. 

ExcEPTTOXS. — The article is omitted : — 

(1) Before nouns in an enumeration ; as, — 

Children, parents, friends, stran- Enfants, parents, amis, etrangers, 
gers, all bewailed him, tous le pleurerent. 

(2) Before nouns usegl adverbially ; as, — 

He acts with integrity, II agit avec probite. 

I am friendless and penniless, Je suis sans ami, sans argent. 

Rule 2. — The article is used in French before names 
of countries, provinces, rivers, and mountains ; as, — 

Scotland has magnificent scenery, L'Ecosse a de magnifiques pay- 
sages. 

Did you ever see Loch Lomond? Avez-vous jamais vu le lac Lo- 
mond? 

B 1 



2 THE ARTICLE. 

Exceptions. — The article is omitted before names of 
countries preceded by verbs of residence or motion, or 
by the preposition en, or used adjectively ;^ as, — 

She comes from Scotland, Elle vient d'Ecosse. 

He is gone from England to Spain, II est alle d' Angleterre en Espagne. 

The Queen of England, La reine d'Angleterre. 

Scotch pig-iron, De la fonte d'Ecosse. 

EuLE 3. — The article le, la, les is used for a or an sig- 
nifying per before nouns of weight, measure, or number ; 
but par is used for a or an before nouns of time ; as, — 

Three francs a yard, Trois francs le metre. 

Fivepence a pound, Cinquante centimes la livre. 

Ten francs a hundred, Dix francs le cent. 

A guinea a month, Une guinee par mois. 

EuLE 4. — The article used in English before a noun in 
apposition or before a noun denoting a person's country, 
business, title, etc., is omitted in French;' as, — 

* As it is sometimes difficult to ascertain when the name of a country- 
is used adjectively, observe that de, between two nouns, makes, as it 
were, an adjective of the second noun, and, therefore, that the real and 
chief object in the mind is pointed out by the first noun, and qualified 
by the second. In un appartement de roi, the chief object is an apart- 
ment, the beauty of which is worthy of a king; whereas, in I'apparte- 
ment du roi, roi is pointed out by the article as the owner, and it 
serves also to distinguish that apartment from others ; as, — 

Le roi de France, Le roi des Frangais. 

Les vins de France, Les avantages de la France. 

Les ports d* Angleterre, Les richesses de I'Angleterre. 

Du poisson de mer, Du poisson de la mer du Nord. -— Merlet. 

■^ But the article must be used before : — 

(1) Names of some notorious persons, those of celebrated actresses, and 
a few Italian names; as, la Brinvilliers, la Champmesle, le Tasse, T Arioste. 

(2) Proper nouns denoting a literary production ; as, le Cinna de 
Comeille. 

(3) A saint's day ; as, la Saint-Pierre, la St. Jean. 

(4) Proper names in the plural ; as, les Cicerons sont rates. 



THE ARTICLE. 3 

Augustus, the nephew of Caesar, Auguste, neveu de Cesar. 
He is a clergyman, II est ecclesiastique. 

She is a Frenchvwman, EUe est Frangaise. 

EuLE 5. — The article is omitted in p roverbi al sen- 
tences^ and before the numeral_fqllomiig the name of a 
ruler; as, — 

A good name is better than a golden Bonne renommee vaut mieux que 

girdle, ceinture doree. 

Henrij the Fourth, Henri quatre. 

Rule 6. — The article is omitted after que or quel used 

as an exclamation ; as, — 

What a noise for nothing ! Que de bruit pour rien ! 

What a had day ! Quelle affreuse joumee ! 

The Partitive Article. 

Rule 7. — Some or any, expressed or understood before 
a noun, is translated by du, de la, de 1', or des ; as, — 

/ have eaten bread and cheese, J'ai mange du pain et du fromage. 

That man has courage. Get homme a du coeur. 

Exceptions. — (1) De alone is used when the noun is 
preceded by an adjective; as, — 

Some good bread, De bon pain. 

But if the adjective and the noun form a single idea 
(as beaux-arts, belles-lettres, bon mot, grand-p^re, jeunes 
gens, etc.), du, de la, de 1', or des must be used ; as, — 
Some fops, Des petits-maitres. 

(2) De alone is used when the verb is negative; as, — 
He has no courage, II n'a pas de coeur. 

If, however, the noun be followed and modified by an 
adjective or a subordinate sentence, the article should be 
used; as, — 



4 THE NOUN. 

/ have not such mean feelings, Je n'ai point des sentiments si bas. 

Never give advice which it may he Ne donnez jamais des conseils qu^l 
dangerous to follow, soit dangereux de suivre.* 

The Article used before Plus, M/'eux, Moins. 

Rule 8. — The article le is invariable when it forms, 
with plus, mieux, or moins, an adverbial expression modi- 
fying an adjective, a verb, or an adverb; as, — 

She is happiest when with her chil- C'est aupres de ses enfants qu'elle 
dren, est le plus heureuse. 

It is for music that they have the C'est pour la musique qu'elles sont 
greatest talent, le plus heureusement douees. 

It is she who expresses herself the C'est elle qui s'exprime le plus elo- 
most eloquently , quemment. 

It is what she likes best, C'est ce qu'elle aime le mieux. 

But the article is variable when there is a comparison 
between persons or things ; in this case a noun is always 
understood; as, — 

Of all women she is the happiest, De toutes les femmes, c*est la plus 

heureuse (femme). 
The most usefid arts are 7iot the Les arts les plus utiles ne sont pas 
most esteemed, (les arts) les plus consideres. 



THE NOUN. 

EuLE 9. — In English a noun qualifying another noun 
precedes it, and usually has the force of an adjective. 

* The article is also used in interrogative and negative sentences to 
express an affirmation, but it is omitted to express a doubt ; as, — 

(Affirmation.) {Doubt.) 

Pourquoi vous chagrinez-vous? n'avez-vous Quoi! n*avez-vous pas 
pas des amis pour vous distraire? d'amis? 

In Uke manner we say : II ne peut parler sans faire des fautes ; that 
is, il fait des fautes ; the sense is affirmative in spite of the negation. 
II parle sans faire de fautes ; that is, il ne fait pas de fautes ; the sense 
is negative in spite of the affirmation. 



THE NOUN. 6 

In Frencli the qualifying noun stands last. If it in- 
dicates the material of which a thing is made, or is the 
name of a place, the preposition de is used ; as, — 

A marble table, Une table de marbre. 

A gold pen, Une plume d'or. 

Burgundy loine, Du vin de Bourgogne. 

Lyons silk, De la sole de Lyons. 

EuLE 10. — If the qualifying noun indicates use, pur- 
pose, or fitness, the preposition a is used; as, — 

A milk jug, Un pot a lait. 

A dining-room, Une salle a manger. 

A steamboat, Un bateau a vapeur. 

A paper-knife, Un couteau a papier. 



Plural of French Compound Nouns. 

Rule 11. — French compound nouns must be analyzed 
in order to see whether the sign of the plural should or 
should not be used, observing that, in the comipound, 
only nouns and adjectives may take the mark of the 
plural; as, — 

Garde-fou, plural des garde-fous ; that is, rails to protect fools, hand- 
rails. 
Garde-suisse, plural des gardes-suisses ; that is, Siviss Guards. 
Avant-coureur, plural des avant-coureurs ; that i^, fore-runners. , 
Reveille-matin, plural des reveille-matin ; that is, clocks which aivaken 

one in the morning, alarm-clocks. 
Coq-a-l'ane, plural des coq-a-l'ane ; that is, rambling discourses in which 

the speaker wanders from one subject to another quite different, du 

coq a I'ane. 
Pied-a-terre, plural des pied-a-terre ; that is, places where one dwells, 

temporarily, where one has only one foot alighted. 
Cure-dents, plural des cure-dents; that is, an instrument for picking 

the teeth, a toothpick. 
Tete-a-tete, jDlural des t«te-artete ; that is, an interview between two 

persons, /ace to face. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 



Collective Nouns. 



EuLE 12. — General collective nouns (that is, repre- 
senting the whole of the persons or things mentioned, as 
Tarmee, la f amille, le parlement, le peuple) are preceded by 
le or la, and require their verb, adjective^ and pronoun to 
be put in the singular ; as, — 

The people have been conquered^ Le peuple a ete vaincu. 

The croivd of spectators applauded, La foule des spectateurs applaudit. 

KuLE 13. — Partitive collective nouns (such as une 
foule, un certain nombre, une infinite, une douzaine, etc.), 
when they are preceded by un or une, require their verb, 
adjective, and pronoun to agree in gender and number 
with the noun following de ; as, — 

A croiod of children followed him, Une foule d'enfants le suivaient. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 
The Agreement of Adjectives. 

EuLE 14. — A predicate adjective or participle modify- 
ing two or more nouns of different genders is put in the 
masculine plural ; as, — 
My father and mother are old, Mon pere et ma mere sont ages. 

Exceptions. — In the two following cases a;n adjective 
placed after two or more nouns agrees with the last : — 

(1) When the nouns are synonymous ; as, — 

An astonishing valor and bra- Un courage, une bravoure eton- 
very, nante. 

(2) When the nouns are united by the conjunction 

ou ; as, — 

An astonishing courage or pru- Un courage ou une prudence eton- 
dence, nante. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 7 

EuLE 15. — Adjectives used adverbially, that is, modi- 
fying a verb, are invariable ; as, — 

How sweet these flowers smell ! Que ces fleurs sentent bon ! 

She sings false, Elle chante faux. 

These paintings cost dear, Ces peintures coutent cher. 

The Place of Adjectives. 

Most adjectives may be placed either before or after 
their nouns; but some are subject to certain rules, which, 
though not absolute, are of great assistance. 

EuLE 16. — (1) The following adjectives, used singly, 
generally precede the noun : — 

joli, pretty. petit, little. mechant, luicJced. 

beau, ,/fne. jeune, young. triste, sad. 

brave, brave. vieux, old. vilain, ugly. 

grand, gi^eat, big. ancien, ancient, premier, first. 

gros, large, stout. bon, good. dernier, last. 

mauvais, bad. 

(2) When the noun is followed by a preposition, the 
adjective always precedes it; as, — 

The splendid speech of that orator. Le magnifique discours de cet ora- 

teur. 

(3) The adjective generally comes first when it has 
fewer syllables than the noun ; as, — 

Une fausse modestie. Une basse intrigue. 

Un juste chatiment. Une haute montagne. 

EuLE 17. — The following are usually placed after the 
noun: — 

(1) Adjectives of color, form, taste, and nationality. 

(2) Participles used adjectively. 



8 THE ADJECTIVE. 

(3) Two or more adjectives qualifying the same noun. 

(4) An adjective having more syllables than its noun.^ 

The red coats^ Les habits rouges. 

A round tables Une table ronde. 

A hitter orange, Une orange amere. 

An English poem, Un poeme anglais. 

An accomplished man, Un homme accompli. 

An industrious and prudent lad, Un gargon laborieux et sage. 

The Government of Adjectives. 

EuLE 18. — The prepositions, of, from, by, ivith, follow- 
ing an adjective or a participle, are generally translated 
by de without the article ; as, — 

He is a young man endoioed loith C'est un jeune homme doue de 
great qualities, grandes qualites. 

But if the noun is taken in a restricted or limited 
sense, the article must be used with de ; as, — 

He is a young man endoioed loith C'est un jeune homme doue des 
the qualities requisite for such qualites requises pour cette 

an office, fonction. 

EuLE 19. — Adjectives and participles expressing want, 
scarcity, plenty, capability, satisfaction, absence, separa- 
tion, or desire, require the preposition de before their 
complement; as, — 

Full of wit, Plein d^esprit. 

Proud of his coat, Fier de son habit. 

^ Eager for honors, A vide d'honneurs. 

* lu addition to these few rules, observe that, when an adjective 
is a mere ornament, which could be suppressed without altering the 
meaning of the sentence, it generally comes before the noun, as it 
thus gives more energy to the expression ; as, un vil scelerat. If, on 
the contrary, the adjective is absolutely necessary to complete the 
expression and give it a clear meaning, it is placed after the noun ; as, 
un homme vil. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 9 

Rule 20. — Adjectives and participles expressing apt- 
ness, fitness, ease, readiness, usefulness, necessity, re- 
semblance, inclination, disposition, end, tendency, or 
any habit, require the preposition a before their com- 
plement; as, — 

Fit for war, Propre a la guerre. 

Useful to his country, Utile a son pays. 

Ready to go, Pret a partir. 

Inclined to idleness, Enclin a la paresse. 

EuLE 21. — If two adjectives qualifying the same noun 
require different prepositions before their complements, 
each adjective must have its separate complement; as, — 

He is useful to and loved by his II est utile a sa famille et en est 
family, cheri. 

This rule applies equally to verbs and prepositions. Thus, do 
not say, 11 aime et obeit a ses parents, but 11 aime ses parents 
et leur obeit, as aimer requires no preposition after it, while 
obeir is always followed by a. Do not say, plaider centre ou en 
faveur de quelqu^un, but plaider contre quelqu'un ou en sa 
faveur. 

Rule 22. — An adjective following the impersonal il 
est requires de before an infinitive ; as, — - 

It is glorious to die for one's conn- II est glorieux de mourir pour son 
try, pays. 



The Comparison of Adjectives. 

EuLE 23. — By after a comparative, in after a superla- 
tive, and than before a numeral are translated by de ; as, — 

I am stronger by far than he, Je suis de beaucoup plus fort que 

lui. 
He is the best man in the loorld, C'est le meilleur homme du monde. 

It is more than three o'clock, II est plus de trois heures. 



10 THE ADJECTIVE. 

EuLE 24. — Than before an affirmative indicative is 
translated by que . . . ne ; as^ — 

She is poorer than you thinks Elle est plus pauvre que vous ne 

pensez. 

Exception. — If the first clause of the sentence is neg- 
ative or interrogative^ or if there is an adverb between 
que and the verb, the ne is left out ; as, — 

One cannot lose a kingdom more On ne peut perdre un royaume plus 
gayly than you do, gaiement que vous le faites. 

Is it worse weather than you were Est-ce qu'il fait plus mauvais 
told? temps qu'on vous le disait? 

He is better than when he loas in II se porte mieux que quand il etait 
London, a Londres. 

EuLE 25. — Than before an infinitive is translated by 

que de or qu'a, according as the preceding verb requires 

de or a ; as, — 

It is easier to say it than to do it, II est plus facile de le dire que de 

le faire. 
He is thinking more of playing Ilpenseplusajouerqu'atravailler. 
than icorking, 

Rule 26. — The before a comparative is not expressed 

in French ; as, — 

The Hcher a man is, the more cares Plus un homme est riche, plus 11 a 
he has, de soucis. 

Possessive Adjectives. 

Rule 27. — (1) When a possessive adjective (771?/, thy^, 

his, her, our, your, their) is used with a noun denoting a 

part of the body, the noun being the direct object of 

a verb, the adjective is expressed in French by to me, to_ 

thee, to him, to her, to us, to you, or to them; as, — 

He broke my finger, l\ m'a casse le doigt. 

T//e dog vkis biting his leg, Le chien lui mordait la jambe. 

He loillpull out your teeth, l\ vous arrachera les dents. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 11 

(2) If the possessor is clearly shown, suppress the pro- 
noun to me, to thee, to him, to her, etc.; as, — 

He lost his right leg in the battle, II a perdu la jambe droite dans la 

bataille. 

(3) With the three words, mal {pain), froid (cold), and 
chaud {warm), use the A^erb avoir, and make the person 
the subject of the verb; as, — 

Her feet are sore, Elle a mal aux pieds. 

My hands are very cold, J'ai bien froid aux mains. 

Indefinite Adjectives. 

B.ULE 28. — (1) Quelque (^whatever, hoivever, some, a 
few), when followed by a noun, is spelt as one word, and 
varies whether qualified by an adjective or not; as, — 

Whatever faidts you have com- Quelques fautes que vous ayez 
mitted, I forgive you, commises, je vous pardonne. 

(2) Quelque, preceding a participle or an adverb, or 
an adjective not followed by its noun, is an adverb, and 
consequently invariable ; as, — 

Hoioever powerful they a^'e, Quelque puissants qu'ils soient. 

(3) Quelque, preceding a numeral, is an adverb, and 
invariable ; as, — 

We fired about five or six thousand Nous avons tire quelque cinq ou 
shots, " six mille coups de canon. 

(4) Quel que, preceding a verb, is spelt as two words 
(quel, variable, and que) ; as, — 

Whatever be his inclinations, the Quels que soient ses penchants, le 

wise man sw^nounts them, sage les surmonte. 

Buy that house, in lohatever state Achetez cette maison quelle qu'elle 

it is, soit. 



12 THE ADJECTIVE. 

Rule 29. — (1) Tout is an adjective, and consequently 

varies, when it means every, each, or all; as, — 

Evei^y woman, Toute femme. 

All men, Tous les hommes. 

(2) Tout is an adverb, and consequently invariable, , 
when it means quite, entirely, however ; it tlien precedes 
an adjective, a participle, a noun used as an adjective, or 
an adverb ; as, — 

We are quite exhausted, Nous sommes tout epuises. 

These floicers are quite as fresh as Ces fleurs sont tout aussi fraiches 

yesterday, qu'hier. 

She is entii^ely yours, Elle est tout a vous. 

This material is all loool, Cette etoffe est tout laine. 

ExcEPTio:^-. — The adverb tout varies, for the sake of 
euphony, when placed before a feminine adjective or 
participle beginning with a consonant or an aspirate h; 

no 

^ She is quite stunned, Elle est toute stupefaite. 

(3) Tout, followed by au' e, is invariable if it means 
quite, but it varies if it means any ; as, — 

I have quite a different ambition, J'ai une tout autre ambition. 
Jealousy misleads more than any La jalousie egare plus que toute 
other passion, autre passion. 

(4) Tout, placed before the name of a town, agrees with 
the word peuple understood, and is therefore masculine ; 
as, — 

All Rome is overwhelmed ivith Tout Rome est consteme. 
grief, 

EuLE 30. — Meme is used either as an adjective or an 
adverb. 



THE ADJECTIVE. 13 

(1) It is an adjective, and varies : — 
a. Before a noun; as, — 

All nations are alike: the same Lespeuplesseressemblent partout: 
viceSj the same virtues^ memes vices, memes vertus. 

h. After a pronoun ; as, — 

Eux-memes, elles-memes, ceux memes. 

c. After a single noun ; as, — 

The Greeks themselves are wearied Les Grecs memes sont las de lui. 
of him, 

(2) Mime is an adverb, and invariable : — 

a. When it means even; as, — 

His remorse ivas evident even to Ses remords ont paru meme a nos 

our eyes, yeux. 

Every citizen ought to obey the Tout citoyen doit obeir aux lois, 

laws, even when unjust, meme injustes. 

h. When it means also, besides, which is the case when 
it comes after two or more nouns ; as, — - 

Les animaux. les plantes meme, etaient au nombre des divinites egyp- 
tiennes. 

Numerals. 

EuLE 31. — Vingt and cent are used in the plural when 
they are multiplied by another number; as, — 

Quatre-vingts. < Trois cents. 

ExcEPTioxs. — (1) If vingt and cent are followed by 
another number, they are not put in the plural ; as, — 

Quatre-vingt-huit soldats. Trois cent un. 

(2) Vingt and cent, used for vingti^me, centi^me, are 
invariable ; as, — 

Chapitre quatre-vingt. Page trois cent. 



14 THE PRONOUN. 

If cent is used for centaine, it is then a noun, and takes the 
mark of the phiral ; millier, million, milliard, etc., are treated in 
the same way ; as, — 

Tioo hundred lots of fagots, Deux cents de fagots. 

Three hundred bundles of straw, Trois cents de paille. 

EuLE 32. — When a noun is preceded by a numeral, or 
by an adverb of quantity, the preposition de is introduced 
if a past participle follows ; as, — 

There loerefive houses burnt, II y a eu cinq maisons de brulees. 

There were many men killed, II y a eu beaucoup d'hommes de 

tues. 

EuLE 33. — Premier is the only ordinal number used 
for a date ; it is also used to designate the first of a line 
of princes ; beyond the first, the cardinal numbers must 
be used; as, — 

The tenth of August, Le dix aout. 

January first, Le premier Janvier. 

Henry first, Henri premier. 

THE PRONOUN. 
Place of Personal Pronouns. 

EuLE 34. — Personal pronouns in the objective case 
must be placed immediately before the verb in simple 
tenses, and before the auxiliary in compound tenses. 

The pronouns must then be translated by : — 

me, me, to me. nous, us, to us. 

te, thee, to thee. vous, you, to you. 

lui, to him, to her, to it. leur, to them, 

le, him, it. les, them. 

la, her, it. les, them. 



As, — 



/ see him, Je le vois. 

I have seen him, Je I'ai vu. 

I have not seen him, Je ne Pai pas vu. 



THE PRONOUN. 15 

Exceptions. — The pronoun stands after the verb, and 
is translated by : — 

moi, me. lui, him. nous, us. eux, them. 

toi, thee. elle, her. vous, you. elles, them.* 

(1) When the pronoun is preceded by any preposition 

but to; as, — 

The2/ came after us, lis sont venus apres nous. 

Go with him, AUez avec lui. 

Observe. — The English preposition to does not come under 
this exception, as the French have retained from the Latin the 
simple words nous (nobis), vous (vobis)^ me {iiiihi), te (tibi), lui 
(ei), to express the relation marked in English by the two words 
to us, to you, to me, to thee, to him, etc. 

However, a is used with the pronouns after the following 
verbs : — 

accourir a, marcher a, renoncer a, 

aller a, parvenir a, retoumer a, 

en appeler a, penser a, revenir a, 

boire a, tenir a, venir a, 

courir a, songer a, viser a, 

faire allusion a, prendre garde a, voler a, 

faire attention a, recourir a, etre a, 

and all verbs in which avoir enters ; as, avoir recours a, avoir 
affaire a, avoir egard a, etc. 

(2) When the pronoun is preceded by a pronominal 
verb; as, — 

You may trust me, < Vous pouvez^ous fier a moi. 

* The following also should be learnt by heart and known per- 
fectly : — 

Before the Verb. After the Verb. 

me, myself. , ^ > 

te, thyself. rrio\-mQmQ, myself, nous-memes, ourselves. 
se, himself, herself, one's self, toi-meme, thyself vous-memes, yourselves. 

nous, ourselves. Im-meme, himself, eux-memes, themselves. 

vous, yourselves. Q\\Q-inQnie,herself.Q\\QS-mQmes, themselves. 
se, themselves. 



16 THE PRONOUN. 

(3) When several pronouns in the same case are the 
objects of the verb ; as, — 

/ speak to you and to hhrL, Je parle a vous et a lui. 

They have invited you, me, and On a invite toi, moi, et nos amis. 
our friends, 

(4) When the verb is in the imperative mood without 
a negation;^ as, — 

Give me, donnez-moi. Give him, donnez-lui. 

Give it to me, donnez-le-moi. Give it to him, donnez-le-lui. 

Pronouns used with the imperative mood without a negation 
must be translated as in Rule 38. 

Order of Personal Pronouns when placed before the Verb. 

Rule 35. — When two personal pronouns are to be 
placed before the verb, they stand in the following 
order : — 

Me le, it to me. Nous le, it to us. 

Me les, them to me. Nous les, them to us. 

Te le, it to thee. Vous le, it to you. 

Te les, them to thee, Vous les, thein to you. 

Le lui, it to him, to her. Le leur, it to them. 

Les lui, them to him, to her. Les leur, them to them. 

As, — 

He loill grant it to us, II nous Paccordera. 

I had not asked it of (to) you, Je ne vous Pavais pas demande. 

He has not promised them to theyn, 11 ne les leur a pas promis. 

Observe. — (1) Him to me, him to thee, etc., are trans- 
lated the same as it to me, it to thee, etc. If the pronoun 
it has to be put in the feminine in French, it becomes la ; 
as me la, te la, nous la, etc. 

* If there are two imperatives united by et or ou, the pronoun may- 
be placed before the second, as in this line of Boileau : Polissez-le sans 
cesse et le repolissez. 



THE PRONOUN. 17 

(2) When two pronouns have to be placed before the 
verb, the pronoun representing a person stands first, if it 
is of the first or second person (as, me, te, nous, vous); 
and last, if it is of the third (as, lui, leur).=^ 

Rule 36. — When the adverb y {there) is used with the 
above pronouns, it comes after them; as, — 

I will carry them to you there, Je vous les y porterai. 

EuLE 37. — En (some, of it, of them) used with any pro- 
noun or with y comes after it ; as, — 

He ivill give some to him, II lui en donnera. 

I saw three there, J'y en ai vu trois. 

Order of Personal Pronouns when placed after the Verb 
(Imperative Mood). 

EuLE 38. — When the verb is in the imperative mood 
affirmative, the personal pronouns are translated and dis- 
posed as follows : — 

Give it to me, Donnez-le-moi. 

Give them to me, Donnez-les-moi. 

Give it to us, Donnez-le-nous. 

Give them to us, Donnez-les-nous. 

Give it to him, to her, Donnez-le-lui. 

Give them to him, *o her, Donnez-les-lui. 

Give it to them, Donnez-le-leur. 

Give them to them, Donnez-les-leur. 

Send her to me. Envoy ez-la-moi, etc., etc. 

If the imperative is negative, the pronouns precede it in 
the form and order given in Eule 35 ; as, — 

Do not give it to me, Ne me le donnez pas. 

* In the rare cases when we have to translate me to thee, to him, to 
her, to you, to them, or thee to me, to him, to her, to us, to them, etc., 
we place the direct object before the verb, and the indirect after ; as. 
You have not yet introduced us to them, Vous ne nous avez pas encore 
presentes a eux. 
c 



18 THE PRONOUN. 

EuLE 39. — En used with any other pronoun follows 
it: — 

Give some to me, Donnez-m'en. 

Give some to him, to her, Donnez-lui-en. 

Give some to us, Donnez-nous-en. 

Give some to them, Donnez-leur-en. 

y 
EuLE 40. — The position of y is as follows : — 

Carry me there, Portez-y-moi. 

Carry him there, Portez-y-le. 

Carry us there, Portez-nous-y. 

Carry them there, Portez-y-les. 

Observe. — Y used with moi^ toi^ le, la, and les, pre- 
cedes them by exception^ for the sake of euphony. 

En and Y. 

EuLE 41. — En is sometimes a pronoun, sometimes a 
preposition (Eules 97 and 98). When a pronoun, it means 
of him, of her, of it, of them, some, any, some of it, some of 
them, hence, thence, for that, etc. It is generally applied to 
things, but sometimes to persons also, in order to avoid the 
repetition of de lui, d'elle, d'eux, d'elles, or a lui, etc. ; as, — 

Have they spoken of my misfor- A-t-onparledemonmalheur? Oui, 

tune f Yes, they have, on en a parle. 

We expect nothing from it. Nous n'en attendons rien. 

/ complained of her yesterday, Je me suis plaint d'elle hier, et je 

and shall again to-day, m'en plaindrai encore aujour- 

d'hui. 

EuLE 42. — When a numeral is not followed by the noun 
to which it refers, the French generally put en before the 
verb;"^ as, — 



* The same rule applies to adverbs of quantity (combien, beaucoup, 
assez, etc.), to nouns expressing a quantity (un quart, une moitie, une 



THE PRONOUN. 19 

Have yon any brothers? Avez-vous des freres? 

Yes, I have one, Oui, j'en ai un. 

See, besides, Rules 37 and 39. 

EuLE 43. — Y is sometimes a pronoun, sometimes an ad- 
verb. When a pronoun, it means to it, to them, in speaking 
of tilings, but sometimes it is also applied to persons; as, — 

Do you trust that man ? Vous fiez-vous a cet homme ? 

Yes, I do, Oui, je m'y fie. 

When an adverb, y means in it, there, thither, here, 
whether expressed or understood in English; as, — 

Is your cousin in your room? She Votre cousine est-elle dans votre 
ivas, but now she is 710 longer, chambre? Elle y etait, mais 

maintenant elle n'y est plus. 

Observe. — There (expressed or understood) is trans- 
lated by la, vv^hen pointing to a |)lace, and by y, when 
alluding to a place mentioned before; as, — 

Do you see that house ? Voyez-vous cette maison-la ? 

I lived there three months, J'y ai demeure trois mois. 

See, besides, Rules 36, 37, and 40. 

The Pronoun Soi. 

EuLE 44. — Soi may be : (1) a pronoun representing 
a thing; (2) a personal pronoun used in an indefinite 
sense ; (3) a personal pronoun used in a definite sense 
to avoid an ambiguity ; as, — 

Crime brings remorse in its train, Le crime traine apres soi des re- 
molds. 
Every one for himself , Chacun pour soi. 

Thisyoung nian,iohile obeying his Ce jeune homme, en obeissant a son 
father, is vjorking for himself, pere, travaille pour soi. 



douzaine, une vingtaine, etc.), and to the indefinite pronouns aucun and 
quelques-uns, or quelques autres. 



20 THE PRONOUN. 

The Pronoun Le (so). 

EuLE 45. — The pronoun le, whicli is sometimes ren- 
dered in English by so, but generally omitted, may relate: 
(1) to a substantive; (2) to an adjective; or (3) even to 
a whole sentence. 

(1) When it represents a substantive, or an adjective 
used substantively, it agrees in gender and number; as, — 

Areyou Mr. Smith's friends? Yes, Etes-vous les amis de M.Smith? 

we are, Oui, nous les sommes. 

Are you the sick ivoman they speak Etes-vous la malade dont ils par- 

of? Yes, I am, lent? Oui, je la suis. 

(2) When it represents an adjective, or a substantive 

used adjectively, it is invariable; as, — 

J.re you sick ? Yes, toe are, Etes-vous malades ? Oui, nous le 

sommes. 
Are you brothers? No, ive are Etes-vous freres? Non, nous ne 
not, le sommes pas. 

(3) When it represents a whole sentence, it is invari- 
able ; as, — 

Did your sister go to the ball yes- Mademoiselle votre sceur est elle 
terday ? I do not know, allee au bal hier ? Je ne le sais 

pas. 

Possessive Pronouns. 

EuLE 46. — Mme, thine, etc., after the verb to be, are 

generally expressed by k moi, a toi, etc. ; otherwise they 

are translated by le mien, les miens, le tien, les tiens, etc. ; 

as, — 

This hat is mine, Ce chapeau est a moi. 

These gloves are hers, Ces gants sont a elle. 

Where did you see mine ? Ou avez-vous vu les miens ? 

EuLE 47. — The English possessive pronouns are ex- 
pressed by mon, ma, mes, ton, ta, tes, etc., when used with 
o/ after a substantive; as, — 



THE PRONOUN. 21 

A friend of yours^ Un de vos amis. 

What do tjou say of that hat of Que dites-vous de mon chapeau?^ 
mine ? 

Demonstrative Pronouns. 

C'esf, ce sont. 

Rule 48. — C'est or ce sont ^ is used : — 

(1) Before a substantive;^ as, — 

They are joiners, Ce sont des menuisiers. 

This sentence may also be translated thus : lis sont menuisiers ; 
but then menuisiers is used adjectively. 

(2) Before a pronoun; as, — 

It is I, C'est moi. 

Is it you ? Est-ce vous ? 

It is mine, C'est a moi, or c'est le mien. 

(3) Before a superlative of things, and often before a 

superlative of persons ; as, — 

This is the best of my hats, C'est le meilleur de mes chapeaux. 

He is the best lad in the luorld, C'est le meilleur gargon du monde. 

(4) When the impersonal verb it is ^ is placed before 

* Sometimes we jocosely say un mien ami, un tien cousin, une sienne 
niece. This familiar expression, however, does not apply to notre, 
votre, leur. — Mariette . 

■^ V^hen c'est or ce sont is used, put ce sont before a third person 
plural only; in all other cases use c'est. 

+ By a very rare exception, <il, eile, ils, elles, are used instead of ce, 
when emi)hasis is laid upon the pronouns he, she, it, they ; as, — 
Although adversity is an evil, it is Quoique I'adversite soit un mal, 

often a remedy against the vices elle est souvent un remede centre 

of prosperity , les vices de la prosperite. 

s The pronoun that (and it standing for that) is also rendered by ce (or 
cela) before 6tre and devoir, but by cela only before any other verb ; as, — 
That is useless, C'est inutile, or cela est inutile. 

If you go out for an hour, it ivill Si vous sortez une heure, cela vous 

do you good, fera du bien. 



22 THE PRONOUN. 

an adjective not followed by the idea of the sentence; 
as, — 

It is impossible, C'est impossible. 

It is true, C'est vrai, or (by exception) il est 

vrai. 

But should the idea follow the adjective^ c'est cannot 
be used; as^ — 

It is glorious to die for one^s coun- II est glorieux de mourir pour son 
try, pays. 

(5) When ce qui or ce que begins a sentence, c'est or ce 
sent generally begins the second clause; as, — 

What is of consequence to man, is Ce qui importe a I'homme, c'est de 
to fulfil his duty, remplir ses devoirs. 

What grieves him is your being Ce qui I'afflige, c'est que vous lui 
angry with him., en voulez. 

(6) Between two infinitives, c'est is generally used for 
IS y as, — ' — 

Travelling on foot is travelling Voyager a pied, c'est voyager 
like Thales, Plato, and Pythag- comme Thales, Platon et Pytha- 

oras, gore. 

Where there is a loill, there is a Vouloir, c'est pouvoir. 
way, 

C^est and ce sont are often used to give more energy to the 
style. Thus the sentence, L'orgueil perdit una partie des anges, 
is more strongly and elegantly expressed by c'est I'orgueil qui 
perdit une partie des anges. C'est is much like a finger pointing 
to the principal word of the sentence.* 

* We extract from Merlet's '' Dictionary of Difficulties " a few sen- 
tences illustrating the preceding observations: — 

You walk to London to-morroio, C'est vous qui allez domain a Lon- 

dres. 
You walk to London to-morrow, C'est d pied que vous allez demain 

a Londres. 



THE PRONOUN. 23 

EuLE 49. — (1) In asking a question to ascertain some- 
thing, we generally use est-ce? est-ce ici? est-ce la? as, — 

Does your brother say that? Est-ce votre frere qui dit cela? 

Do you live here? Est-ce ici que vous demeurez ? 

Is that lohat he told you? Est-ce la ce qu'il vous a dit ? 

(2) To express astonishment, use est-ce que ? as, — 

Do you pretend that I am unioell? Est-ce que vous pretendez que je 

suis malade ? 
Has he not yet come hack from Est-ce qu'il n'est pas encore revenu 
Paris? de Paris? 

Est-ce que stands for is it possible^ or is it a fact^ or is it true 
that, etc. Est-ce que vous pretendez que je suis malade ? means 
Is it true that you pretend that I am unioell ? or You do not pre- 
tend that I am unicell, do you ? All sentences having this last 
form (that is, a negative proposition, followed by have If have 
you 9 do I? does he? do you? etc.) should thus be translated by 
est-ce que without the negation : — 

You loon't come, loill you? Est-ce que vous viendrez ? 

He does not understand lohat I tell Est-ce qu'il comprend ce que je 
him, does he ? lui dis ? 

You walk to London to-morrow , C'est d Lone/res que vous allez 

demain. 
You walk to London to-morrow, C'est demain que vous allez a Lon- 

dres. 

The same rule applies to th^ interrogative : — 

Do you walk to London to-mor- Est-ce que vous allez demain a 

row ? Londres ? 

Do you rcalk to London to-mor- Est-ce vous qui allez deinain a 

roio ? Londres ? 

Do you walk to London to-mor- Est-ce d pied que vous allez de- 

row ? main a Londres ? 

Do you walk to London to-mor- Est-ce d Londres que vous allez 

row? demain? 

Do you walk to London to-mor- Est-ce demain que vous allez a 

row ? Londres ? 



24 THE PRONOUN. 

Thus est-ce que is used when one has either nearly, or altogether, 
made up his opinion on the subject in question, and only wants 
that opinion to be confirmed. Hence : — 

(3) To call the testimony of another in support of our 
own opinion, use n'est-ce pas? or n'est-ce pas que? as, — 

Hook very pale, do I not? J'ai I'air bien pale, n'est-ce pas? 

or, N'est-ce pas que j'ai Pair bien 
pale? 

N'est-ce pas que stands for is it not true that^ etc. N'est-ce 
pas que j'ai Pair bien pale? means Is it not true that Hook very 
pale? When the form of a principal proposition, although affirma- 
tive, implies thus an interrogative idea, and that idea is summed 
up by the expressions, have I not? is it not? are you not? do 1 
not? and such like, they are all rendered by n'est-ce pas que, as 
in the preceding example, or by est-ce que with a negative verb ; 
as, — 

I look very pale, do I not ? Est-ce que je n'ai pas Pair malade? 

You icill come, loill you not ? N'est-ce pas que vous viendrez ? or, 

Est-ce que vous ne viendrez pas ? 
Re understands what I say, does N'est-ce pas qu'il comprend ce que 
he not? je dis? or, Est-ce qu'il ne com- 

prend pas ce que je dis? 



Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 

WHO, WHAT, WHICH. 

EuLE 50. — Who, used interrogatively, is very often ren- 
dered by qui est-ce qui (wlien subject), and by qui est-ce 

que (wlien object); as, — 

Who loill come with me ? Qui est-ce qui veut venir avec moi ? 

Whom did I insult? Qui est-ce que j'ai insulte? 

Who was speaking to you just Qui est-ce qui vient de vous parler .? 
now ? 

Note that qui est-ce qui and qui est-ce que apply only to 
persons. 



THE PRONOUN. 25 

Rule 51. — (1) The pronoun lohat^ used interrogatively, 
is very often rendered by qu'est-ce qui (when subject), and 
by qu'est-ce que (when object) ; as, — 

What has prevented him from com- Qu'est-ce qui I'a empeche de venir ? 

ing? 
What do you 7nean? Qu'est-ce que vous voulez dire? 

(2) What J used interrogatively and as the object of a 
verb, is translated also by que, with de before the follow- 
ing adjective, if there is one; as, — 

What is the news? Que dit-on de nouveau? 

(3) If the verb following the interrogative loliat should 
require the preposition a or de, idiat must be translated by 
quoi with a or de before it ; as, — 

What are you thinkinc) of? A quoi pensez-vous? 

What are you meddling loith ? De quoi vous melez-vous ? 

(4) When subject, and placed before an adjective, ivhat 
may be translated by quoi with de before the adjective f"^ 
as, — 

What is more amiable than an in- Quoi de plus aimable qu'un enfant 
dustrious child? laborieux? 

Note that qu'est-ce qui, qu'est-ce que, que, and quoi apply to 
things only. 

EuLE 52. — Which followed by of is translated by lequel, 
laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles ; as, — 

Which of these hooks do you prefer? Lequel de ces livres preferez-vous ? 

EuLE 53. — Which, after a preposition, often means 
ivhere, and is translated by oti, d'oti, par oti, etc. ; in other 
cases, translate it by lequel, laquelle, etc. ; as, — 

* Obserye that in this sense what is an exclamation, rather than 
a pronoun. 



26 THE PRONOUN. 

Name the toivn in ivhich he luas Nommez la ville ou il est ne. 

born, 
That is the bridge along which ive Voila le pont par ou nous avons 



passe. 

Drunkenness is the most shame- L'ivresse est Petat le plus honteux 
ful state into lohich a man can dans lequel un homme puisse 

fall, tomber. 

EuLE 54. — Wliose, of ivJiom, of vjJiich, may be expressed 

by dont for both genders and numbers, and is followed. 

not as in English by the thing possessed, but by the verb 

and its subject; as, — 

The gentleman lohose loife you Le monsieur dont vous venez de 
have just seen is very clever, voir la femme est tres-habile. 

EuLE 55. — The relative pronoun and the conjunction 

that, often understood in English, must always be expressed 

in French ; as, — 

The ivatch I have bought is good La montre que j'ai achetee ne vaut 

for nothing, rien. 

Do you think he loill come ? Pensez-vous qu*il vienne ? 

EuLE 56. — A relative pronoun must always be placed 

immediately after the noun to which it relates ; as, — 

I bought a book yesterddy, ivhich J'ai achete hier un livre qui est 
is very interesting, tres-interessant. 

Indefinite Pronouns. 
On. 

EuLE 57. — The pronouns ive, you, they, one, and the 

word people, used indefinitely, are translated by on, which 

must be repeated before each verb ; as, — 

Wedo not alivays do what IV e ought On ne fait pas toujours ce qu*on 

to do, doit faire. 

They say. On dit. 

EuLE 58. — The passive voice is considered in Erench 
as rather heavy ; when a passive sentence can be turned 



THE PRONOUN. 27 

into an active one, with on for subject, it must be done; 

as, — 

Some hooks have been given them, On leur a donne des livres. 

On often becomes Ton for the sake of euphony after et, si, ou, 

qui, que, except when followed by a word beginning with an I ; 

as, — 

Si Ton me voit. Si on le voit. 

See, besides, for the translation of passive verbs, Rules 66 and 67. 

Personne. 

EuLE 59. — Personne, when an indefinite pronoun, is 
used without article or adjective; it then means nobody 
or anybody, and is masculine ; as, — 

There is nobody but is vexed at itj II n'y a personne qui n*en soil fache. 

Personne, when a substantive, is always accompanied 
by an article or adjective ; it then means a person, and is 
feminine; as, — 

There is not one person who is not II n'y a pas une personne qui n'en 
vexed at it, soit fachee. 

Chacun. 

EuLE 60. — Chacun, preceded by a word in the plural, 
requires after it sometimes son, sa, ses, sometimes leur, 
leurs. 

(1) It requires son, sa^ ses, when it does not precede the 
direct object; as, — 

They brought offerings into the lis ont apporte des offrandes au tem- 
temple, each according to his pie, chacun selon ses moyens. 

means, 

(2) It requires leur, leurs, when it pirecedes the direct 
object; as, — 

Each gave his advice, lis ont donne chacun leur avis. 



28 THE VERB. 

Uun r autre — Uun et Pautre. 

EuLE 61. — L'un Tautre (^one another) implies reciproc- 
ity ^"^ and is different from Tun et Tautre (both). "The 
reciprocity, when there are more than two persons or two 
things, is expressed by les uns les autres ; as, — 

The Hng and the emperor fear Le roi et Pempereur se craignent 

each other, l'un I'autre. 

Both came to my house, L'un et I'autre vinrent chez moi. 

The soldiers excite each other, Les soldats s'excitent les uns les 

autres. 

THE VERB. 
The Agreement of Verbs having Several Subjects. 

EuLE 62. — If a Yerb has several nouns or pronouns 
for subjects, it is put in the plural, except in the three 
following cases, when it stands in the singular: — 

(1) When the subjects are synonymous and not united 
by and (see Eule 14) ; as, — 

At all ages the love of labor, a taste Dans tous les ages, Tamour du tra- 
for study, is a blessing, vail, le gout de I'etude, est un 

bien. 

(2) When they are placed in climactic order; as, — 

A single 7uord, a pleasant smile, a Une seule parole, un sourire gra- 
look, is sufficient, cieux, un regard sufiit. 

(3) When the last subject sums up the others; as, — 

Re7norse,fear, danger, nothing re- Remords, crainte, peril, rien ne m'a 
strained me. retenu. 

EuLE 63. — When the different subjects of the same 
verb are united by ou or ni, the verb is put in the plural, 
if the action relates to all the subjects ; in the singular if 
it refers to only one; as, — 

* See Rule 68. 



THE VERB. 29 

Luck or rashness may have made Le bonheur ou la temerite ont pu 

heroes, faire des heros. 

His ruin or his safety depends on Sa perte ou son salut depend de sa 

his answer, reponse. 

Neither the sun nor death can be Le soleil ni la mort ne peuvent se 

steadily regained, regarder fixement. 

Neither George nor Charles ivill Ni Georges ni Charles n'aura le 

get the prize, prix. 

Note that: (1) If the subjects united by ou are of 
different persons, the verb is put in the plural, and agrees 
with the first person rather than the second, and the 
second person rather than the third ; as, — 

You or he will go to the country, Vousoului vousirezalacampagne. 

(2) If the subjects are united by ni, and if one at least 
is a pronoun, the resuming pronouns nous and vous cannot 
be used; as, — 

Ni vous ni lui n'irez a la campagne. 

The Place of the Subject. 

EuLE 64. — The subject is generally placed before the 
verb. 

ExcEPTioxs. — (1) When the verb is used as a paren- 
thesis; as, — 

Go away, said he, Allez-vous-en, dit-il. 

(2) When the verb is preceded by an interrogative word 
(qui? que? oti? quand? comment? combien? etc.); as, — 

What are these children doing? Que font ces enfants? 

Where are these shepherds going ? Ou vont ces bergers ? 
When tvill your father come back ? Quand reviendra M. votre pere ? 

(3) In a subordinate sentence, beginning by que, dont, 
comma, ainsi que, lorsque, quand, or oti, or generally when 



30 THE VERB. 

the subject cannot be placed before the verb without sus- 
pending the sense of the sentence too long; as, — 

Here is the picture of which my Voici le tableau dont vous a parle 

mother has spoken to you, ma mere. 

All was done when your father Tout etait fini quand arriva votre 

arrived, pere. 

What is the matter with your Qu*est-ce qu'a votre maman ? 

mamma 9 

This construction is necessary in the last example, as the verb a, 
a single letter, at the end of the sentence, would sound very badly 
to a French ear. 

(4) When the sentence begins with tel or ainsi ; as, — 

Such was the way he set about it, Telle fut la maniere dont 11 s'y prit. 
Thus ends the story, Ainsi finit I'histoire. 

EuLE 65. — When the verb is preceded by aussi (there- 
fore), encore (yet), peut-8tre (perhaps), a peine (scarcely), 
en vain (vainly), au moins (at least), the subject, if a pro- 
noun, is placed after the verb ; as, — 

Therefore I don't believe you, Aussi ne vous crois-je pas. 

Scarcely had he arrived when he A peine fut-il arrive qu'il tomba 
fell ill, malade. 



Passive Verbs. 

EuLE 66. — It has been said (Eule 58) thatthe passive 
voice is seldom used in French, and that, whenever it can 
be turned into the active form with the indefinite pronoun 
on for subject, it must be done. 

If the expression is not indefinite, turn the verb into 
the active voice, making the agent of the passive verb 
the subject of the active; as, — 

He has been abandoned by his Ses amis Pont abandonne. 
friends, 



THE VERB. 31 

EuLE 67. — The passive voice is also elegantly rendered 
in French by the pronominal form, in speaking of inani- 
mate objects; as, — 

That lace is sold very cheap, Cette denteUe se vend a tres-bon 

marche. 

Pronominal Verbs. 

EuLE 68. — Pronominal verbs are those conjugated with 
two pronouns of the same person — je me, tu te, il se, nous 
nous, vous vous, ils se. 

There are two kinds of pronominal verbs : — 

(1) Eeflective verbs, that is, verbs expressing an action 
reflected upon him who does it ; as, — 

They are washing themselves^ lis se lavent. 

(2) Eeciprocal verbs, that is, verbs expressing an action 
reciprocated between two or more subjects;^ as, — 

They flatter each other y lis se flattent Pun Pautre. 

They fought for an hour y Ils se sont battus pendant une 

heure. t 



* With reciprocal verbs we add I'un Pautre, les uns les autres, etc., 
when we want to avoid an ambiguity. Es se flattent may mean either 
they flatter themselves, ov , they flatter each other. 

■^ Compare the following constructions of reflective and reciprocal 
verbs : — 

(1) They huiH themselves, ils se blessent. 

(2) They hurt themselves (with emphasis or contradistinction) , ils 
se blessent eux-memes. 

(3) They hurt each other, ils se blessent Pun Pautre, or (if more 
than two) les uns les autres. 

Observe also that, if a preposition precede each other or one another 
in English, it must, in French, be placed between Pun and Pautre, or 
les uns and les autres ; as. They have fought against each other, Hs se 
sont battus Pun centre Pautre, not centre Pun Pautre. — INIariette. 



32 THE VERB. 

The Past Tenses. 

EuLE 69. — To express the past tenses^ I spoke, I was 
speaking, I used to speak, I did speak, I have spokeii, the 
French have three ways : 1, the imperfect ; 2, the preterite 
or past definite ; 3^ the preterite indefinite^ or compound 
tense. 

1. The Imperfect (ye parlais). 

The imperfect, which is also called the descriptive tense, 
is used in only two cases : — 

(1) To express a state or an action which was habitual; 
as, — 

When Iivas young Hiked to play, Quand j^etais jeune, j'aimaisa jouer. 

(2) To express a state or an action going on at the same 
time with another action ; as, — 

It ivas raining lohen Iioent out, II pleuvait quand je suis sorti. 

Note that the use of the imperfect may be simply reduced to 
these two cases: (1) when the English tense may be turned into 
used to ; (2) when it can be turned into the present participle with 
/ was^ thou ivast, he ivas^ etc. 

2. The Preterite Definite (ye par/ai). 

The preterite definite can be used only to express an 
action which took place in a time quite past, as last year, 
last month, last week, yesterday;"'' as, — 

* The simplest way to apply this Rule is this : when you have to 
translate an English past tense into French, try first if it may be 
changed into used to, or into the present participle ^vitli I ivas, thou 
wast, he ivas, etc. If either of these two changes may be made, use the 
imperfect; if neither can be made, the imperfect cannot be used. It 
then remains to see whether the English past tense is part of a histori- 
cal narration, or of a familiar conversation. In the first case, use the 
preterite definite ; in the second, the preterite indefinite. 

t The present is often used instead of the preterite to give more ani- 
mation to a narrative. In this case, all the verbs in the sentence must 



THE VERB. 33 

I received a letter from my father Je regus hier une lettre de mon 

yesterday, pere. 

At last the king died, Enfin le roi mourut. 

But, generally, the preterite definite, which is also called 
the historical tense, is replaced in familiar conversation 
by the preterite indefinite. 

3. The Preterite Indefinite (J'ai parle). 

The preterite indefinite is nsed to express an action 
which took place in a time either quite past or not yet 
quite past, as last year or this year, last month or this 
month, last week or this week, yesterday, this morning; 
as, — 

J'ai regu une lettre de mon pere I'annee derniere, le mois dernier, ce 
mois-ci, hier, ce matin. 

It follows that, when the English past tense cannot 
be translated by the French imperfect, it must gener- 
ally be rendered in historical narration by the preterite 
definite, in familiar conversation by the preterite indefi- 
nite/^ 



be put in the present ; as, On cherche Vatel ; on court a sa chambre; on 
heurte ; on enfonce sa porte ; on le trouve noye dans son sang. 

* When reading an account of a man's life, the student will often 
meet with the preterite used to mention actions that must have been 
done frequently, and even habitually, and which, therefore, according 
to the given rules, ought to b6 in the imperfect ; but, in such a case, he 
will perceive that the author does not intend, by so doing, to describe 
or delineate these actions in particular, but that he merely enumerates 
them ... as being the result of habitual actions; as, — 

Socrate apprit a ses compatriotes a raisonner sur I'immortalite de 
Tame : il reussit a leur donner des idees sublimes d'un Dieu crea- 
teur de Tunivers. 

Apprit expresses an action that must have occurred several times ; 
but here this word, as well as reussit, is taken for the result of the 
instruction given by Socrates. — Merlet. 

D 



34 THE VERB. 



The Future and the Conditional. 

Rule 70. — The future and the conditional are never 
used in French after si beginning a sentence or a clause ; 
we then use the present instead of the future, and the 
imperfect instead of the conditional ; as, — 

If you iDill come, I will tell it to Si vous venez, je vous le dirai. 

you, 
If you ivould come, I ivould tell Si vous veniez, je vous le dirais. 

you it, 

But if si, meaning whether, instead of beginning 
a sentence or clause, is introduced by a preceding 
verb, the future or the conditional may then be used;"^ 

as, ^ — 

I do not knoio whether he will come, Je ne sals s*il viendra. 
I did not Tcnovj whether he ivould Je ne savais s*il viendrait. 
co7ne, 

EuLE 71. — In sentences referring to future time we 
frequently use the present tense in English, but the future 
tense must always be used in French ]^ as, — 



* The way to ascertain whether or not si is introduced by a preced- 
ing verb, is to try to put it in the beginning of the sentence by means of 
an inversion. If it can be put in the beginning, then the future and the 
conditional cannot be used after it. I loill tell you it, if you ivill come 
may be turned into If you loill come, I ivill tell you it : Je vous le dirai 
si vous venez, or si vous venez, je vous le dirai. But if the inversion 
cannot take place, then si is introduced by a preceding verb. Je ne 
sais s'il viendra cannot be turned into s'il viendra je ne sais pas. An- 
other way to express this rule : — 

If si introduces a substantive clause, use the future and conditional ; 
but if it introduces an adverbial clause, use the present or imperfect. 

^ This rule and the preceding one may be expressed in one : the future 
must always be expressed in French when the idea of futurity is implied, 
except after si beginning a sentence or a clause of a sentence- 



THE VERB. 35 

^6^ S0071 as it is dark, lue shall go Aussitot qu'il fera nuit, nous sor- 

outf tirons. 

Shall I go with you? As you like, Sortirai-je avec vous? Comme il 

vous plaira. 

Rule 72. — Instead of the future, the Erench often use 
the verb aller, when the action is to be done immediately ; 
as, — 

/ shall go out (immediately) , Je vais sortir. 

EuLE 73. — When tvill and ivoidd may be changed into 
to be ivilling or to ivish, translate them by vouloir; when 
should may be changed into ought, translate it by devoir, 
using the present if the duty is absolute, and the condi- 
tional if there is some condition expressed or understood ; 
when may, might, and could are not preceded by anything 
requiring the subjunctive, translate them by pouvoir; as, — 

He loould not come with me, II n'a pas voulu venir avec moi. 

Children should obey their par- Les enfants doivent obeir a leurs 

ents, parents. 

Tell him he may come ivith us, Dites-lui qu'il peut venir avec nous. 



The Subjunctive. 

Rule 74. — Impersonal verbs, and verbs used imperson- 
ally, require the subjunctive mood in dependent clauses 
as, — < 

It is proper for him to come, II convient qu'il vienne. 

It is right that that should he done, II est juste que cela se fasse. 

It may he that you are right, II se peut que vous ayez raison. 

Exceptions. — A few impersonal verbs expressing cer- 
tainty or probability, such as il y a, il resulte, il est certain, 
il parait, il est vrai, il est probable (and also il semble ac- 
companied by a pronoun), are followed by the indicative. 



36 THE VERB. 

EuLE 75. — Verbs used negatively or interrogatively 
and implying uncertainty are followed by the subjunc- 
tive; as, — 

I do not believe he loill come, Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. 

Do you believe he will come 9 Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? 

You don't believe she is coining, Vous ne croyez pas qu'elle vienne. 

Exception. — The interrogative verb does not require 
the subjunctive when the speaker has no doubt of the 
fact mentioned in the question; as, — 

Do you know tho.t your father is Savez-vous que votre pere est ma- 

umvell ? lade ? 

Do you forget that Theseus is my Oubliez-vous que Thesee est mon 

father 9 pere ? 

The subjunctive is not used after est-ce que ? n^est-ce pas que ? 
qui est-ce qui? qui est-ce que? qu'est-ce qui? qu*est-ce que? 
nor, generally, after the verbs savoir, faire savoir, dire, apprendre, 
informer, and such like, used interrogatively. 

EuLE 76. — Verbs expressing doubt^ will^ wish^ order^ 
fear, complaint^ joy, sorrow, surprise, or any emotion of 
the mind,^ are followed by the subjunctive; as, — 

I icish him to come, Je desire qu'il vienne. 

He ivill have you do your duty, II veut que vous fassiez votre 

devoir. 
I want you to do it, Je veux que vous le "fassiez. 

Note that the six verbs, craindre, avoir peur, trembler, 
apprehender, prendre garde, and empecher, being followed 
by que, require ne before the subjunctive if the verb be 



* Except only esperer. Croire and penser do not express an emotion 
and require the indicative, unless used interrogatively or negatively. 
The same with se douter (not douter), s'attendre, s'imaginer, presumer, 
etCc 



THE VERB. 37 

aflfirmative ; when negative or interrogative, ne is sup- 
pressed j"^ as, — 

/ am afraid he loill do it, J'ai peur qu'il ne le fasse. 

I do not fear that he loill scold me, Je ne crains pas qu'il me gronde. 

EuLE 77. — The subjunctive is required after a relative 
pronoun or the adverb o% preceded by le seul. I'lmique, 
le premier, le dernier, pas uii, aucun, nul, personne, rien, peu, 
gu^re, or after a superlative : as, — 

Wisdom is the only thing the pos- La sagesse est la seule chose dont 
session of ichlch is certain, la possession soit certaine. 

There are few men who knoiv hoiv II y a peu d'hommes qui sachent 
to hear ad.versity, supporter I'adversite. 

She is the happiest woman I know ^ C'est la plus heureuse femme que 

je connaisse. 

But should the second verb be introduced into the 
sentence by a genitive plural, the indicative should be 
used, as there would not be then au}^ doubt implied; as, — 

The Paradise Lost is thebestbound Le Paradis Perdu est le mieux 
of the books that I have, relie des livres que j'ai. 

EuLE 78. — When a relative pronoun preceded by its 
antecedent is placed between two verbs, the second verb 
is put in the subjunctive ; as, — 

I advise you to marry a iconyj.n Je vous conseille d'epouser une 
who knows how to cook, femme qui sache f aire la cuisine. 

But if there is no uncertainty implied, the indicative 
must be used ; as, — 

I have married a icoman ivho J'ai epouse une femme qui sait 
knoios hoiv to cook, faire la cuisine. 



* After empecher, used negatively, ne may or may not be used. — 

ACADEMIE. 



38 



THE VERB. 



EuLE 79. — The subjunctive is required after the follow- 
ing words: quelque . . . que, quel que, quoi que, qui que; as, — 

However learned he may he, Quelque savant qu'il soit. 

Quel qu'il soit. 



Whatever it is, 
Whatever you say, 
Whoever you are, stop, 



Quoi que vous disiez. 
Qui que tu sois, arrete. 



EuLE 80. — (1) The following conjunctions require the 
subjunctive: — 



afin que, 
,pour que, 
avant que, 
au cas que, 
en cas que, 
quoique, 
bien que, 
encore que, 
jusqu'a ce que, 



I in order that. 

before. 
I in case that. 

although, 
until. 



'""'I"^' Xnotthat. 

non pas que, j 

loin que, far from. 

pourvu que, provided. 

sans que, ivithout. 

suppose que, suppose that. 

soit que, lohether. 

pour peu que, |.^__^^g^^^^.^^;^_ 

si peu que, j 



(2) The three following conjunctions require not only 

the subjunctive, but also ne before it : — 

a moins que, unless. 

de crainte que, for fear. 

de peur que, lest. 

(3) The four conjunctions, de sorte que, en sorte que, 
tenement que, de mani^re que, all meaning so that, in such 
a ivay as, sometimes take the indicative, and sometimes 
the subjunctive ; the indicative, when there is no uncer- 
tainty implied ; the subjunctive, when there is ; as, — 



He behaved in such a loay as to 
merit the esteem of all honest 
men, 

Behave in such a loay as to merit 
the esteem of all honest people , 



n s*est conduit de telle maniere 
qu'il s'est attire I'estime de 
tous les honnetes gens. 

Conduisez-vous de maniere que 
vous vous attiriez I'estime de 
tous les honnetes gens. 

(4) The conjunction que takes the subjunctive only 
when it stands for a conjunction requiring the subjunc- 
tive (Eule 101) or for si ; as, — 



THE VERB. 39 

I will not set out until he comes, Je ne partirai pas qu'il ne vienne. 
If he comes, and should I not he at S'il vient, et que je ne sois pas a 
home, send for my brother, la maison, faites venir mon frere. 

(5) The conjunction si does not require the subjunctive, 
but the subjunctive is used in the subordinate clause de- 
pending on si, if there is a doubt in the speaker's mind as 
to the fact mentioned; as, — 

Had I knoivn that things loould Si j^avais su que les choses se pas- 
take such a turn, I ivould have sassent ainsi, j'aurais pris mes 

takenimj measures accordingly , mesures en consequence. 

But if there is no doubt as to the actuality of the thing 
asserted, the indicative is used; as, — 

If I had knoicn that it ivas you, Si j'avais su que c'etait vous, je 
I would not have disturbed my- ne me serais pas derange. 

self, 

(6) The conjunction a condition que may be followed 
by either the indicative or the subjunctive; as, — 

I give you this money, on condition Je vous donne cet argent, a condi- 
that you loill leave to-morrow, tion que vous partirez demain, 

or que vous partiez demain. 

Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

EuLE 81. — If the principal verb is in the present or 
the future indicative, the dependent verb must be put in 
the present subjunctive to express a present or future 
time; in the perfect, to express the past; as, — 

Te doute 1 ,, ,. . 

Te do t rai I ^^® ^^^^ etudiez mamtenant, demam. 

Te doute ) ,,.,,. 

Je douterai / ^^^ ^""^ ^^^^ ^^^^'^ ^'^^• 

ExcEPTiox. — If the subjunctive is followed by a con- 
ditional expression, the imperfect or the pluperfect must 
be used; as, — 



40 THE VERB. 

I do not believe that he ivould come f Je ne crois pas qu'il vint, si on ne 

if he xmre not obliged, I'y forgait. 

I do not believe he would have come Je ne crois pas qu'il fut venu, si 

if he had not been obliged^ on ne I'y avait force. 

EuLE 82. — If the principal verb is the past tense or 
the conditional^ the dependent verb must be put in the 
imperfect subjunctive to express the present or the future, 
in the pluperfect to express the past ; as, — 
Je doutais 



Je doutai 
J'ai doute 
J'avais doute 
Je douterais 
J'aurais doute J 

Je doutais 
Je doutai 
J'ai doute 
J'avais doute 
Je douterais 
J'aurais doute . 



que vous etudiassiez aujourd'hui, demain. 



que vous eussiez etudie hier. 



ExcEPTiois-. — If the action expressed by the subjunc- 
tive is continuous, the present must be used; as, — 

God has given us reason in order Dieu nous a donne la raison afin 
that ive may discern the good que nous discemions le bien 

from the evil, d'avec le mal. 

General Observation on the Use of the Subjunc- 
tive Mood. — When the subjunctive mood can be avoided 
by putting the verb in the infinitive, as in the following 
cases, it must be done, because the frequent use of the 
subjunctive makes the style heavy and diffuse: — 

(1) When two verbs have the same person for subject, 

the second may, and generally must, be put in the infini. 

tive ; as, — 

I fear I shall arrive too late, Je crains d'arriver trop tard. 

/ wish I were m your place, Je voudrais bien etre a votre place. 



THE VERB. 41 

(2) If the two verbs having the same person for subject 
are united by a conjunction, this conjunction may often 
be changed into a preposition ; as, — 

Come to see me before youiorite to Venez me voir avant de lui ecrire. 

him, 
Every power isiveaJc unless united, Toute puissance est faible a moins 

que d'etre unie.— La Fontaine. 

(3) When it is clear who must or must not do a thing, 
the pronoun subject of must is not translated, and the 
next verb is put in the infinitive ; as, — 

We must always speak the truths II faut toujours dire la verite. 

You must not break this glass, II ne faut pas casser ce verre. 

The Infinitive. 

EuLE 83. — All prepositions require the following verb 
in the infinitive, except en, which requires the present 
participle; as, — 

Of seeing, de voir. Without seeing, sans voir. 

In order to see, pour voir. While seeing, en voyant. 

In seeing, a voir. 

EuLE 84. —When two verbs come together, the second 
is put in the infinitive, unless the first is etre or avoir, 
both of which require the past participle ; as, — 

Let us know how to conquer or to Sachons vaincre ou sachons mourir. 
die, 

EuLE 85. — To get, or to Jiave, a thing done, meaning to 
cause it to be done, is translated by faire, which requires 
the infinitive immediately after it ; as, — 

Get my linen ironed, Faites repasser mon linge. 

/ am going to have a new dress Je vais me faire faire une robe 
made, neuve. 



42 THE PARTICIPLE. 

This very important rule applies to any expression 
signifying to cause; sucli as^ — 

Ask the gentleman up stairs ^ that \ 

is to say, Cause the gentleman > Faites monter monsieur. 
to come up stairs, ^ 

THE PARTICIPLE. 

The Present Participle. 

EuLE 86. — The present participle, which is essentially 
part of the verb, must not be confounded with the verbal 
adjective, which is an adjective derived from a verb (such 
as, un animal rampant, ime m^re prevoyante, une passion 
dominante). 

The present participle always expresses an action, and 
is invariable ; as, — 

These men, foreseeing the danger, Ces hommes, prevoyant le danger, 
put themselves on their guard, se mirent sur leurs gardes. 

The verbal adjective always expresses a quality of the 
noun which it qualifies, a state, or a manner of being, 
and agrees like other adjectives ; as, — 

These far sighted men perceived Ces hommes prevoyants ont apergu 
the datiger, le danger. 

EuLE 87. — The present participle is seldom used in 
French. When it can be avoided by changing the English 
participle into a tense of the indicative with qui, or into 
a substantive, or by giving the sentence a different turn, 
it must be done; as, — 

I hear your father calling you, J'entends votre pere qui vous ap- 

peUe. 
Your father's being angry loith La colere de votre pere centre moi 

?ne is the cause of my sadness, est la cause de ma tristesse. 

My scolding of you is of no use, II ne me sert de rien de vous gronder. 



THE PARTICIPLE. 43 

The Past Participle. 

EuLE 88. — The past participle, used without an auxil- 
iary verb, or with the auxiliary verb etre, agrees, like an 
adjective, with the noun or pronoun to which it relates ;^ 
as, — 

Concealed enmitrj is dangerous y Les inimities cachees sont dange- 

reuses. 
Selfish men are despised, Les egoistes sont meprises. 

ExcEPTiox. — The past participles of pronominal verbs, 
though always conjugated with etre, do not come under 
this rule, but under the following one, as with them itre 
has the meaning of avoir. 

EuLE 89. — The past participle used with avoir agrees, 

not with its subject, but with its direct object, when this 

object is placed before it; as, — 

Here is the loatch I bought, Void la montre que j'ai achetee. 

They have rejoiced at your happi- lis se sont rejouis de votre bonheur. 

ness, 

They have shoicn it to each other, II se la sont montree. 

Hoic many books have you read ? Combien de livres avez-vous lus ? 

Observe. ''" — (1) Past participles of impersonal verbs, 
or verbs used impersonally, are invariable; as, — 
The heat lohlch we had, Les chaleurs qu'il a fait. 

(2) A past participle between two que is invariable; 

as, — 4 

The ansioer lohich I foresaio they La reponse que j'avais prevu qu'on 
'Would give you, vous ferait. 

* The participles attendu, excepte, oui, passe, suppose, vu, non com- 
pris, y compris, are invariable when they precede the noun (avoir is 
then understood) ; but they vary when they come after (etre is then 
understood) ; as, Je puis tout souffrir, excepte votre colere ; Je puis tout 
souffrir, votre colere exceptee. 

"^ These observations are not " exceptions." Their object is merely 
to illustrate the most difficult cases. 



44 THE PARTICIPLE. 

(3) The participle preceded by V is invariable, when r 

represents a clause of a sentence, or that, or so; as, — 

The affair is more important than Cette affaire est plus importante 
I had thought^ que je ne I'avais pense. 

In this sentence, r means it to he. 

(4) A past participle having en for its apparent direct 

object is invariable; as, — 

I am fond of flowers ; Ihave gath- J'aime beaucoup les fleurs; j'en 
ered some, ai cueilli. 

(5) The participles pu, d% voulu, are invariable when 

an infinitive is understood after them ; as, — 

/ have rendered him all the ser- Je lui ai rendu tous les services 
vices that I could, que j'ai pu (lui rendre) . 

(6) As intransitive verbs can have no direct object, their 
participles used with avoir remain invariable ^^ as, — 

The three leagues I walked this Les trois lieues que j'ai fait ce 

morning, matin. 

The hours I have been running, Les heures que j'ai couru. 

(7) A past participle followed by an infinitive agrees 
when the preceding pronoun is its direct object, but re- 
mains invariable if its direct object is in the infinitive; 

as, — 

Poor innocent women! I have Pauvres innocentes! Je les ai 

seen them dying, vues mourir. 

Poor innocent loomen ! I have Pauvres innocentes ! Je les ai vu 

seen them cast into prison, jeter en prison. 

* According to the Academy, the participles coute and valu, used in 
their proper meaning, are invariable, as a preposition is then under- 
stood ; but they are variable when used figuratively. For example, we 
should write, without agreement : Les mille francs que m'a coute mon 
voyage ; les mille francs que ce cheval a valu. And with agreement : 
Les peines que cette affaire m'a coutees ; les gratifications que votre 
protection m'a values. Grammarians, however, differ on this point. 



THE PARTICIPLE. 45 

As a simple and convenient method of applying the 
principle stated in (7), observe that a past participle 
followed by an infinitive agrees whenever the infinitive 
can be turned iiito a present participle. 

(8) An exception to this rule is the participle fait. 
Followed by an infinitive, it is always invariable; as, — 

He has had her put to deaths II I'a fait mourir. 

(9) The past participle preceded by an adverb of quan- 
tity always agrees with the complement of the adverb ; 
as, — 

Many errors have slipped into this Beaucoup d'erreurs se sont glis- 
story^ sees dans cette histoire. 

(10) The past participle preceded by two nouns united 
by de agrees with that noun to which it relates. If in- 
stead of the first noun there is le peu de, the same rule 
applies ; as, — 

The great number of faults which Le grand nombre de fautes que 

/ have observed proceed from j'ai remarque provient de votre 

your inattention, inapplication. 

A great many mistakes have Une multitude de fautes se sont 

slipped into your letter^ glissees dans votre lettre. 

The little attention that he has Le peu d'attention qu'il a montre 

given shows that he is unwoi*thy fait voir qu'il est indigne de 

of your interest^ votre interet. 

{Even) the little attention v'hich Le peu d'attention qu'il a montree 

he has given loill be useful to lui servira.- 

him, 



* The simplest way to ascertain whether le peu is the principal word 
is to suppress it. If it can be suppressed without altering the whole 
meaning, then the noun following le peu is the XDrincipal word ; if it 
cannot, then it is le peu itself. 



46 THE ADVEEB. 

THE ADVERB. 

Place of Adverbs. 

EuLE 90. — The simple adverb usually stands after the 
simple tense ; if the tense is compound, after the auxil- 
iary; as, — 

I am always thinfcing of them, Je pense toujours a eux. 

We have often spoken to him about Nous lui en avons souvent parle. 
it, 

Note that: (1) Bien, mal, mieux, jamais, and trop gen- 
erally precede the infinitive ; as, — 

He asks me to listen ivell, II me prie de bien ecouter. 

(2) In French the adverb is never put between the 
subject and the verb, as it is in English ; as, — 

I often see him, Je le vols souvent. 

EuLE 91. — Adverbs compounded of several words are 
placed after the participle ; as, — 

/ did it hastily, Je I'ai fait a la hate. 

Note that adverbs of order, and those which denote 
time in a determinate manner, are placed either before 
or after the verb; as, — 

To-day it is fine iveather ; perhaps Aujourd'hui il fait beau ; il pleuvra 

it will rain to-morroiv, peut-etre demain. 

/ ivant you to go and see the Je veux que d'abord vous alliez 

physician first, after that, do voir le medecin, ensuite vous 

as you choose, ferez ce que bon vous semblera. 

He came to me first, II vint d'abord a moi, or, d'abord 

il vint a moi. 



THE ADVERB. 47 

Particular Rules on /Ve.* 
Rule 92. —Ne is commonly used without pas or point : — 

(1) With the verbs cesser, oser, pouvoir, and, savoir 
(meaning pouvoir or followed by a conjunction) ;t as, — 

/ am alwaijs scolding you, Je ne cesse de vous gronder. 

I dare not go there, Je n'ose y aller. 

/ could not do it, Je ne saurais le faire. 

I do not knoio if he icill come, Je ne sais s'il viendra. 

(2) Before a subjunctive used negatively, when the first 
verb is followed by personne, nul, aucun, rien, nullement^ 
jamais, gu^re, or peu; as, — 

I see nobody hut loves you, Jene vols personne qui ne vous aime 

He envies everything he sees, II ne voit rien qui ne lui fasse envie. 

There are few pleasures that are II y a peu de plaisirs qui ne soient 

not bought too dear, achetes trop cher. 

(3) Before the verb of a dependent clause in a sentence 
interrogative in form but positive in meaning, or before 
the principal verb if it is preceded by qui; as, — 

Is there a man loho does not com- Y a-t-il un homme qui ne se plaigne 
plain of his felloio-creatures P de ses semblables ? 

Have you a friend ivho is not mine Avez-vous un ami qui ne soit aussi 
also ? le mien ? 

Who has not heard all that ? Qui n'a entendu dire tout cela ? 

* Pas and point must of c6urse be suppressed when there is in the 
sentence such a negative expression as aucun, nul, personne, guere, ja- 
mais, nuUeihent, ni . . . ni . . ., plus, rien, ne que (only), and also in such 
sentences as the following : — 

He does not see at all, II ne voit goutte. 

He speaks not a loord, II ne dit mot. 

I never saw him, Je ne I'ai vu de ma vie. 

I shall not speak of it to anybody, Je n'en parlerai a ame qui vive, or 

a qui que ce soit. 

t Also with bouger, in familiar style. 



48 THE ADVEEB. 

(4) Before the subjunctive used affirmatively, when it 
is required by a verb or a conjunction implying fear, or by 
the verbs empicher and prendre garde ]^ as, — 

We fear he ivill comey Nous craignons qu'il ne vienne. 

For fear he ivill come, De peur qu'il ne vienne. 

(5) After the verbs desesperer, douter, disconvenir, and 
iiier, used negatively and followed by que; as, — 

I have no doubt hut you are righty Je ne doute pas que vous n'ayez 

raison. 

(6) After plus, moins, autre, and autrement, followed by 
que, and placed before an indicative; as, — 

He ivrites better than you think, II ecrit mieux que vous ne pensez. 

But if the first verb is negative or interrogative, or if 
there is an adverb between que and the verb, the ne is 
left out (see Eule 24). 



(7) After a moins que {unless) used affirmatively ; as, — 

/ will go to him unless you your- J'irai le trouver, a moins que vous 
self go y n'y alliez vous-meme. 

(8) After si used negatively, and meaning a moins que; 
as, — 

I ivill go to Mm, if you yourself J'irai le trouver si voUs n'y allez 
do not go, vous-meme. 

(9) After que beginning a sentence, and meaning pour- 
quoi; as, — 

Why do you not come ivith us 9 Que ne venez-vous avec nous ? 

This way of speaking is used only by way of implying a certain 
degree of reproach or regret. 

* See Rule 76, second paragraph. 



THE PREPOSITION. 49 

(10) After depuis que, il y a . . . que, followed by a past 

tense, with a negative meaning ; as, — 

How have you been since I saw Comment vous etes-vous porte 

you ? depuis que je ne vous ai vu ? 

It is three months since I met him i II y a trois mois que je ne I'ai 

rencontre. 

Note that if the verb is in the present, pas or point 

must be used; as, — 

Now that I do not see him, Depuis que je ne le vois pas. 

We have not spoken to each other II y a un an que nous ne nous par- 
for a year, Ions point. 

(11) After the impersonal verbs il s'en faut que, il s'en 
faut beaucoup or de beaucoup que, peu s'en faut que, il tient 
a moi, a lui, etc., and que, used negatively or interroga- 
tively ;. as, — 

Little loould make me strike you, II ne tient a rien que je ne vous 

frappe. 
He almost named you, Peu s'en est fallu qu'il ne vous 

nommat. 

(12) See Eule 101 (2). 



THE PREPOSITION. 

De, 

Eule 93. — (1) It has been said (Enle 32) that de is 
used after numbers, before the following adjective or 
participle; as, — 

One man killed, Un homme de tue. 

(2) It is also used between quelque chose, rien, quelqu'un. 

personne, que (interrogative), quoi, quoi que ce soit, quoi 

que ce ffit, and the following adjective or participle; as, — 

Is there anything new ? Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau ? 

On a withered trunk nothing good Sur un tronc desseche rien de bon 
can grow, ne peut naitre. 

£ 



60 THE PREPOSITION. 

Is anybody ill in your house ? Y a-t-il quelqu'un de malade chez 

vous? 
There loas nobody ivounded, II n'y a eu personne de blesse. 

What is the neivs 9 Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau ? 

The Translation of To. 

EuLE 94. — (1) The preposition to as the sign of an 
infinitive is translated by pour, when it means in order 
to; as, — 
»S7ie said so to please yoUj EUe I'a dit pour vous faire plaisir. 

(2) It is translated by de when the infinitive is the 
same as of or fiom with a participle ; as, — 

We had a7i opportunity to see (i.e. Nous avons eu Poccasion de voir 

of seeing) your uncle y - votre oncle. 

(3) It is translated by a when the infinitive is the 
same as in with a participle, and also when the active in- 
finitive may be changed into the passive infinitive ; as, — 

He encouraged me to persevere, II m'encouragea a perseverer. 

A house to let, Une maison a louer. 

The advice is not to he despised, L'avis n'est pas a mepriser. 

Depuis, Pendant, Pour (for). 

EuLE 95. — Depuis marks the beginning of a period of 

time; as, — 

From ten o'clock till tioelve, Depuis dix heures jusqu'a midi. 

I have had this cold for eight days, Je suis enrhume depuis huit jours. 

Pendant marks the duration, and may often be under- 
stood; as, — 

It rained for tioo months, II plut pendant deux mois. 

I v^orked {for) tioelve hours, • J'ai travaille douze heures. 

Pour denotes the end ; as, — 

/ am going away for six weeks, Je pars pour six semaines. 

/ have enough paper for three J'ai du papier pour trois mois. 
months. 




THE PREPOSITION. 51 

Dans and En. 

Rule 96. — Dans has a precise and determinate sense, 
while en is vague and undeterminate. In other words, in 
is expressed by dans before the article, the demonstrative 
and possessive adjectives, and pronouns, and by en in the 
other cases ; as, — 

In the last loar^ Dans la derniere guerre. 

In time of loar, En temps de guerre. 

In this garden, Dans ce jardin. 

I have confidence in you, J"ai confiance en vous. 

EuLE 97. — When used to express time, dans marks the 
epoch, and en the duration ; as, — 

He icill arrive in three daijs {when II arrivera dans trois jours. 

three days have elapsed), 
It will take him three days to ar- II arrivera en trois jours. 

rive, '^A^ 

X^ULE 98. — /?i, placed before names of towns, is trans- 
lated by a; as, — 

He died in London, II est mort a Londres. 

In, placed before names of countries, is translated by 
en;^ as, — 

Iivas horn in France, Je suis ne en France. 

He lives in Italy, II demeure en Italie. 

4 

Should the name of a country be accompanied by an 

adjective or any attribute, dans must be used; as, — 

I lived three years in North Amei'- J'ai demeure trois ans dans 
ica, I'Amerique du Nord. 

* But if the name of the country is masculine or plural then au or 
aux is used ; as, etre or aller au Mexique, au Chili, aux Etats Unis. A la 
is used before the names of a few islands ; as, a la Jamaique, a la Marti- 
nique, a la Guadeloupe. 



52 THE CONJUNCTION. 

From, 

EuLE 99. — From (a person's house) is translated by de 
chez; as, — 

We come from our uncle's, Nous venons de chez notre oncle. 

From (a person) is translated by de la part de ; as, — 

Go from me to your mother' Sf Allez de ma part chez madame 

votre mere. 

Repetition of Prepositions. 

EuLE 100. — Prepositions are generally repeated before 
each noun, unless the different nouns are synonymous ; 
as,— 

The same prejudices are to be On trouve les memes prejuges en 
found in Europe, Asia, Africa, Europe, en Asie, en Afrique, et 

a7id even in America, jusqu'en Amerique. 

Note that the prepositions a, de, and en are always 
repeated. 

^ THE CONJUNCTION. 

Que. 

EuLE 101. — (1) Que is often used in place of the con- 
junctions afin que, a moins que, avant que, aussitdt que, 
cependant, comme, de orainte que, de peur que, depuis que, 
d^s que, de ce que, jusqu'a ce que, paroe que, quand, quoi- 
que, sans que, soit que ; as, — 

Come {here) lohile I speak to you, Venez, que je vous parle. 
Not a day passes but it rains. Pas un jour ne se passe qu'il ne 

pleuve. 

1 (2) Ne is required before the following verb when que 
stands for a moins que, avant que, de peur que, de crainte 



THE CONJUNCTION. 63 

que, depuis que (or il y a . . . que), sans que, jusqu'i ce que; 

as, — 

/ will not set out till he arrives, Je ne partirai pas qu'il n'arrive. 

Observe that this form of expression is to be used only when 
the first clause of the sentence is negative. 

Rule 102. — Que is also used for lioiv, how much, hoiv 
many, and expresses wonder, irony, indignation. The 
adjective following it must be translated without tr^s, 
bien, or fort; as, — 

Hoio (very) unhappy that woman Que cette femme a I'air mal- 
looks ! heureux ! 

The noun, adjective, or adverb following hoiv, hoio 
much, how many, is often put after the verb in French ; 
as, — 

What poioer virtue has over the Que la vertu a de pouvoir sur les 
most ferocious minds ! ames les plus feroces ! 

Rule 103. — When the conjunction and with a verb 
follows the verbs to go, to come, to run, the French omit 
the conjunction; as, — 

Go and tell him, Allez lui dire. 

Will you come and take a walk Voulez-vous venir faire un tour 

ivith me ? avec moi ? 

Run and fetch my spectacles, Courez me chercher mes lunettes. 



II. EXERCISES ON THE PRINCIPAL 
RULES OF SYNTAX. 



[Superior figures refer to the preceding rules.] 



(Rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.) 

1. La vertu, dit Platon, c'est la ressemblance a Dieu 
par la justice, la saintete et la sagesse, dans la mesure 
de nos forces. 2. II faut tou jours agir avec franchise, 
si Ton veut etre sincerement heureux. 3. Sujets, amis, 
parents, tout Pa trahi. 4. Quand j'etais en pension, 
j^avais deux francs cinquante centimes par semaine pour 
mes menus plaisirs. 5. Combien se vendent^^ les cerises 
et les fraises dans ce pays ? 6. Les cerises se vendent 
dix centimes le demi-kilo, et les fraises vingt' centimes. 

7. IS'e m'avez-YOus pas dit que M. votre pere est medecin ? 

8. Non, monsieur, il est avocat, mais il a fait des etudes 
de medecine. 9. Quelle triste matinee! 

10. ^^Les hommes sont egaux; ce n'est point la naissance, 

C'est la seule vertu qui fait leur difference." 

— Voltaire. 

11. "Patience et longueur de temps 

Pont plus que force ni que rage.'' — La Fontaine. 
54 



EXERCISES. 55 

2. 

prayer, priere (f.). to resolve, resoudre. 

reproach, reproche (m.). contemporary , contemporain. 

to move, emouvoir. to earn, gagner. 

contentment, contentement (m.). cruelty, cruaute (f.). 

riches, richesses (f.). in the sight of, aux yeux de. 

1. The wise (man) prefers virtue to beauty. 2. His- 
tory is the portrait of men and times. 3. Spanish is 
easy, but German is difficult. 4. Neither prayers nor 
reproaches could '^ move him. 5. Contentment is better 
than {passe) riches. 6. In ^ time of war the savages of 
xlmerica are armed with^^ tomahawks. 7. When we 
arrived from Holland, we resolved to go to Ireland. 
8. Louis the Eighteenth/'^ king of France, and George 
the Fourth ^ of England were contemporaries. 9. He is 
a physician, and his brother a grocer. 10. It is almost 
impossible to hide envy, malice, cruelty, avarice, and 
anger. 11. Glory, riches, genius, honors, are nothing 
in the sight of God. 12. Centurions and soldiers, both 
murmured^- against the general's orders. 13. Poverty 
is no crime. 14. Alexanders and Caesars are always 
fatal to the world. 15. What a fine coat you have ! 
16. In France, St. Xicholas' day is the fete of the boys, 
and St. Catherine's day that of girls. 17. The gentle- 
man ^ you see is a Dutchman. 18. The AtJialie of Eacine 
is the masterpiece of the^French theatre. 

3. 

(Rules 7, 8.) 

1. Je veux a la campagne du petit-lait, de bon potage. 

2. J'ai vu dans ce musee des bas-reliefs magnifiques. 

3. Ce sont des gens de bien ; ce sont de braves, d'excel- 
lentes gens. 4. AUez-vous-en tons, je ne veux pas de 



56 EXERCISES. 

bruit chez moi. 5. Je ne vols dans sa conduite que de 
ces inegalites auxquelles les femmes les mieux nees sont 
le plus sujettes. 6. Dans les traductions, il n'est guere 
possible de rendre un vers par un vers, lorsque cette 
precision est le plus desirable. 7. Les Francs, peuple 
sauvage, ne vivaient que de legumes, de fruits, de racines 
et des animaux qu'ils avaient pris a la chasse. 8. Les 
grands ont des plaisirs, le peuple a de la joie. 

9. ^^C'est de sang qu'ils ont soif, c'est du sang qu'ils 
demandent.'^ — Delille. 

10. " II est guinde sans cesse, et dans tons ses propos 

On voit qu'il se travaille a dire des bons mots.'' 

— MOLIERE. 

11. ^^Entre nos ennemis 

Les plus a craindre sont souvent les plus i^etits.'' 

— La Fontaine. 

4. 

to dry up, dessecher. numerous, nombreux. 

osti'ich, antrache (f.).^ to itness, temoin. 

to swalloio, avaler. praise, louange (f.), eloge (m.). 

to he enough for (p.^) , suffire a. foolishly, follement. 

* We give below the shortest and most satisfactory rule yet given for 
mastering the gender of French nouns. It is due to M. Albites,.formerly 
teacher of French in Birmingham. Note that the rule does not apply 
to nouns the gender of which is evident. 

Nouns having the following terminations are feminine : — 

ale, ole, ule ; 

rre, lie, ie, or ie; 

be, ce, de; 

se, te, te ; 
(as, cathedrale, ecole, nature, faveur, terre, 
beaute, marche, maison). Nouns not having these terminations are 
masculine ; as, port, cheval, cafe, crime, village. There are, of course, 
exceptions to the rule, but, according to M. Albites, it holds good in 
ninety-nine cases out of one hundred. 
^ p. = iDerson; th. = thing. 



ure, 


ere, eur ; 


ee, 


ue, ion; 


fe, 


ne, pe ; 


ve. 


he, aison ; 


terre, 


conversation, clemence, 



EXERCISES. 57 

change, monnaie (f.). hoio it is, comment cela se fait. 

to beg one's pardon, demander counsel, cqvlsq\\s {in. ^\.). 
pardon a (p.)- 

1. There are winds which pass over tlie country and 
dry up plants. 2. He says^ he has no money, but don't 
believe him. 3. Ostriches often ^ swallow iron, copper, 
stones, glass, and Avood. 4. Bread and water will be 
enough for me. 5. In order to^^ write, one must have 
paper and ink. 6. In order to write well, one must have 
good paper and good ink. 7. He who has numerous wit- 
nesses of his death, dies with courage. 8. I have made 
use of the fine books you gave me. 9. There are praises 
which blame, and reproaches that praise. 10. Do not give 
her any money, she would go and^^^ spend it foolishly. 
11. He has always good reasons to give us. 12. Did you 
not say that you had some people "^ at your house to-night? 
13. I hope you have some change ? 14. I beg your 
pardon, sir, I have none. 15. I don't know how it is, 
I never have any change. 16. It is this thought that t 
torments her the most. 17. Do not give your friend the 
most agreeable counsel, but the most useful. 

5. 

(Rules 9, 10, 11, 12, 13.) 

1. Cette jeune fille va tons les dimanches a la grand'- 
messe avec sa grand'mere et ses deux grand'peres.l 

* Translate peo^^Ze by monde when it means company. 

^ When yon have to translate the relative that or lohich, put qui if 
that or ichich is next the verb in English, and que if it is separated 
from the verb by one or more words. Exception : when ivhich is pre- 
ceded by a preposition, translate it according to Rule 53. 

i AYith some feminine nouns in daily use, the e mute of grande is sup- 
pressed and an apostrophe is put instead. Grand' is then invariable; 
so we say, des grand'rues, des grand'messes, etc. 



58 EXERCISES. 

2. Presque tons les tableaux de ce peintre sont des chefs- 
d'oeuvre. 3. Allez dans la prairie, et vous ponrrez 
admirer a la fois mille arcs-en-ciel peints snr chaque 
gontte de rosee. 4. Les vers a sole sont si communs a 
Tonquin que la sole n'y est pas plus cliere que le coton. 
0. Allez an marclie an ble, vous y verrez rhomme au 
manteau noir qui demeure pres de la maison de campagne 
de M. votre pere. 6. Ceux qui viennent interrompre des 
tete-a-tete ennuyeux sont toujours les bienvenus. 7. Une 
infinite de jeunes gens se perdent parce qu'ils frequentent 
de mauvaises societes. 8. La plupart"^ croient que le 
bonheur est dans la ricliesse ; ils se troinpent. 9. Quel- 
ques sages ont cette opinion, le reste des homines est de 
mon avis. 

10. '' Le reste pour son Dieu montre un oubli fatal."' 

— Racine. 

11. " La moitie des humains rit aux depens de Tautre.'' 

— Destouches. 

12. '' Ciel ! quel pompeux amas d'esclaves a genoux 

Est aux pieds de ce roi qui les fait trembler tons ! '' 

— Voltaire. 

6. 

mco^le, marbre (m.) . prefecture, \ ^^lef-lieu (m.) . 

mill, moulin (m.). ' ^ de prefecture. 

to he loest from, etre a I'ouest de. mastei^piece , chef-d'ceuvre (m.)- 

to defeat, battre, defaire. to rear, elever. 

crowd, foule (f.). raulherrrij bush, murier (m.). 

to impede, retarder. veil, voile (m.)- 

annexation, einnexion. Turkeij , Tmqnie (f.). 

Savoy, Savoie (f.). fig, figue (f.). 

1. Has your servant washed the marble table ? 2. "We 
bought a coffee-mill yesterday, which ^^ goes very well. 

* The verb is put in the plural after la plupart used without comple- 
ment, and in the singular after le reste, whatever be its complement. 



EXERCISES. 59 

3. There are two water mills on that farm. 4. Have you 
seen my silk gown and my gold watch? 5. The forest 
of the Ardennes is west from the Luxemburg province. 
6. The army of the infidels was entirely defeated. 7. The 
crowd of carriages impeded our march. 8. The annexa- 
tion of Savoy and Nice has given France three new 
prefectures. 9. Le Cicl and Athalie are dramatic master- 
pieces. 10. In warm countries silk-worms are reared on 
mulberry bushes. 11. Most men recollect the services 
they render, better than those they receive. 12. Most 
people desire old age, and complain when they have 
reached ^'-^ it. 13. The troop of soldiers of which they 
have spoken to you, has entered ^^ into the village and 
plundered ^^ it. 14. Why has not your sister a velvet 
bonnet? 15. She has bought a silk gown and a lace 
veil. 16. The Clyde-built steam-boats are famous over 
all the world. 17. The English import a great quantity 
of Malta oranges and Turkey figs. 18. The family is in 
the country; they will not come back before the 10th of 
next month. 



(Rules 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22.) 

1. Sur le continent presque toutes les horloges pub- 
liques sonnent les quarts et les demies. 2. La demie est- 
elle sonnee? 3. Les montagnards qui ont en toutes 
saisons les jambes nues, marchent rarement nu-tete.^ 
4. Vous n'en avez pris qu'une demi-livre, mais moi j'en 
ai achete une livre et demie. 5. Les Polonais ne trou- 
vent pas Phuile bonne si^-^^^ elle ne sent fort. 6. Xeron 



* Demi and nu are variable when following the noun, and invari- 
able when preceding it. 



60 EXERCISES. 

etait anssi odieux aiix senateurs et aux simples citoyens 
qu'il etait cruel en vers eux. 7. II est necessaire a Pliomme 
de travailler et de prendre de Pexercice et du repos. 

8. II est beau de nionrir pour la defense de son pays. 

9. Vous avez deux fils et deux fiUes tres-spirituels et 
tres-jolis. 

10. ^-11 me semble deja que ces murs, que ces voutes^ 

Sont prets a m'accuser.^^— Racine. 

11. " Le f er, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prete.^^ 

— Racine. 

12. " Que ^°- d'autres a ma place auraient pu rester court! '^ 

— C. Delavigne. 

8. 

to shoiv, montrer, faire voir. ivholesome, sain. 

Fenelon, Fenelon. holly, honx (jn.). 

by turns, tour a tour. edged, borde. 

to astonish, etonner. spine, epine (f.). 

loud, haut. deception, imposture (f.). 

to stop, s'arreter. guinea, guinee (f.). 

misconduct, mauvaise conduite, at once, tout de suite. 

1. His father and mother are dead. 2. Fenelon has 
shown by turns astonishing virtue or genius. 3. These 
girls speak too loud. 4. She stopped short. 5. That 
flower smells bad. 6. A good king often loses, by the 
misconduct of his ministerSj the affection of his best 
subjects. 7. Have you never read any Freiicli poem ? 
8. Bitter fruits are often the most wholesome. 9. The 
green leaves of the holly are edged with spines. 10. An 
affected simplicity is a delicate deception. 11. I like the 
simple and cordial manners of the Scotch. 12. I am 
fatigued with running. 13. Voltaire was greedy of 
praise, and insatiable of glory. 14. That is easy to say, 
but difficult to do. 15. For half a guinea, he walked 
barefooted for an hour and a half. 16. She is a good, 



EXERCISES. 61 

amiable, and virtuous woman. 17. It is necessary to go 
there at once. 18. He respects and obeys his uncle. 

9. 

(Rules 23, 24, 25, 26.) 

Ic Plus un honime a de vrai nierite, x^lus il Papplaudit 
dans les autres. 2. Qu'il ne Use pas plus, mais qu'il lise 
mieux qu'il ne fait. 3. II assure qu'il ferai^ bieii un 
kilometre en cinq minutes, mais cela est bien plus facile 
a dire qu'a faire. 4. Mon voyage m'a coute beaucoup 
plus cher que je ne m^ attendais. 5. Moins on pense, 
plus on parle. 6. Vous etes plus grand que moi de toute 
la tete. 7. Je voudrais bien savoir si elle se porte mieux 
que quand elle etait en Hollande. 8. Etes-vous plus 
savant qu'il Petait? 9. C'est tout autre chose que je ne 
croyais. 10. Plus vous kii ferez de reproches, moins il 
travaillera ; le mieux est de ne lui rieii dire. 11. Ce que 
vous me dites de mon frere me fait bien plaisir, il s'est 
comporte beaucoup mieux que je ne Taurais cru. 

12. '^ Je vous entends ici mieux que vous ne pensez." 

— Racine. 

10. 

obliging, obligeant. care, souci (m.). 

it is better (imp.), il vaut mieux. artless, naif. 

/ had rather^ j'aimerais mieux.^ to endure, supporter. 

to do a service, rendre service a. to get rid of, se defaire de. 

1. He is older than you by three years, and taller by 
a whole head. 2. You are the most obliging man in 
the town. 3. He has gained this year more than a 
thousand pounds. 4. It is better ^ to suffer than to act 

* Although valoir mieux and aimer mieux require no preposition after 
them, yet, by exception, than following them is translated by que de 
before an infinitive. 



62 EXERCISES. 

unjustly. 5. I had rather die than do it. 6. That girl 
speaks better than she writes. 7. I am better than when 
I was in France. 8. The more difficult a 'thing is, the 
more honorable it is. 9. Eussia is the greatest empire 
in the world. 10. The poorer people are, the fewer cares 
they have. 11. His sister is the prettiest girl in the 
town. 12. France has more than five hundred thousand 
soldiers. 13. The more we ^'^ read the fables of the good 
and artless La Fontaine, the more we are convinced that 
they are the manual of a man of taste. 14. It is more 
difficult to endure misfortune than to get rid of it. 
15. Fenelon said it was better to prevent evil than to be 
obliged to punish it. 16. The more difficult a thing is, 
the more attention we^^ must give to it. 17. Since the 
invention of gunpowder, battles are less bloody than they 
were. 18. I have not seen him for more than two years. 

11. 

(Rules 27, 28, 29, 30.) 

1. J^ai mal aux dents. 2. J'y ai mal aussi. 3. Les 
negres ont la tete ronde, le nez epate et le front saillant. 
4. Lorsque Charles XII regut le coup qui termina dans 
un instant ses exploits et sa vie, il porta la main sur son . 
epee. 5. Je soaffre a mon genou."^ 6. Toute fiere qu'elle 
est, il lui a fallu boire Paffront. 7. Nous avons fait 
prisonniers quelque mille hommes et sommes restes 
maitres du champ de bataille. 8. Quelle que soit votre 
impatience et quelque ennuyeuses que soient ces de- 
marches, il faut qu'elles se fassent. 9. La valeur, 

* The possessive mon, ton, son, etc., may be used when speaking of 
an habitual pain 



EXERCISES. * 63 

tout lieroique qii'elle est, ne suffit pas, a clit Massillon, 
pour faire cles heros. 10. On I'a trouvee tout en 
pleurs. 

11. " Eome n'est plus dans Eome, elle est toute ou je suis." 

— CORNEILLE. 

12. '^ Un tout petit enfant demande qu'on Tassiste, 

En soufflant dans ses mains toutes rouges de froid." 

— A. GUIRAUD. 

12. 

ball, boulet (m.). f^ j^^^^ J entendre dire. 

to take of, -i importer. ' ^ apprendre. 

to shoot off, f the back, le dos. 

to sprain, demettre. perishable, perissable. 

wrist, poignet (m.). wet, mouille. 

gout, goutte (f.). to boast, se vanter de. 

to make mistakes, se tromper. to stand by, se tenir pres de. 

to leave, quitter. ashes, cendres (f. pi.). 

to split, fendre. shepherd, berger. 

1. My brother broke his leg yesterday. 2. A cannon 
ball took off his arm. 3. She has sprained her wrist. 
4. His gout has not left him. 5. Do not speak so loud, 
you split my head. 6. Your hands are always cold, 
in summer as in winter. 7. Their hands were warm, 
but their feet w^ere cold. 8. Have you heard that she 
has lost her reason ? 9. My back is very sore to-day. 
10. Whatever your fortune is, it is perishable. 11. My 
sister is quite wet. 12. Her face is quite scorched. 

13. However "^ eminent your talents may be, do not boast 
of them. 14. However prudently men act, they always 

* The final e of quelque (when written in one word) is never elided 
— quelque autre, quelque aimable, quelque enfant. But, when it is 
combined with un, they form a single word, and are written quelqu'un, 
quelqu'une, quelques-uns, quelques-unes. For the suppression of the 
vowel e, see Note, page 57. 



64 EXERCISES. 

run the risk of making mistakes. 15. Whatever your 
virtues are, do not believe yourself better than others. 
16. In the last engagement our general lost his right 
leg. 17. My brother was wounded in his shoulder, and 
I, who stood by him, had my arm taken off. 18. The 
ashes of the shepherd and of the king are alike. 

13. 

(Rules 31, 32, 33.) 

1. Le froid fut tres-grand en 1789. 2. II y a en France 
35,000,000 d^habitants. 3. L'armee de Sesostris, com- 
posee de 600,000 hommes de pied, de 24,000 chevaux et 
de 27,000 chars, etait commandee par 1700 officiers choisis 
parmi les compagnons de son enfance. 4. L'homme ne 
vit pas aujourd'hui au-dela de 80 ans; il vivait autrefois 
plus de 300 ans. 5. Les premiers Chretiens faisaient 
enterrer avec eux le livre des Evangiles. 6. De quel 
cote se trouve le numero 200 ? 7. On fait par le chemin 
de fer plus de trente milles par heure. 8. Vous ap- 
prendrez cent lignes par coeur pour vendredi. 9. Napo- 
leon, Chateaubriand et ]\P'^ de Stael naquirent en 1769. 
10. Dans la bataille il y eut 600 hommes de tues et 3000 
de blesses. 11. Les debris du colosse de Ehodes furent 
vendus a un marchand juif qui en eut la charge de 200 
chameaux. 12. L'airain de ce colosse montait encore, 
880 ans apres sa chute, a 720,000 livres ou a 7200 quintaux. 

14. 

Lacedsemon, Lacedemone (f.). the Bastile, la Bastille. 

Athens, Athenes (f.)- engineer, ingenieur. 

to found, fonder. was born, naquit. 

to declcu^e war against, declarer Troy, Txoie (f.)- 

la guerre a. to intend, avoir I'intention de ; 
to he compared, a comparer. compter. 



EXERCISES. 65 

1. You will receive three hundred and ^ eighty francs 
to-morrow.^ 2. There are twenty-five pupils in this 
class. 3. Lacedaemon was built one ' thousand five 
hundred and sixteen years before Christ. 4. Athens 
was founded one thousand five hundred and eighty-two 
years before Christ. 5. In the year one thousand ^ seven 
hundred and fifty-five^ ^ England declared war against 
France. 6. Louis the Fourteenth was a great warrior ; 
but he was not to be compared to Francis the First nor 
to Charles the Twelfth. 7. The Bastile was taken by 
the people on " the fourteenth of Jul}^, seventeen hundred 
and eighty-nine. 8. They arrived in Paris on the first 
of June, and they left on the tenth. 9. There are ten 
boxes sent, and three left. 10. Date your letter May 
the eleventh. 11. Marshal^ Vauban, the greatest 
engineer who^" ever lived, was born in sixteen hun- 
dred and three. 12. He fortified three hundred old 
towns. 13. He was present at one hundred and forty 
engagements. 14. This rule is to be found on the 
hundred and eightieth page. 15. It was about the year 
tvfo thousand seven hundred and ninety-six of the crea- 
tion that Troy was taken and destroyed by the Greeks. 
16. I intend to go to Edinburgh on the first or the third 

* The conjunction et is used in only six numbers: 21 (vingt-et-un), 
31, 41, 51, 61, and 71. < 

^ Neither a nor one are expressed before mille and cent. 

^ Mille {thousand) is written mil in reckoning the years of the 
Christian era. 

§ The hyphen is used to connect the different parts of a French 
number only from 17 to 99. 

" The word on used before days and dates is neve?' translated in 
French. 

^ The article le, la, les, is used in French before nouns of title or 
dignity, when these are not used adjectively ; as, Le marechal Vauban, 
le docteur J., etc. 

F 



66 EXERCISES. 

of next month. 17. They were only three hundred and 
twenty, and in spite of their inferiority they attacked 
and beat the enemy. 18. Have you begun your letter ? 
There are only three lines written. 

15. 

(Rule 34.) 

1. Voyez que de beaux livres on m'a donnes ! mais 
aussi j'ai Men travaille pour les gagner. 2. Si seulement 
elle me faisait voir la lettre que son frere lui a ecrite, je 
saurais ce qu'il faut repondre. 3. Finissez donc,"^ vous 
lui faites mal. 4. lis sont trop fiers pour m'ecrire apres 
Taffront que je leur ai fait. 5. Je ne le regrette pas, ils 
ne m'ont jamais fait que de la peine. 6. Si vous ne leur 
ecrivez pas, ou si du moins vous ne passez pas chez eux, 
ils ne voudront plus vous voir. 7. Je suis force, Mon- 
sieur, de m'adresser a vous, puisque je ne puis avoir 
recours a elle. 8. 'Ne lui parlez jamais de moi, elle me 
deteste, et je le lui rends bien. 9. Quand on sent, dit 
Vauvenargues, qu'on n'a pas de quoi se faire estimer de 
quelqu'un, on est bien pres de le hair. 10. Je vous 
donnerai un conseil salutaire, et, pour recompense, je ne 
vous demande que le secret. 

11. ^^Dissipe tes douleurs, 

Et ne me trouble pas par ces indignes pleurs." 

— BOILEAU. 

12. " Je vous Pai deja dit, aimez qu'on vous censure; 

Mais ne vous rendez pas des qu'unsot vous reprend." 

— BOILEAU. 



* Done is often used, especiaUy after an imperative, to give more 
energy to the expression, to mark some impatience, etc. 



EXERCISES. 67 

16. 

thimble, de (m.)- to come and meet, venir au-devant de. 

loorJc-box, boite a ouvrage (f .)• to be quite dark,iaire tout afait nuit. 

to leave it to, s'en remettre a. to apply to (p.), s'adresser a; avoir 

to lay it to, s'en prendre a. recours a. 

to appeal to, en appeler a. to succeed {to be successful) , reussir. 

to trust (p.), se fier a. to inquire for, demander (p.). 

to be out, etre sorti. 

1. She gave me a silver thimble, and I gave her a 
work-box. 2. Do you not speak to him when yon meet 
him? 3. Ko, my mother has forbidden me to speak to 
him. 4. Your brother wrote to yon three months ago ; 
have yon not yet replied to him ? 5. Did yon think of 
her when yon wrote to John? 6. Do not go with him ; 
yon wonld arrive after ns. 7. That does not belong to 
yon, it belongs to me. 8. He leaves it to me. 9. She 
lays it to ns. 10. I was coming to yon when they 
obliged me to go to her. 11. I appeal to them. 12. I 
speak to him, and not to them. 13. Yon have deceived 
me, I shall not trnst yon any more. 14. Yon shonld^^ 
come and meet ns before it is qnite dark. 15. If yon 
apply to him yon will not sncceed. 16. He inquired for 
me, but he was told^^ that I was out. 17. I wonder if 
she will come to me when she '^ sees me. 18. Yon are 
hurting my leg. 

17. 

(Rule 35.) 

1. Avez-vons qnelqnes verites a faire entendre anx 
rois ne les lenr dites j)as ; vons epronveriez bientot les 
effets de lenr courronx. 2. Elle ne vons Panrait pas ecri±, 
3^92(8) gi^g n'avait crn vons etre ntile. 3. Ma soenr 
anrait vonln qne je Ini pretasse les denx livres dont vons 



68 EXERCISES. 

m'avez fait cadean. 4. Je ne les Ini clonnerai pas, car 
elle ne me les rendrait jamais. 5. La derniere fois que 
j'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir, voiis avez promis de m'aider 
de vos conseils, ne vous le rappelez-vous pas ? 6. Je lui 
enverrai ce paquet sans qu'il ait besoin de me le demander. 

7. Faites-moi le plaisir de dire a M""® votre mere que je 
compte aller lui presenter mes respects un de ces jours. 

8. Veuillez m'entendre, je vous en supplie ; ne me ren- 
voyez pas ainsi a lui ; il se fait un jeu de mes prieres. 

9. Est-ce que vous n'avez pas vu le livre que je lui ai 
prete ? 10. Pardon, Monsieur, elle me I'a fait voir liier 
matin. 11. Auriez-vous la bonte de me preter cet album 
jusqu'a demain soir? j'aurai soin de vous le renvoyer. 

12. ^-Manger Therbe d'autrui! quel crime abominable! 
Eien que la mort n'etait capable 
D'expier son forfait. On le lui fit Men voir.'' 

— La Fontaine. 

18. 

to bring (here), apporter. to have a fancy for, avoir du gout pour. 

to confess, avouer. ivithout ceasing, sans cesse. 

1. If you had asked it from me, I should have given it 
to you with pleasure. 2. I shall not speak to him,, but I 
shall write him a long letter. 3. Do not give it to her ; 
keep it for yourself. 4. They would "^ hot show them to 
us. 5. You must bring it to them. 6. They must not 
say so. 7. That box is very pretty; I don't think he 
will give it to us. 8. He intends to ask you (for) your 
flowers ; give them to him. 9. Do not give them to him. 

10. Keep them for me. 11. Believe me; confess your 
fault to me. 12. Do not repeat that to him. 13. I 
should never have given it to her, if she had not asked 



EXERCISES. 69 

me for it. 14. Here is some good cloth which is not 
very dear ; I shall give it to yon, if yon will lend me three 
hnndred and seventy francs. 15. Please lend me yonr 
pencil ; I shall retnrn it to yon to-morrow. 16. They have 
been songht for everywhere, and have not been found. 
17. I no longer have a fancy for these books ; put them 
elsewhere. 18. I do not understand you; you do it^ 
undo it^ and do it again without ceasing. 

19. 

(Rules 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43.) 

1. Fais-leur"^ observer que rien ne contribue plus a 
Peconomie et a la proprete que de tenir chaque chose a 

* AVhen faire is followed by an infinitive, it must be accompanied by 
the pronoun lui, leur, if the infinitive has a direct object ; as, — 

I caused him to drink a glass of loine, Je lui ai fait boire un verre de vin. 
They pi'ocured employment for him, On lui fit obtenir un emploi. 

But if the infinitive has no direct object, put le, la, les, instead of lui, 
leur; as, — 

They made him consent to that On le fit consentir a cette de- 
request, mande. 

When, instead of a pronoun placed before faire, there is a noun 
placed after, put a in the cases which would require lui, leur, and no 
preposition in the cases which would require le, la, les ; as, — 

I caused that man to drink^ a J'ai fait boire un verre de vin a 

glass of wine, cet homme. 

I shall make that man consent to Je ferai consentir cet homme a 

that request, cette demande. 

Cet homme is, in the first case, indirect object of faire boire ; in the 
second, direct object of faire consentir. 

A is also used after some other French locutions which would require 
the accusative in English, such as ouir dire, entendre dire, voir faire, 
voir donner, etc. ; as, — 

I heard your brother say that you J'ai entendu dire a votre frere que 
ivould come, vous viendriez. 



70 EXERCISES. 

sa place. 2. N^accordez pas toute votre attention a cet 
enfant ; partagez-la entre tons. 3. Nous aimons mieux 
voir ceux a qui nous faisons du bien que ceux qui nous 
en font. 4. Ne craignez pas de multiplier vos bienfaits, 
inais ne les reprochez jamais, si vous voulez en gouter le 
fruit. 5. Vous decidez sans examen qu'il a eu tort de 
tenter cette entreprise ; et je crois, moi, qu'il en retirera 
honneur et profit. 6. Je recois votre lettre, et je me 
hate d'y repondre. 7. Quant a la raison que vous 
m^alleguez, je m'y rends. 8. Je vous laisserai ce livre 
pour quinze francs; il m'en a coiite vingt. 9. Je vous 
recommande encore ce jeune homme, et tachez de vous 
occuper de lui plus activement que vous ne vous en etes 
occupe jusqu'a present. 10. Si vos amis commettent 
des fautes graves, reprochez-les-leur franchement. 

11. ^^La fortune a son prix; Pimprudent en abuse, 

L^hypocrite en medit, et I'honnete homme en use.'' 

— Delille. 

12. " La, regardez-moi la durant cet entretien, 

Et jusqu'au moindre mot imprimez4e-vous bien." 

— MOLIERE. 

20. 

plate, assiette (f.). to devote, consacrer. 

for, (conj.), car. Jit for, propre a. . 

to keep away, s'eloigner; se tenir to do loithout, se passer de. 

eloigne. to bring hack, ramener. 

spirited, diXdLQnt. /rame, cadre (m.). 

to go near, s'approcher de. to bring {to take)y porter. 

1. Bring me a clean plate, for this is dirty. 2. This 
road is very dangerous ; keep away from it. 3. You have 
got fine cloth ; give me some. 4. Buy some, if you wish 
to have it. 5. That horse is too spirited, don't go nea,r it. 
6. This science is very important, I shall devote all my 



EXERCISES. 71 

time to it. 7. You know this man, do you not trust 
him ? 8. Yes, I do trust him. 9. He asked me (for) 
money, but I shall not lend him any. 10. It is a mis- 
fortune ; don't think of it any more. 11. He does not 
like his business; he is not fit for it. 12. AYhen a 
man is dead, he is no longer thought of. 13. When 
I have wine, I drink some. 14. When I have none, I 
easily do without it. 15. If you go to Edinburgh, I go 
there also. 16. Go there, and do not forget to bring 
back your brother. 17. This picture is good; put a 
frame to it. 18. When^^ you are in the country, if you 
ha..ve need of money, I shall bring you some there. 

21. 

(Rules 44, 45, 46, 47.) 

1. Chacun ne songe qu'a soi. 2. Ceux qui sont amis 
de tout le monde ne le sont de personne. 3. Pourquoi 
les riches sont-ils si durs envers les pauvres ? C'est qu'ils 
n'ont pas peur de le devenir. 4. Le dieu lui repondit : 
Les tiens cesseront de regner quand un etranger entrera 
dans ton ile pour y faire regner les lois. 5. C'est un de 
vos parents qui a recu la pension qu'un de mes freres a' 
perdue I'annee derniere. 6. II depend tou jours de soi 
d'agir honorablement. 7."^ Vous dites que ce jeune homme 
aime beaucoup son frere ; detrompez-A^ous, il n'aime que 
soi. 8. Leur fille est morte a la campagne il y a deux 
ans, chez un de nos amis. 

9. ^' Qui ne songe qu'a soi quand la fortune est bonne 

Dans le malheur n'a point d'amis."— Florian. 
10. ^^ J'aime done sa victoire, et je le puis sans crime." 

— CORNEILLE. 



72 EXEHCISES. 

11. ^^11 les prend pour des rois. — Vous ne vous trompez pas; 

lis le sont; dit Louis, sans en avoir le titre/'— Voltaire. 

12. ^^On peut tou jours trouver plus malheureux que soi." 

— La Fontaine. 

22. 

to he angry at or loith (p.), etre to live together on good terms, 

fiche contre ; en vouloir a. etre bien ensemble. 

populous, ^o^uIqmx. temper, caract ere (m.). 

1. Why are you angry with him ? he loves you, he 
honors you, he respects you. 2. He beseeches and 
conjures me to go and^^^ see him. 3. Are you the 
mistress ? Yes, I am. 4. She is happy ; at least she 
looks so. 5. Friends, are you ready to go ? Yes, we 
are. 6. And you, madam, are you ready ? No, I am 
not. 7. This town is more populous than ^^ she thinks. 

8. This gentleman wishes me to go,'^ and you don't. 

9. Our friends are wealthy, but we are not ; you ought 
to know it. 10. When one is sick, he is best at home. 
11. This table is ours, and not yours. 12. I have found, 
to-day, a handkerchief of yours among mine. 13. A 
handkerchief of mine, you say ? it is not mine, it is your 
friend's. 14. A sister of his is dead. 15. Is it your 
temper or hers that hinders you from living together on 
good terms ? 16. She went, a few days ago, to see a 
child of hers. 17. Your boots are clean, but his and 
mine are not. 18. Where have they put those papers of 
hers ? 

23. 

(Rule 48.) 

1. Je ne puis vous rien promettre ; ce seront les cir- 
constances qui decideront. 2. Chez eux ces hommes 
sont des despotes, a la cour ce sont des valets. 3. Platon 



EXERCISES. 73 

disait de riiomme que c'etait un animal a^^ deux jambes 
sans plumes. 4. Bien loin d'etre des demi-dieux, ce ne 
sont pas meme des hommes. 5. C'est se tromper gros- 
sierement que de ^ penser que les richesses nous rendent 
heureux. 6. C'est un bien aimable gaiQon que votre 
frere. 7. C'est ce qui s'appelle agir en ami. 8. C'est 
un tresor qu'un ami. 9. Ce qui importe a tout homme, 
c'est de remplir ses devoirs sur la terre. 

10. ^^Ce que je sais le mieux^ c'est mon commencement." 

— Racine. 

11. '^ Le plaisir des bons coeurs, c'est la reconnaissance." 

— La Harpe. 

12. " La vie est un depot confie par le ciel ; 

Oser en disposer, c'est etre criminel." — Gresset. 

24. 

carriage, voiture (f.). « good fellow, un bon enfant, un 

to stop the loay, fermer le passage. bon gargon. 

to conquer {to take possession of), to meet vnth, rencontrer. 

conquerir. to contribute, contribuer. 

to conquer (to defeat), vaincre, to make a fool of , se moquei de. 

battre. 

1. It is the king's carriages which stop the way. 2. It 
is not youj it is not we, that can judge them. 3. This 
is the best book I ever read.'"'' 4. He is a very learned 
man. 5. They are ver;^ respectable people. 6. Can one 
behave so? It is unworthy of a man. 7. It is (a) 
shameful (thing) to betray* truth. 8. It is to them I 
have applied. 9. It is (a) glorious (thing) to conquer 
one's enemies. 10. To think much is to live. 11. They 
are the best fellows I ever met with. 12. Is it your 

* After c'est we put que de before an infinitive, and que before a 
noun. 



74 EXERCISES. 

friends that I am to see to-morrow ? 13. AVhat contrib- 
utes most to liealth is temperance. 14. It is useless 
to speak to her; she wilH^ not do it. 15. A name, 
famous too soou, is a very heavy burden. 16. What 
pleases me most is that you are coming to see me. 
17. What grieves him most is that you make a fool of 
him. 18. Is it to him that they have given so much 
praise ? 

25. 

(Rules 49, 50, 51.) 

1. Qu'est-ce qui vous empeche de venir avec nous ? 
2. Est-ce que par hasard vous avez peur de rencontrer 
votre frere ? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous a fait ? 1. A 
quoi pensez-vous done ? 5. De qui vous moquez-vous ? 
6. Est-ce que vous parlez serieusement ? 7. N'est-ce 
pas que vous viendrez avec nous ? 8. II me semble que 
vous etes bien poltron ? de quoi ou de qui avez-vous 
peur ? 9. Est-ce que c'est de moi, ou de votre soeur, ou 
de votre ombre ? 

10. ^-La source tombait du rocher, 

Goutte a goutte, a la mer affreuse. 

L'Ocean, fatal au nocher, 

Lui dit : ' Que me veux-tu, pleureuse ? 

11. ^^^ Je suis la tempete et Peffroi; 

Je finis ou le ciel commence. 
Est-ce que j'ai besoin de toi, 
Petite^ moi qui suis Pimmense ? ^ 

12. " La source dit au gouffre amer : 

' Je te donne^ sans bruit ni gloire, 

Ce qui te manque, o vaste mer, 

Une goutte d'eau qu'on pent boire ! ' " 

— Victor Hugo 



EXERCISES. 75 

26. 

to care about, se soucier de. to hurt, faire mal a. 

to knock, frapper. to frighten (p.), faire peur a. 

to mean, vouloir dire. to complain ofy se plaindre de. 

1. Who told you so ? 2. To whom are you speaking ? 
3. Who will do that for me ? 4. Who cares about it ? 
5. Who knocks? 6. Whom did I offend? 7. Who 
hurt that child ? 8. Who is living there ? 9. What =^ 
do you say ? 10. What is he going to do ? 11. What 
prevented you from going? 12. What is the matter with 
your mamma ? ^ 13. What does he mean ? 14. Should 
such a thing happen,! what would you do ? 15. Whom 

* Different ways of translating lohat : — 

(1) When placed before a noun, it is translated by quel, quelle, quels, 
quelles ; as, — 

I don't know lohat hook you mean, Je ne sais de quel livre vous voulez 

parler. 
What hook do you mean ? De quel livre voulez-vous parler? 

(2) When placed before a verb, used affirmatively or negatively (but 
not interrogatively) , it is translated by ce qui or ce que ; by ce qui if 
what is, in English, next the verb ; by ce que in every other case ; as, — 

What vexes me, is that he will not Ce qui me fache, c'est qu'il ne 

study, veut pas etudier. 

Do you hear lohat we say ? Entendez-vous ce que nous disons ? 

The same lohat is translated^by ce dont when followed by of, and by 
ce a quoi when followed by to ; as, — 

It is what you may he sure of, C'est ce dont vous pouvez etre sur. 

What you trust to is very uncer- Ce a quoi vous vous fiez est tres- 
tain, incertain. 

(3) When placed before a verb used interrogatively, it is translated 
according to Rule 51. 

^ Turn this sentence and all such into if : if such a thing happened, 
what would you do ? 

Had he heen more prudent, S'il avail ete plus prudent. 



76 EXERCISES. 

did you frighten ? 16. Does he not look nnwell ? 17. Do 
you not believe me? 18. What^ have I to complain of? 

27. 

(Rules 62, 53, 54, 55, 56.) 

I. Par ou ^tes-vous venu, par Carlisle ou par New- 
castle? 2. Vous n'avez^ si je ne me trompe, que deux 
paires de souliers, une bonne et une mauvaise ; laquelle 
mettrez-vous aujourd^hui ? 3. Si c'est la Tami dont vous 
vous vantiez tant, je ne vous en fais pas mon compliment. 
4. II y a deux freres Matthieu, Tun gros et court, Fautre 
grand et mince : duquel voulez-vous parler ? 5. Je parle 
de celui dont la femme vient de mourir. 6. Pour les- 
quelles de ces dames aviez-vous des lettres? 7. La 
ville d'ou vous venez n^est pas en Ecosse, mais en Angle- 
terre. 8. Je m'arretai un pen pour voir d'ou il venait. 
9. Quand on est roi, on depend de tons ceux dont on 
a besoin pour se faire obeir,. 10. La bonne dont nous 
venons de nous defaire nous a vole plusieurs choses. 

II. '^ Arriere ceux dont la bouche 

Souffle le froid et le chaud.^*— La Fontaine. 
12. ^^ Toi, dont le monde encore ignore le vrai nom, 
Esprit mysterieuxj mortel, ange, ou demon, 
Qui que tu sois, Byron, bon ou fatal genie, 
J'aime de tes concerts la sauvage harmonie." 

— Lamartine. 

28. 

engraving, gravure (f.). to endeavor, s'efforcer de. 

to like best, preferer. task, tache (f.). 

to travel, voyager. to set fire to, mettre le feu a. 

* With the verbs servir and se plaindre, que is often used instead of 
a quoi and de quoi; as. Que sert voire mauvaise humeur? 



EXERCISES. 77 

1. Which of these engravings do you like best ? 2. To 
which of these gentlemen did you speak? 3. With 
which of these ladies did you travel ? 4. Here are two 
hats ; which will you put on ? 5. Here is the street in 
which I was born. 6. That is the road by which we 
came. 7. What does your mother say ? ^^ 8. Which 
way do you pass to go to school ? 9. Our friend has 
taken some pencils ; which has he taken ? 10. The lady 
you speak of is dead. 11. Do you think he will come ? 
12. The wife of the gentleman of whom you have just 
spoken is very clever.^ 13. Endeavor to finish the task 
that you have begun. 14. He is engaged in writing 
the history of which you saw the beginning. 15. Of 
which of these two men are you afraid ? 16. In what 
have I offended you ? 17. This is the way through 
which I passed. 18. To which house did he set fire ? 

29. 

(Rules 57, 58, 59, 60, 61.) 

1. On m'a dit ce matin que Gustave et son frere ont ea 
chacun leur maison pillee par des voleurs. 2. L\in et 
I'autre avaient^ dit-on de Pargent cache: ce sont, sans 
doute, ces deux tresors que les voleurs auront"^ flaires. 
3. Que fera-t-on de tousr ces prisonniers qu'on a faits a 
I'ennemi ? 4. Les gardera-t-on jusqu'a la fin de la guerre, 
on les renverra-t-on dans leur pays en echange des notres ? 
5. Que ne^^^^^ signe-t-on la paix tout de suite, au lieu de 
se tuer ainsi les uns les autres ? 6. La guerre est la plus 

* Besides its usual meaning, the future often implies, in French, 
doubt and surmise. Had the preceding facts been certain, the usual 
past tense would have been used. In English, the past is used in both 
cases. 



78 EXEKCISES. 

grande calainite qui ^^'Liisse affliger rhumanite. 7. On 
lie devrait j avoir recours que quand on a epuise tons 
les autres moyens. 8. Chacun a sa maniere de voir. 

9. Quand on est jeunes, riches et jolies comme vouSj 
mesdames^ on n'est point reduites^ a Partilice. 

10. ^^ A votre age, ma fille^ on est bien curieuse." 

— Marmontel. 

11. ^' On doit considerer, pour son propre interet, 

Et les temps ou Ton vit, et les lieux oii Ton est.'' 

— CORNEILLE. 

12. '' Tout annonce d'un Dieu Teternelle existence ; 

On ne pent le comprendre, on ne pent Tignorer.'' 

— Voltaire. 

30. 

circumstance, circonstance (f.). in one's turn, a son tour. 

wager, pari (m.)- to delight in, se plaire a. 

share, part (f.). to master, dompter. 

to injure (p.), nuire a (p.) . to he in ivant of, avoir besoin de. 

1. You have been seen going outi I was told so. 

2. Hide yourself, or you will be ordered to remain. 

3. People don't like to be told their faults. ' 4. In every 
circumstance we should ^^ do our duty, whatever be the 
results. 5. It is said that he has lost his wager. 6. We 
do not always do what we ought to do. 7. They have 
each given me his share. 8. Both are mad. 9. My 
family has been injured by you.-^ 10. They like each 

* When on stands clearly as a definite pronoun for a woman or 
several individuals, the adjective is put in the feminine or the plural, 
according to the case. 

^ On is used only in the nominative case, and can never be replaced 
by a personal pronoun. The third sentence must, therefore, be turned 
into : We do not like that one should tell us our faults. 

^ Verbs requiring a can never be used in the passive ; all such verbs 
must absolutely be turned into the active voice. 



EXERCISES. 79 

other. 11. Tliey all spoke, each m her turn. 12. Indus- 
trious scholars are liked, and people delight in praising 
them. 13. People say so, and it is thought that the 
news is true. 14. They praise, blame, threaten, caress 
him, but, whatever they may do, they cannot master 
him. 15. Do you knoAV if the letters have been received 
which were expected ? 16. We learn more easily what 
we understand, than what we do not understand. 17. Do 
you know what is said of you ? 18. We are often in 
want of experience, however ^ old we may be. 

31. 

(Rules 62, 63, 64, 65.) 

1. Les sciences, les arts et les lettres sont pour Phomme 
des elements de bonheurc 2. La vivacite on la langueur 
des yeux fait un des principaux caracteres de la physi- 
onomie. 3. C'est dans cette vaste plaine que s^est livree 
la bataille ; ici campaient nos troupes ; la s'elevaient les 
tentes de Tennemi. 4. II ne me reste que deux francs ; 
encore n'en suis-je pas bien sur. 5. Aussi ne ferai-je plus 
de depenses inutiles. 6. Tout le monde, noble, bourgeois, 
artisan, laboureur, y devient soldat. 7. S'il n^est pas fort 
riche, du moins a-t-il de quoi vivre. 8. Dut-il oublier 
tout ce que j'ai fait pour lui, je ne regretterai jamais de 
lui avoir ete utile. 9. Une epee nue, qui ne tenait qu'a 
un fil, fut suspendue sur la tete de Damocles, durant le 
magnifique banquet que lui donna Denys le Tyran. 

10. "Le vers le mieux rempli, la plus noble pensee 

Ne pent plaire a Pesprit quand Poreille est blessee." 

— BOILEAU. 

11. " Ou ton sang on le mien lavera cette injure." 

— Voltaire. 



80 EXERCISES. 

12. " Le ciel eblouissant, ce dome lumineux, 

Laisse echapper vers moi, dn centre de ses feux, 
Un rayon precurseur de la gloire supreme.'' 

— COLARDEAU. 

32. 

look, regard (m.). it is all over, tout est fini. 

subject, sujet (m.). relations, parents (m.). 

fate, sort (m.). to require, exiger. 

Tio^c? / tenez ! to determine, vouloii. 

1. The gentleness, the kindness of the great Henry has 
been celebrated by^ a thousand praises. 2. A threat; a 
prayer, a look is enough. 3. Great, rich, small, and poor, 
none can escape death. 4. Subjects, friends, relations, all 
(tout) betrayed him. 5. We had scarcely set out when he 
was killed. 6. Perhaps you were wrong not to answer 
his letter. 7. Neither your fate nor mine is worth 
envying. 8. What is the matter with your brother? 
9. Perhaps he will come to-morrow. 10. Hold, here is 
the money which your father has given me. 11. I have 
visited the field where the battle of Waterloo was fought 
(se livrer). 12. When your father arrived, all was over. 

13. (Either) you or your brother will come. 14. Your 
interest, your honor, God, each requires this sacrifice. 
15. Time, wealth, . life, everything belongs to one's 
country. 16. You had scarcely gone out when she 
arrived. 17. Thus his fate determined it. 18. Perhaps 
I shall send you to Paris. 

* Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun which 
foUows them : de when the verb expresses an action in which the body 
is not concerned, and par when the verb ex^^resses an action of the 
body, or in which both the body and mind are concerned ; as, — 
She is liked by everybody, Elle est aimee de tout le monde. 

Tlie Prussians were often beaten Les Prussiens ont ete souvent 

by the French, battus par les Frangais. 



EXERCISES. 81 

33. 

(Rules 66, 67, 68.) 

1. Des que s'ouvre l?o bouche du mechant, les noirceurs 
et les desorclres se repandent dans la societe. 2. Vous 
ne savez pas, ce me semble, la maiiiere dont cela se fait, 
il faut vous J prendre autrement. 3. II y a longtemps 
qu'ils ne^^^^^^ se sont parle. 4. lis ne se voient plus 
depuis la mort de leur mere. 5. Ne vous flattez pas 
d'en etre quitte a si bon marche. 6. Vous etes toujours 
a vous flatter I'un Tautre. 7. II n'est, comme Pon dit, 
pire eau que celle qui dort. 8. En francais on ne met 
jamais le quantieme apres le mois, mais avant. 9. Dans 
les billets la date se met generalement a la fin. 10. Dans 
les lettres d'affaires on la met toujours en tete. 

11. " Eends-moi chretienne et libre, a tout je me soumets." 

— Voltaire. 

12. ^^ L'un et I'autre rival,"^ s'arretant au passage, 

Se mesure des yeux, s'observe, s'envisage.''— Boileau. 

34. 

to gain a victory, remporter une boxer, boxeur. 

victoire ; gagner une bataille. to try a cause, juger un proces. 

in presence of , en -presence de. 

1. The key will be found easily. 2. Several victories 
were gained by the French in the last war. 3. He 
has been punished by his father. 4. Health is main- 
tained by temperance. 5. These young people have 
wounded each other in our presence. 6, These boxers 
have punished each other severely. 7. They would have 
killed each other if the police had not shown themselves. 

* A noun following I'un et I'autre is always put in the singular. 

G 



82 



EXERCISES. 



8. Your friends arrived^ last night; they were well 
received by everybody. 9. French is spoken here. 
10. Butter sells very dear. 11. Everything is sold in 
this country. 12. Why do you not go there since you 
were told so? 13. The battle was fought at three 
o'clock. 14. We have been cheated. 15. How is 

* The following verbs are always conjugated with etre in their com- 
pound tenses : — 



accourir, to run to. 
aller, to go. 
arriver, to arrive. 
choir, to fall. 
deceder, to die. 
dechoir, to decay. 
echoir, to fall due. 
entrer, to come in. 
mourir, to die. 
naitre, to he horn. 
partir, to set out. 
rentrer, to come in again. 



retoumer, to return^ go hack, 
tomber, to fall. 
retomber, to relapse. 
sortir, to go out. 
venir, to come. 
devenir, to hecome. 
intervenir, to interpose. 
parvenir, to attain. 
provenir, to proceed. 
redevenir, to hecome again. 
re venir, to come hack, return. 
survenir, to hefall. 



raster, to stay. 

The following verbs are sometimes conjugated with avoir, and 
sometimes with etre, but in a different sense : — 

With avoir. With etre. 

convenir, to suit. to agree. 

demeurer, to remain no longer. to remain still. 

expirer, to die. to end. 

descendre, to take down. to come down. 

monter, to take up stairs. to go up staii^s. 

Lastly, some verbs take avoir or etre, according as they express an 
action or a state. They are : — 



apparadtre, to appear. 
changer, to change. 
coucher, to put in hed, to lie. 
croitre, to increase. 
deborder, to overflow. 
decamper, to decamp. 
disparaitre, to disappear. 
echapper, to escape. 



embellir, to emhellish. 
empirer, to make or to get loorse. 
grandir, to enlarge, to groiu. 
passer, to pass, to cross. 
rajeunir, to make or to groio young 

again. 
vieillir, to make or to grow old. 



EXERCISES. 83 

that made ? 16. His cause will be tried to-morrow. 
17. This wood will not burn. 18. That is sold very 
cheap. 

35. 

(Rule 69.) 

1. Dieu a dit, et les choses ont ete faites; il a com- 
mande, et elles ont ete creees. 2. La force des exercises 
auxquels on accoutumait les soldats romains^ les chemins 
admirables qu'ils avaient construits, les mettaient en etat 
de faire des marches longues et penibles. 3. Quand les 
Romains avaient plusieurs ennemis sur les bras, ils accor- 
daient une treve au plus f aible, qui se croyait trop heureux 
de I'obtenir. 4. Turenne, dans le siecle le plus fecond 
en grands hommes, n'eut point de superieur et ne compta 
qu'un rival. 5. L'empire qu' Alexandre avait conquis ne 
dura pas plus que sa vie, qui fut courte. 6. Les hommes, 
oubliant Tauteur de Punivers, adorerent le soleil qui les 
eclairait et la lune qui presidait a la nuit. 7. Napoleon' 
etait petit, mais ses yeux lancaient des eclairs. 8. Lors- 
qu'il parlait, tous I'ecoutaient avec respect. 9. Aussitot 
qu'il fut consul, il partit pour Dijon ; il rassembla, il 
organisa Tarmee ; il marcha contre les Autrichiens et les 
vainquit a Marengo. 10. Mon pere me fit jurer sur les 
autels que je serais jusqu'a la mort ennemi des Eomains; 
je le jurai, je Pai accompli. 

11. "Graces a mon amour, je me suis Men servie 

Du pouvoir qu' Amur at me donna sur sa vie.'' 

— Racine. 

12. " La Mollesse, a ces mots, sent sa langue glacee, 

Et, lasse de parler, succombant sous Peffort, 
Soupire, etend les bras, ferme Foeil et s'endort." 

— BOILEAU. 



84 EXERCISES. 

36. 

to hid, charger, dire. to pass, se passer. 

to give one's love, faire ses com- to hear, carry, porter. 

pliments. drunkenness, ivresse. 

to undergo, subir. politician, politique. 

change, changement (m.). to inculcate morality, former les 
^row6/e, peine (f.)- bonnes moeurs. 

to free one's self with difficulty, to take (p.) to {a place), emmenei, 

se tirer difficilement. mener. 

1. I have seen your mother to-day ; she told me to give 
you her love. 2. Europe has undergone great changes 
since the Norman conquest. 3. I received a letter this 
morning. 4. They wept the whole morning. 5. Has 
not your brother been playing with Henry to-day ? 
6. Have you begun your exercise ? 7. No, sir; we have 
not begun yet. 8. Nobody has begun. 9. She freed her- 
self with great difficulty from the danger. 10. We left 
Glasgow in the beginning of this week. 11. I made this 
year a large profit on the grain that I bought last year."^ 
12. The day has passed without rain. 13. Anacharsis 
used to say that the vine bears three kinds of fruit — 
drunkenness, sensuality, and repentance. 14. Philip, 
the^ father of Alexander the Great, was the greatest 
politician of his time. 15. He said, people amuse chil- 
dren with playthings, and men with oaths. 16. I was 
at dinner when you entered my house. 17. All that 
Socrates said, all that he did, tended to inculcate morality. 
18. I was going to see you when I met your brother, 
who took me to the country, 

* Last year, last month, last week, are translated by Tannee demiere, 
le mois dernier, la semaine derniere. But the adjective dernier is placed 
before the noun, when the last of a number of years, months, or weeks 
is meant ; as, la demiere annee de sa vie, le dernier mois de Pannee, la 
demiere semaine des vacances. 



EXERCISES. 85 

37. 

(Rule 69.) 

1. Ce fut sur la fin d'une nuit du mois de septembre 
que je sortis du souterrain avec les voleurs. 2. J'etais 
arine comme eux, et je montais un assez bon cheval qu'on 
avait pris an meme gentilliomme dont je portals les 
habits. 3. II y avait si longtemps que je vivais dans les 
tenebres que le jour naissant ne man qua pas de m'eblouir; 
mais pen a peu nies yeux s'accoutumerent a le souffrir. 
4. Xous attendions que la fortune nous offrit quelque 
bon coup a faire, quand nous apercumes un religieux 
monte sur une mauvaise mule. 5. Dans un cafe on 
parlait d'un vers obscur d'Horace. 6. Un jeune offlcier 
fit remarquer qu'un point d'interrogation mis a la fin 
rendrait le vers tres-clair. 7. Pope, petit, contrefait et 
vexe, lui dit : Mais savez-vous, Monsieur, ce que c'est 
qu'un point d'interrogation ? 8. Oui, Monsieur, c'est une 
petite chose crochue qui fait une question. 

9. " Mes enfants, dans ce village, 
Suivi de rois, il passa ; 
Voila bien longtemps de qa ! 
Je venais d'entrer en menage. 

10. " A pied, montant le coteau 

Ou pour v6ir je m'etais mise, 
11 avait petit chapeau 
Avec redingote grise. 

11. ^^ Pres de lui je me troublai ; 

II me dit : ' Bon jour, ma chere, 

Bonjour, ma chere. ^ 
II vous a parle, grand^mere, 

II vous a parle ! ^^ — Beranger. 



86 EXERCISES. 

38. 

it loas custotnary with Frederick, to give notice to, avertir (p.). 

Frederic avait coutume (de) . to cautioji, prevenir. 

to appear, paraitre. at the same time, en meme temps. 

viz., a savoir. accordingly, en consequence. 

to ask (p.) questions, faire des the next day, le lendemain. 

questions a. plainly, clairement. 

to happen, arriver. to cry {to exclaim), s*ecrier. 

to enlist, s'engager. to he bereft of one's senses, avoir 
the German language, I'allemand. perdu la tete. 

It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever 
a new soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three 
questions, viz., " How old are you ? How long have 
you been in my service ? Are you satisfied with your 
pay and treatment ? ^' It happened that a young soldier, 
born in France, who had served in his (own) country, 
desired to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure 
caused ^^ him to be accepted immediately; but he was 
totally ignorant of the German language, and his captain 
giving him notice that the king would question him in 
that tongue the first time he saw him, cautioned him 
at the same time to learn by heart the three answers 
that he was to make to the king. Accordingly, he learnt 
them by the next day ; and as soon as he appeared in 
the ranks, Frederick came up to interrogate him; but 
he happened to begin with the second question, and 
asked him, " How long have you been in my service ? '' 
" Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, 
struck with his youth, which plainly indicated that 
he had not borne a musket so long as that, said to 
him much astonished, " How old are you ? '^ " One 
year, an't please your majesty " (n'en deplaise ct Voire 
Majeste). Frederick, more astonished still, cried, ^^You 
or I must certainly be bereft of our senses ! '' The 



EXERCISES. 87 

soldier, who took this for the third question, replied 
firmly (avec aplomb), " Both, an't please your majesty.'' 

39. 

(Rules 70, 71, 72, 73.) 

1. Ecoutez, parlez, lisez, ecrivez francais le plus que 
vous pourrez. 2. Demandez-lui s'il serait venu avec nous 
s'il n'avait eu rien a faire. 3. lis n'auraient pas du 
aller au bal sans votre permission ; c'est fort mal a eux. 
4. Comment! j'aurais^ travaille toute ma vie pour si 
peu ! 5. Dusse-je y perir, j'irai. 6. Quand j'aurai fini 
les ecrits d'Homere et de Virgile, et que je me serai bien 
penetre de toutes leurs beautes, je me mettrai aux autres 
poenies epiques. 7. Si vous allez a la campagne, j'irai 
avec vous : je ne veux plus vous quitter. 8. Si vous 
vendiez ce piano, vous en auriez bien 300 francs. 9. S'il 
venait a passer chez moi et que je n'y fusse pas, mes gens 
lui diraient ou nous sommes alles. 10. Je serais tres 
honore si vous m'accordiez votre protection, et si vous 
pouviez m'obtenir un emploi pres de vous. 11. Je vou- 
drais bien que M. votre frere put nous accompagner. 
12. Aussitot qu'il arrivera, veuillez me prevenir. 13. Dans 
sa tragedie de Cinna, Corneille fait dire a Auguste, 
empereur des Eomains, maitrisant I'orage de sa colere: — 

•^ Je suis maitre d^ moi comme de I'univers : 

Je le suis — je le veux ! " 

40. 

task, tache (f.), travail (m.)- to take (p.), conduire. 

to take a walk, faire une prome- to do a service, rendre un service, 
nade. 

* The conditional, besides its usual import, often means surprise ; as, — 
Could you ever he guilty of that, Tu aurais fait cela, toi ! — Merlet. 



88 EXERCISES. 

1. Nobody knows if he will die to-day or to-morrow. 
2. The soldiers will do their duty well, if they are well 
cominanded. 3. I should be pleased if I saw you doing 
your duty. 4. When he has finished his task, he will 
take a walk. 5. As soon as you have done writing, 
we shall dine. 6. When you are ready, we shall begin. 
7. Will you come with me ? As you like. 8. I shall 
leave in a moment. 9. We should always do our duty. 
10. Will you do your sister this service ? 11. I should 
do it if I could. 12. I shall take her there if she will 
go. 13. I should take her there if she would go. 
14. You should write more than you do. 15. They are 
not willing to come. 16. Should I go there ? 17. He 
should have paid the debt.=^ 18. I shall return in one 
moment. 

41. 

(Rules 74, 75, 76.) 

1. II veut qu'apres avoir sejourne quelques mois en 
Suisse, nous visitions ensemble tout le nord de Tltalie. 
2. II semble, en vous lisant, que vous me parliez, que 
vous me donniez de sages conseils. 3. C'est une erreur 
bien deplorable que les hommes aient attache des noms 
pompeux aux plus foUes entreprises. 4. II faudra qu'ils 
obeissent s'ils ne veulent pas qu'on les punisse. 5. Je 
ne doute pas qu'avant deux annees cette ville n'ait beau- 
coup etendu son commerce. 6. Croyez-vous qu'ils aient 
rcQu ma lettre ? 7. Quelque obstine qu'on soit, il f aut 
bien que, bon gre mal gre, on se rende a Fevidence. 

* When should, ought, could, and might are followed by a past 
indefinite, they are translated by the conditional past of devoir, vouloir, 
or pouvoir, and the English participle is put in the infinitive : 11 aurait 
du payer la dette. 



EXERCISES. 89 

8. Dieu exige que nous employions au soulagement de 
nos semblables les richesses qu'il nous a departies. 9. II 
se plaint qu'on Pait calomnie. 10. Ce magistrat se plaint 
que vous avez meconnu son caractere."^ 

11. ^^ Craignez, seigneur, craignez que le ciel rigoureux 

Ke vous haisse assez pour exaucer vos voeux ! ^' 

— Racine. 

12. " Mais il me semble, Agnes, si ma memoire est bonne, 

Que j'avais defendu que vous vissiez personne.'' 

— MOLIERE. 

42. 

devotion, devouement (m.). to deny, nier. 

1. It is better that you should come with me. 2. It 
seems that you have forgotten to write to her. 3. It 
seems to me that this tower is round. 4. Will you go to 
the country this morning ? No, I am afraid it will rain. 
5. I fear she will not come. 6. Is it possible that that 
has happened ? 7. I am astonished that you have not 
seen him. 8. I have been walking in the Champs- 
Elysees this afternoon, and whom do you think I met as 
I was coming back ? 9. Do you doubt that I am your 
friend, after so many proofs of devotion ? 10. We hope 
he will soon come back from America. 11. I am glad 
that you are so well. < 12. I deny that that is true. 

13. They are afraid that the general has not experience 
enough. 14. You do not think he has won the prize.t 

* Observe that, in the 9th sentence, the subjunctive Is required after 
se plaindre because there is some doubt implied upon the subject of the 
complaint; while in the 10th, as there is no doubt whatever in the 
magistrate's mind, the indicative is used. 

t This sentence may be translated in two different ways ; (1) If I 
simply recapitulate or repeat, for argument's sake, my interlocutor's 



90 EXERCISES. 

15. Take care lest he should see you here. 16. Do you 
forget that I am older than you ? 17. Do you wish me 
to come to your house to-night ? ^ 18. The law of God 
orders us to love our enemies. 



43. 

(Rules 77, 78, 79, 80.) 

1. II n'y a pas un homme qui n'ait^^^^^ ses defauts; le 
meilleur est celui qui en a le moins. 2. Eome, sous 
quelque gouvernement qu^elle ait ete, a ete heureuse dans 
ses entreprises. 3. L'empereur Antonin est un des plus 
grands princes qui aient regne. 4. II n'est metal si dur 
que le feu n'amoUisse. 6. On ne pent juger votre tra- 
vail avant que vous Payez accompli. 6. Peut-on livrer 
des batailles contre une nation aguerrie qui se defend 
courageusement, sans qu'il y ait de part et d'autre du 
sang repandu ? 7. Thales est le premier des Grecs qui 
ait enseigne que les ames sont immortelles. 8. Je ne 
sache pas t un pays plus agreable que le votre. 9. Le 
meilleur usage que Ton puisse faire de son esprit, dit 
Fenelon, c'est de s'en defier. 

opinion, without implying the least doubt about it, I shall. say, Vous ne 
croyez pas qu'il a remporte le prix. (2) But if, on the contrary, I am 
questioning my interlocutor about his opinion, then I must use the 
subjunctive. 

* After verbs expressing wish or will, the following verb must always 
be put in the subjunctive, unless the subjects of both verbs are in the 
same person ; in which case the second is put in the infinitive ; as, — 

/ ivish I toere rich, Je voudrais etre riche. 

See observation 1 of Rule 82. 

^ We say in the subjunctive, je ne sache pas, que je sache, for je ne 
connais pas, and this idiom gives the sentence an idea of doubt. 



EXERCISES. 91 

10. " II faut cles cliatiments doiit I'univers fremisse." 

— Racine. 

11. " Un homme en vaut uii autre, a moins que, par malheur, 

L'uii d'eux ii'ait corrompu son esprit et son coenr.'' 

— Destouches. 

12. '' Quel indigne plaisir pent avoir Pavarice ? 

Et que sert d'amasser a moins qu'on ne jouisse?'' 

— BOURSAULT. 

44. 

drunkenness, ivresse (f.). to soften, adoucir. 

shmnefid, honteux. motive, motif (m.)- 

to he proved, etre eprouve, etre a to marry (p.), epouser. 

Tepreuve. 

1. You will not be esteemed unless you are modest. 
2. Drunkenness is the most shameful state into which ^^ 
a man can fall. 3. One may say that the dog is the 
only animal whose fidelity is proved. 4. There is no 
grief that time does not ^^ ^^^ soften. 5. We must leave 
before it is night. 6. The merit of having done a good 
action, is the only good that cannot be taken from us. 
7. Whoever you meet, don't stop. 8. Whatever ^^ your 
motives may be, your conduct will be condemned. 
9. Come here, that I may speak to you. 10. Although 
adversity is an evil, it is often a remedy against the vices 
of prosperity. 11. Go away, lest he should come. 
12. He is the only man thaj: I can trust. 13. There 
are few men who know where to look for true glory. 

14. She will never marry a man who does not fear God. 

15. She has married a man who fears God. 16. Look 
for a retreat in which you may be quiet. 17. The wise 
(man) behaves in such a way that men cannot reproach 
him with anything. 18. Behave so that your parents 
may glory in having such a son. 



92 EXERCISES. 

45. 

(Rules 81, 82.) 

1. Je n'aurais pas cru qu'il eut ete possible d'apporter 
un aussi prompt remede au mal. 2. Je n'avais pas pense 
qu'il etit apporte si promptement tout ce que nous Tavions 
charge d'aclieter. 3. Les magistrats craignaient que de 
plus grands /desordres n'arrivassent. 4. Qui de nous 
croyait quails eussent rempli aussi exactement leurs en- 
gagements ? 5. Apres avoir travaille toute ma vie au 
profit des autres, il serait temps que je songeasse a moi 
et que je pourvusse aux besoins qui peuvent survenir un 
jour. 6. Nous nous soucierions pen qu'ils se facbassent 
contre nous. 7. II faudrait qu'il achevat aujourd'bui son 
travail, afin que demain je le revisse et que tu pusses 
aussitot le transcrire. 8. A peine suis-je arrive que deja 
il voudrait que je repartisse. 9. II suffirait que vous 
parussiez un moment, pour qu'aussitot chacun disparut. 
10. Je ne crois pas que vous eussiez eu plus de patience 
que moi. 11. Sparte etait sobre avant que Socrate eut 
loue la sobriete. 

12. '' J'ai meme def endu par une expresse loi 

Qu'on osat prononcer votre nom devant moi." 

— Racine. 

46. 

fellow-citizen, concitoyen. to he married, se marier. 

to cut off, couper. to scatter, jeter, disperser. 

Salamis, Salamine. to paij honors, rendre les honneurs. 

Lyciirgus, Lycurgue. to be enough, suffire. 

to lie, coucher. to court, faire la cour a. 

regulation, reglement. for the sake of, pour Tamour de. 

1. I should like, my son, to have you learn your 
lessons better, in order to please your teachers. 2. What 



EXERCISES. 93 

man would like to be reproached for a small fault? 
3. It was necessary that I should go there. 4. Trajan 
wished that his fellow-citizens should love him as a 
father. 5. Caligula wished that the Eoman people had 
only one head, in order to be able to cut it off with one 
blow. 6. Solon, when dying, ordered that his bones 
should be ^ taken to Salamis, that they should be burned, 
and that their ashes should be scattered over the country. 
7. The laws of Lycurgus ordered that children should 
lie upon the bare ground. 8. They required them to be 
brought up in common, and that the sons of magistrates 
should be subjected to that regulation. 9. They* pre- 
scribed also that women should be married without a 
dowry. 10. Do you think I might speak tocher, if I 
went now ? 11. I did not think they would write to 
your sister. 12. I am afraid she will think that I 
have forgotten her. 13. I did not know that you had 
studied mathematics. 14. Caligula ordered that the 
Eomans should pay him divine honors. 15. Was it not 
enough that you should send somebody there ? 16. It is 
a mortifying thing for a young lady that a man should 
court her for the sake of her fortune. 17. He was the 
only man whom I could trust. 18. I would never havC' 
believed that you could have spoken so. 

47. 

(Rules 83, 84, 85.) 

1. Eire haut est un ridicule et une sottise. 2. Celui 
qui a tache de vivre de maniere a n'avoir pas besoin de 
songer a la mort, la voit venir sans effroi. 3. Je suis 
vraiment desole de ne pas pouvoir faire ce que vous me 
demandez. 4. Je voudrais ne pas savoir ecrire, disait 



94 EXERCISES. 

Neron^ force de signer un arret de mort. 5. La religion 
nous apprend a respecter nos maitres, a souffrir nos 
egauxj a etre affables envers nos inferieurs, a aimer tons 
les hommes comme nous-memes. 6. II fant rougir de 
comniettre des f antes et non de les avouer. 7. Vous 
avez tort de penser que vous pouvez faire trembler 
I'Europe aux premiers preparatifs de guerre. 8. J'ai 
fait parler hier a M. votre pere, mais il a fait la sourde 
oreille. 9. Mon aniitie ne vous est pas suspecte, et j'ai 
acquis assez d' experience pour faire ecouter mes avis. 

10. "Qui pardonne aisement invite a Foffenser.'' 

— CORNEILLE. 

11. " Vouloir tromper le ciel^ c'est folic a la terre.'' 

— La Fontaine. 

12. " Dieu t'a fait pour Taimer, et non pour le coniprendre." 

— Voltaire. 

48. 

to reflect, reflechir. to procure, faire avoir (th.). 

to walk in, entrer. to procure for, faire avoir a (p.). 

to inquire particularly into (th.) , to send for, envoyer chercher, 

examiner (th.) de pres. faire venir. 

close by, tout pres. 

1. Experience will prove to you the necessity of re- 
flecting before you speak, and yet more before you write. 

2. He wishes to see you before you go; please walk in. 

3. I thought I should never see you again. 4. Do you 
not remember meeting him at the Louvre ? 5. A teacher 
must punish the child who dares to disobey him. 6. I 
want to inquire particularly into that affair, before tell- 
ing you what I think of it.^ 7. It is very difficult 

* Penser requires de after it when it means to have an opinion of, or, 
in other words, when it has a direct object; it takes a when it means 
to apply one's mind to. 



EXEKCISES. 95 

to please everybody. 8. An old proverb says, ^^It is 
better to give than to receive.'^ 9. Do not trust him ; 
he wants to deceive you. 10. Here are some young 
ladies who delight in singing, playing, chatting, and 
laughing. 11. Show me that. 12. I shall procure that 
situation for you. 13. If you like, I shall send for the 
doctor. 14. Do you want to get your throat cut? 15. I 
shall have three new gowns made next week. 16. He 
has had a new house built in London. 17. Where do 
you get your shoes made ? 18. I get them made at the 
shoemaker's who lives close by. C 

49. 

(Rules 86, 87.) 

1. EUe gravissait dans les tenebres, saisissant tour a 
tour les branches et les racines qu'elle rencontrait. 
2. Toutes les planetes circulant autour du soleil parais- 
sent avoir ete mises en mouvement par une impulsion 
commune. 3. Les trois voyageurs palissants voyaient 
a la clarte de la foudre passer le lion, le tigre, le lynx, 
le 'leopard, tremblants comme eux. 4. Une humeur 
plaisante n'est pas celle des vieillards souffrants. 5. Nous 
avons eprouve une inexprimable joie en apercevant le 
port que nous n'esperions plus revoir. 6. lis ont eu la 
temerite de s'engager sur cette mer mugissante. 7. Point 
d'importuns laquais epiant nos discours, comptant nos 
morceaux d'un oeil avide et murmurant d'un trop long 
diner. 8. II trouva les Macedoniens non seulement 
aguerris, mais encore triomphants. 9. C'est une personne 
d'un naturel doux, ne grondant, ne contredisant, ne 
desobligeant jamais. 10. H y a des peuples qui vivent 
errants dans les deserts. 



96 EXERCISES. 

11. " Je peindrai les plaisirs en f oule renaissants, 

Les oppresseurs du peuple a leur tour gemissants.'^ 

— BOILEAU. 

12. " J^entends des cris de guerre an milien des nanf rages, 

Et les sons de Pairain se melant anx orages.'^ 

— La Harpe. 

50. 

to cry out, crier. to banter^ raiUer. 

io purpose, se proposer de. lohile (adv. foHowed by pres. 

pipe, pipe (f.) . part.), tout en. 

disposition, caractere (m.). 

1. I saw her arriving. 2. I hear somebody crying 
out. 3. Early rising is very good for the health, 4. I 
purpose going to London next week. 5. I remember it 
without your telling me. 6. Those Avretches are trem- 
bling with fear. 7. Lowing oxen and bleating sheep came 
in crowds. 8. You will find them smoking ^ their pipes. 
9. I hear him rising every morning- at a quarter past 
five. 10. We have obtained peace by making great 
sacrifices. 11. This woman is of a good disposition, 
obliging every one whenever she can. 12. He tells him 
the truth, while bantering him. 13. I doubt his coming. 
14. I am not afraid of his forgetting me. 15. I am 
thinking of that poet's having finished so long a poem 
in so short a time. 16. I see him playing in the street. 
17. I saw him playing in the street. 18. You laugh at 
my not being able to speak Erench ; don't you ? 

51. 

(Rules 88, 89.) 

1. lis ont ete exemptes des charges publiques, attendu 
leurs infirmites. 2. Passe dix heures, je ne vous attends 

* Translate as if it were in the act of smoking , en train de fumer. 



EXERCISES. 97 

plus. 3. Nous sommes trois, y compris votre soeur. 
4. Vous avais-je accorde toute ma confiance pour la 
voir si inclignenient traliie ? 5. La justice est due aux 
pauvres aussi bien qu'aux riches. 6. Le champ de 
bataille etait couvert de morts et de mourants etendus 
les uns sur les autres. 7. Les assieges n'out rendu la 
ville qu'apres avoir defendu longtemps contre une armee 
enti^re leurs families^ leurs Mens et leur liberte. 8. Les 
meilleures harangues sont celles que le coeur a dictees. 

9. II a eu tous les desagrements que nous avions pense. 

10. Parmi cette foule de princes que Pabus du pouvoir 
a precipites du trone, plusieurs ont peri pour expier des 
injures personnelles dont ils s'etaient rendus coupables 
ou qu'ils avaient autorisees. 

11. ^^ II balance dans Fair sa redoutable epee 

Fumante encor * du sang dont il I'avait trempee/' 

— C. Delavigne. 

12. " soeurs, o pales soeurs! sur qui done priez-vous ? 

Qui de vous va mourir ? Qui de vous abandonne 

Un vain reste de jours oublies et perdus ? 

Car vous, filles de Dieu, vous ne les comptez plus.'' 

— A. DE MUSSET. 

52. 

to keep up, entretenir. felloic-citizens, concitoyens. 
to separate {from each other), se injury, offense (f.). 

separer. ^ ^o a^^pZ?/ (th.), appliquer. 

fight, combat (m.) . hlue-sto eking, i^mmQ savante, bas- 

Cassar, Cesar. bleu. 

like, ressemblant. loeak-minded people, esprits fai- 

Aristides, Aristide. bles. 

1. How many ^^^ praises have been given to Washing- 
ton ! 2. Spain is almost always torn by intestine wars, 

* The e of encore may be elided in poetry. 

H 



98 EXERCISES. 

kept up by ambition. 3. The armies having separated, 
the fight ceased. 4. We have read the books which you 
have lent us^ and we should have read them again, if 
you had not asked for them back so soon. 6. I do not 
doubt ^^ but j^ou will use all your efforts to^^ fulfil my 
hopes of you. 6. How many^^^ provinces has Caesar 
ravaged ! 7. We have examined the portraits which the 
painter has sent us ; we have not found that they re- 
semble your mother. 8. Aristides pardoned his fellow- 
citizens the injury w^hich he had received from them. 
9. You do not always apply the rules which I have given 
you. 10. Where are the rewards you have promised 
me ? 11. The letters which M""^ de Sevigne has written 
are admired by everybody. 12. The comedies which 
Moliere has composed, the portraits which he has given 
us of the miser and of the blue-stocking, have made him 
many enemies among weak-minded people. 

53. 

(Rules 88, 89.) 

1. Les grands orateurs que j'ai entendus parler m'ont 
rallie, un moment du moins, aux opinions que je leur ai 
entendu soutenir tour a tour. 2. Pour etre sur de la 
verite de ces choses, il faut les avoir vues s'accomplir. 

3. Vous avez aime votre prochain si vous lui avez rendu 
tons les services que vous avez pu et que vous avez du. 

4. Cette femme est plus instruite que je ne I'aurais cru. 
6. II est vrai que lui et moi nous nous sommes parle des 
yeux. 6. La haine s'est emparee de leurs ames : quelles 
dures choses ils se sont dites ! 7. Les honneurs que j'ai 
rcQus, c'est mon talent qui me les a valus. 8. Combien 
d'erreurs n'a-t-on pas signalees dans les travaux qu'on 



EXERCISES. 99 

les avait charges de faire ! 9. Le pen de troupes qu'il a 
rassemblees ont tenii ferme dans leur poste. 10. Les 
Eusses ont fait, en quatre-vingts ans que les vues de 
Pierre ont ete suivies, plus de progres que nous n'en 
avons fait en quatre siecles. 

11. '^ Que de soins m'eut coutes cette tete cliarmante ! '' 

— Racine, 

12. " II est si beau, Penf ant, avec son doux sourire, 

Sa douce bonne foi, sa voix qui veut tout dire, 

Ses pleurs vite apaises ; 
Laissant errer sa vue etonnee et ravie, 
Offrant de toutes parts sa jeune ame a la vie 

Et sa bouclie aux baisers! '' — Victor Hugo. 

54. 

good works {good actions) ^honnQS Bluebeard, Barbebleue. 

oeuvres. to make (p.) as/iamec?, faire honte 
to help, servir, aider. a. 

to make (before an adj.), rendre. to pass aioay, s'ecouler. 

1. The lessons that I have learned, the exercises that 
I have written, the rewards that I have received, and the 
punishments they^' have given me, have helped to make 
me useful to society. 2. How many good works that 
great man has done ! 3. How many unfortunate (people) 
he has relieved ! 4. '^he bells which we have heard 
ringing are those which we saw cast. 5. The swal- 
lows which I have seen coming back have announced 
to me the return of spring. 6. Gentlemen, where are 
the books that I saw you reading, the songs that I 
heard you singing, the music books that I gave you 
yesterday? 7. We made them laugh when we told 
them the story of Bluebeard. 8, These pupils have 



100 EXERCISES. 

more books than I have given them. 9. Vauban has for- 
tified more towns than others have destroyed. 10. The 
tragedies of Crebillon are not so good as we had 
thought. 11. The English have gained on land more 
victories than I had thought. 12. Do you remember 
the intense heat that there was in Belgium three years 
ago ? 13. The little affection which you have shown 
me proves that you are no longer a friend of mine. 
14. The little delicacy which you have evinced in this 
affair should make you ashamed. 15. The few days 
which I have spent in your house have soon passed away. 

55. 

(Rules 90, 91, 92.) 

1 II marche, dort, mange et boit tout comme les 
autreSj mais cela n'empeche pas qu'il ne soit fort malade, 
2. Nous sommes plus riches que nous ne pensons. 3. II 
ne tient pas a moi que cela ne se fasse. 4. Pen s^en est 
fallu qu'il ne fut tue. 6. Peut-on nier que la sante ne 
soit preferable aux richesses ? 6. Je tremble que votre 
frere n' arrive en ce moment. 7. On ne pent pas douter 
que les poles ne soient converts d^une coupole de glace. 
8. Vous avez bien peur que je ne change d'avis. 

9. " Mais il ne tient qu'a vous que son chagrin ne passe." 

— MOLIERE. 

10. ^^Et que faire en un gite a moins que Ton ne songe?'^ 

— La Fontaine. 

11. -^ Deux medecins n'ont pu lui donner le trepas : 

II ne mourra jamais ! '' — Destouches. 

12. "'^i Taveugle hasard ni Paveugle matiere 

N'ont pu former mon ame, essence de lumiere.'' 

— Lamartine. 



EXERCISES. 101 



56. 



to speak one's mind, dire sa fagon the fancies, les idees. 

de penser. to take into one's head, se mettre 

to come and fetch, venir prendre. dans la tete. 

1. I understand Frencli pretty well, but I have not 
yet studied it long enough to speak it fluently. 2. Did 
you not speak ill of me last night? 3. jSTo, I always 
speak well of you. 4. You should write your exercises 
better. 5. We amused ourselves very well last night. 
6. I do not dare to speak to him. 7. Take care lest he 
see yon. 8. I do not deny that this is true. 9. You 
will be scolded if you don't take care. 10. Why {que) 
do you not speak your mind to him ? 11. I will not 
go out if you do not come and fetch me. 12. I shall 
not go out unless you come and fetch me. 13. We 
have not seen him for a fortnight. 14. We despise 
those who speak differently from what they think. 
15. Who does not know the fancies that she has taken 
into her head? 16. Take care lest that child should 
fall. 17. It is I who prevent his coming. 

57. 

(Rules 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100.) 

1. Y a-t-il rien de plus rare qu'un demi-savant modeste? 
2. Venez done voir la belle robe que ma mere s'est ache- 
tee; je n'ai rien vu de si joli. 3. Je ne connais personne 
de si aimable qu'Auguste; tout le monde en raffole. 
4. En tout temps la vertu s'est fait estimer. 5. II y a 
trois mois que je vous ai ecrit pour vous avertir du 
danger que vous couriez. 6. Yenez passer deux ou trois 
semaines chez nous, vous ne vous en trouverez pas plus 
mal. 7. Je finirai bien cela en quinze jours. 8. Alors, 



102 EXERCISES. 

si vous commencez demain en huit, yous serez tout-a-fait 
libre dans trois semaines. 9. II y a ici qnelqn'un de 
trop ; combien devons-nous etre ? 10. Nous devrions 
etre dix, mais Henri est parti pour six semaines. 

11. "Pendant ces jours^ durant ces tristes scenes, 

Que faisiez-vous dans vos cloitres deserts.'' — Gresset. 

12. " Voici trois medecins qui ne nous tronipent pas : 

Gaite, doux exercice et modeste repas/' 



-DUMOUSTIER. 



58. 



to let see, faire voir. to be so kind as to, avoir la bonte, 

to fall ill, tomber malade. I'obligeance, de. 

to allow, laisser. 

1. I have bought something very pretty ; I shall let 
you see it to-night. 2. If you fall ill while trying to 
complete that work in a month, you will not be the 
richer for it."^ 3. She is going to write to you to beg a 
favor of you. 4. He will do anything to oblige you. 
5. It is necessary to know the human heart to judge well 
of others. 6. I forbid you to do that. 7. Would you 
be so kind as to help me ? 8. I think I had better allow 
you to do it yourself. ' 9. It has been raining for three 
days. 10. I study for ten hours every day. 11. He has 

* The more or the less for it is translated in French by davantage, 
plus, or moins, with en before the verb. 

^ When one or two pronouns are to be placed before the verb, if 
there are two verbs, place them before the last, unless the first is faire 
or laisser ; as, — 

S>he icants to give it to you, EUe veut vous le donner. 

She will let you see them, EUe vous les fera voir. 

However, in the best authors of the seventeenth century, the pro- 
noun or pronouns are generally placed before the first verb ; as, — 

'* Soleil, je te viens voir pour la demiere fois." —Racine. 



EXERCISES. 103 

not been able to get provisions for the winter. 12. Did 
you live in South America ? 13. Do you not find a 
great charm in her society ? 14. It will take you two 
or three sessions to learn French. 15. We shall arrive 
in Paris in two days. 16. How long^ have you been 
living in Scotland ? 17. I do not live in Scotland, but 
in England, at Bristol. 

59. 

(Rules 101, 102, 103.) 

1. II en sera ainsi, que voiis le vouliez ou non. 2. Je 
n'aurai point de repos que je n'aie la certitude de reussir. 
3. Que d'amis vous avez ! 4. Vous ne partirez point que 
je ne le sache. 5. Attendez, que nous venions. 6. Je ne 
saurais voir d'honnetes peres chagrines par leurs enfants 
que cela ne m'emeuve. 7. Je ne puis travailler qu'aussi- 
tot je ne sois malade. 8. Je ne leur donnai point de 
repos qu'ils ne m'eussent fait venir un fripier. 9. Per- 
sonne, dit M'""^ de Sevigne, n'apprit la mort de M. de 
Turenne qu'il ne crut Parmee taillee en pieces. 10. Allez 
vite porter cette lettre et ce journal a la poste. 

* How long is translated in three different ways : — 

(1) By combien de temps with the compound tense (past indefinite) 
to express a past action ; as, — 

How long did you live in Finance? Combien de temps avez-vous de- 

meure en France ? 

(2) By depuis quand with the present, if the action is still going on ; 
as, — 

How long have you been here 9 Depuis quand etes-vous ici? 

(3) By combien de temps with the future to express a future tense ; 
as, — 

Hoio long will you stay there ? Combien de temps y resterez-vous? 



104 EXERCISES. 

11. '' Je ne vous quitte pointy 
Seigneur, que mon amour n'ait obtenu ce point." 

— CORNEILLE. 

12. '' Que la terre est petite a qui la voit des cieux ! '' 

— Delille. 

60. 

to go a journey, faire un voyage. to teach, enseigner. 

to favor, favoriser. to he engaged, etre occupe. 

morality, morale (f.). no matter, il n'importe. 

1. He never goes a journey but lie comes back with a 
cold. 2. If you read history, and if you look for a 
prince equally favored and persecuted by fortune, you 
will find him in the person of Henry lY., Emperor of 
Germany. 3. He will not write to you until you come. 

4. How much injustice that magistrate h?vS committed ! 

5. How many prejudices the Eevolution has destroyed 
in France ! 6. I hope you will come and tell me all that 
you know about it. 7. Eun and fetch my book. 8. How 
fine and noble is the morality taught by Christ ! 9. It is 
six years since I have seen my country. 10. I arrived 
the day you left. 11. She never comes to our house 
without bringing a plaything to my children. 12. If 
you don^t see me oftener, it is because I am very much 
engaged. 13. Whether you write or not, it is no matter. 
14. How very unhappy that woman looks ! ^ 15. Go 
and wash your hands. 16. Go and beg his pardon. 

* The adjective used with avoir Pair agrees with I'air, that is, is 
masculine, though speaking of a woman, when Pair refers to outward 
appearance; but if Pair refers to a physical defect or quality, it is 
better to use etre or some other equivalent expression, such as sembler, 
paraitre ; as, — 

** Cette demoiselle a Pair d'etre bossue, ces fruits me paraissent bons." 

— Merlet. 



PART SECOND. 



I. EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. 
61. 

(Section 1 .*) 

1. A Pentendre, c'est tonjours moi qui ai tort. 2. Paites- 
vous-y. 3. Je me soucie fort pen de vos affaires ; adressez- 
vous a d'autres. 4. Si voiis voulez savoir de qiioi il s'agit, 
ne cominencez pas par me dire des injures. 5. Mettons- 
nons an travail avec ardenr ; ne nons deconrageons pas ; 
Paris n'a pas ete fait en nn jonr. 6. Je Ini ai dit d'abord 
que les bons comptes font les bons amis; sur ce, il s'est 
mis a m'injnrier. 7. J'ai tenn bon, et je Ini ai fait 
rendre compte, jonr par jonr, de tont ce qn'il a depense 
depnis nn mois. 8. jST'est-ce pas qn'il vons a tont avone 
de son propre monvem6nt ? 9. Cette lettre n'est pas 
d'elle, elle n'est pas en etat d'en faire nne pareille. 
10. Soyez tranqnille, je snis fait a son badinage. 11. La 
panvre fille ! Ces gens-la penvent bien la tonrmenter 
a lenr aise ; elle est bien trop liere ponr se plaindre. 



* Section numbers refer to the List of Idiomatic Words and Phrases, 
beginning on page 183. 

105 



106 EXERCISES. 



62. 



1. I hope you are going to set about work with fresh 
courage. 2. You inay''^ find it rather difficult in the 
beginning, but you will get accustomed to it. 3. Can 
he not give an account of what has passed? 4. You 
had better not speak to him any more about that affair, 
he wdll not yield an inch. 6. It is to be hoped they 
will take our expenses into account. 6. Do not care 
about what they say. 7. He has abused the confidence 
his father had placed in him. 8. Why do they not 
accustom themselves to our way of living? 9. I shall 
call him to account for this shameful behavior. 10. We 
must not abuse the mercies God sends us. 11. I shall 
forgive you your fault, if you confess it of your own 
accord. 12. Are you able to do this work well ? 13. He 
is the most ignorant man in the town ; he does not 
know A from B. 14. Let us take her youth into account, 
she did it to the best of her ability. 15. As for you, 
you will easily accomplish what they have given you to 
do. 16. I had scarcely entered, when he launched into 
abuse of me. 17. Is it thus you always abuse people ? 

63. 

(Section 2.) 

1. Nous avons Phonneur, Monsieur, de vous accuser 
reception de la lettre que vous avez bien voulu nous 
adresser le 13 courant. 2. Ne lui faites pas part de 
ce qui s'est passe, je vous prie; il sera toujours temps 
qu'il le sache. 3. La semaine derniere, nous avons joue 
entre nous un Proverbe de Souvestre; c'est moi qui 
faisais le papa, et ma S(jeur Louise qui faisait la maman. 
4. Si vous faites connaissance avec lui, vous vous en 



EXERCISES. 107 

mordrez les doigts plus tard. 5. Laissez-iious done tran- 
quilles avec cette lettre ; que de bruit vous faites pour 
une misere ! 6. Celui qui ment fait le brave avee Dieu, 
et le poltron avec les liommes. 7. Allons ! faites voir 
que vous avez du cffiur, et ne vous elf ray ez pas x^our si 
peu de chose. 8. Si vous faites sa connaissance, il ne 
cessera de vous emprunter de Pargent^ il est toujours 
sans le sou. 9. Maintenant que le voici riche^ il ne me 
salue plus dans la rue ; il tranche du grand seigneur. 

10. Si vous avez encore mal au doigt, n'ecrivez pas^ niais 
preparez bien votre lecon. 11. Je n'en ferai ni une ni 
deux ; je le consignerai a ma porte. 12. Ca, ca change 
la these, mais ne craignez-vous pas les suites de sa colere ? 

64. 

1. After acting so foolishly, you need not wonder that 
your head aches. 2. I shall acknowledge his letter, and 
I hope by this means to get acquainted with him. 3. Go 
to him, and act like a man. 4. Did she not impersonate 
that character beautifully ? o. I must not take advan- 
tage of his absence to injure him. 6. He affects the 
manners of an aristocrat. 7. Do not be afraid of that 
dog; he Avill not bite you. 8. I shall not have to 
acquaint him with this melancholy fact. 9. What is the 
use of making so much ado about nothing? 10. He 
pretends to be deaf, but he hears all we are saying. 

11. I am afraid we shall not reach our destination to- 
night. 12. My dear sir, if you don't take advantage of 
that opportunity, you will be acting contrary to reason. 
13. That gold Avatch suits me very well, but I cannot 
afford to buy it. 11. How was it that you did not get 
acquainted with that gentleman ? 15. Do not look for 



108 EXERCISES. 

Jules, he has gone in advance. 16. My teeth ache 
so much that I have scarcely slept these three days. 
17. He always made a great fuss for nothing. 18. He 
counterfeits lameness. 19. You ought to be able to 
afford to buy it, after making so much money. 20. She 
was in the act of opening the window, when I accosted 
her. 21. He took advantage of his uncle, and so gave 
his enemies an advantage over him. 22. His brother 
called him to account for the way he spent his sister's 
money. 23. Of her own accord she told us all that had 
passed. 24. How do you account for the earthquakes 
that take place ? 25. He set about teaching, but did 
not succeed. 

65. 

(Section 3.) 

1. Est-ce bien a cela qu'il vise ? 2. C'est d'elle qu'il 
tient. 3. Bien certainement je Paurais fait, s'il n'avait 
tenu qu'a cela. 4. Laissez-nous done tranquilles, vous 
ne savez ce que vous dites. 5. Prenez garde, mon 
cher; je crois que c'est a votre position qu'il en veut. 
6. Est-ce que cela ne m'est pas egal ? 7. Si je vous en 
fais des reproches, c'est a contre-coeur, croyez-le bien. 
8. Pardon, Monsieur, je suis etranger, et je ne suis pas 
bien sur du sens qu'il me f aut attacher a vos expressions : 
que voulez-vous dire par ces paroles : '^ II en passera 
par on vous voudrez ?^^ 9. Je veux dire que vos condi- 
tions seront les siennes, et qu'il signera tout les yeux 
fermes. 10. Vous avez beau dire et beau faire, je 
n'admettrai jamais qu'on se conduise avec une telle 
impertinence. 11. Ce n'est peut-etre pas une imperti- 
nence reelle ; peut-etre a-t-il cru bien faire ; les coutumes 
different comme les langues, et il faut savoir passer 






EXERCISES. 109 



qiielque chose" un eWanger. 12. Reconnaissez main- 
tenant que vous etes un pea trop vif ; en convenez-vous 
enlin ? 

66. 

1. Leave her alone; is she not of an age to know 
(how) to behave herself ? 2. I cannot ask him to do it 
against his will. 3. He was not able to tell what ailed 
him. 4. Did she not do it against her will ? 5. You 
must not always agree to whatever she proposes. 6. Let 
me alone; I want to enjoy the fresh air. 7. I admit that 
I was wrong ; what ^^ do you conclude from it ? 8. He 
takes after his father in that. 9. It must be done after 
the English fashion. 10. I never could agree with him 
on any subject. 11. Try to persuade him that I do it 
against my will. 12. She takes after her mother in. 
her taste for dress. 13. It is tiresome to walk the same 
road every day. 14. Do you admit that the thing took 
place as I say ? 15. What ails your father ? 16. Is 
it not all one to me, whether ^^^ he goes or remains ? 
17. Is it to me that you allude ? 18. Come with us, 
you will see that the sea air will agree with you. 
19. He must agree to whatever I propose. 20. Does he 
not take after his cousin ? 21. .The Queen allows him 
two hundred a year. 22. They found no lodgings upon 
their arrival, and were obliged to sleep in the open air. 

23. He aimed at the consulship, but could not get it. 

24. What ails your dog ? 25. Do as you like, it is all 
one to me. 

67. 

(Section 4.) 

1. Vous auriez tort de lui en vouloir, elle n'a jamais 
songe a vous nuire. 2. A qui vous etes-vous adresse ? 



110 EXERCISES, 

Est-ce a la maitresse de la maisoii? 3. Vous me 
faites honte avec vos coudes perces; allez changer de 
paletot. 4. C'est a eux que j'aurai recours pour vous 
faire avoir cette place. 6. Yoyons, est-ce que cela ne 
reviendra pas au merne au bout du compte ?' 6. Ce n'est 
plus a vous qu'il en veut, a ce qu'il parait ; c'est bien a 
moi. 7. J'ai change d'idee; je n'irai que demain. 8. Je 
ne sache pas qu'il m'en veuille, mais, quand cela serait, 
(ja m'est parfaitement egal. 9. Avec ces gens-la il ne 
faut pas parler a mots converts, il faut aller droit au 
but. 10. II est tombe des nues quand je lui ai dit pour- 
quoi M'"^ votre mere s'etait mise en colere contre moi. 

11. Eestez-en la, il est evident que cela le tracasse. 

12. J^ai peur, mon cher Monsieur, que vous ne vous y 
soyez pris trop tard ; il y a toute apparence que la place 
est prise. 

68. 

1. Are you not very angry with your brother ? 2. You 
ought to be ashamed of your laziness. 3. Did you not 
apply to your uncle for that ? 4. It amounts to the 
same thing. 5. He will alter his mind when ^^ he has 
well considered the thing. 6. You must not be angry 
at his departure. 7. l^our remarks do not apply to this 
subject. 8. We ought to be more anxious about our 
health than our wealth. 9. Does it not amount to the 
same thing ? 10. Do you approve of her coming to see 
you? 11. From what I see, you do not wish to do it. 
12. Were you not always very anxious about your son 
when he was at sea ? 13. Now, don't change your mind, 
as you always do. 14. Amuse yourself to your heart's 
content, after working so well. 15. How can you be 
angry at such an innocent joke ? 16. If it is an annoy- 



EXERCISES. Ill 

ance to you, sir, I will let it alone. 17. He is very apt 
to slander people. 18. It will amount to the same thing 
one hundred years hence. 19. As it apx-)ears, you have 
made up your mind. 20. He will apologize to you for 
his conduct, I answer for it. 21. Apply yourself to your 
lessons, for there is every indication that you will have 
to teach. 22. Try to settle that question amicably. 

23. Don't you think it is rather a far-fetched argument ? 

24. As I was going down town last evening, I met them 
walking arm in arm. 25. He anticipated his income, 
so now he has not a cent. 

69. 

(Section 5.) 

1. Vous avez beau prier et supplier ; tout cela ne 
servira de rien. 2. S'il s'informe de moi, dites-lui que 
je vais tout doucement. 3. Si nous Pinvitions a diner 
pour samedi, qu'en pensez-vous ? 4. II n'en revenait pas. 
5. II avait si faim qu'il a mange comme quatre. 6. Vou- 
loir arranger une affaire comme celle-la, Monsieur, c'est 
vouloir prendre la lune avec les dents. 7. Veuillez me 
preter la plus grand e attention, je vous prie ; ce que je 
vais vous dire est de la plus haute importance. 8. A 
quoi bon vous mettre a genoux devant lui ? toutes vos 
supplications ne vous^ serviront de rien. 9. Elle a eu la 
bonte de s'informer de moi ; rappelez-moi a son bon 
souvenir la premiere fois que vous la verrez. 10. De- 
cidement ce monsieur s'en fait trop accroire ; voyez done 
comme il se rengorge; il se croit le premier moutardier 
du pape. 11. Faites-la entrer au salon ; je suis a elle 
dans une minute. 12. N'etait il pas prevenu de ce mal- 
heur avant mon arrivee ? 



112 EXERCISES, 

70. 

1. If you are not mucli attached to your dog, you 
would do well to give it to me. 2. That servant is all 
attention to her mistress. 3. Why did you not ask 
him to dinner? 4. He was perfectly astounded at the 
intelligence. 5. He pays attention to all that is said 
to him. 6. He never availed himself of the many 
chances he had. 7. Such a thing happens once a^ year 
on an average. 8. Your evidence avails nothing in this 
case. 9. He attended to his business, and I to mine. 
10. He was asked to dine with us, but refused. 11. I 
am perfectly aware of that. 12. Why do you not pay 
attention to the orders of your officers ? 13. He is 
astounded at the results. 14. Ought I to ask her to 
come in for a few minutes ? 15. If you avail yourself 
of all these chances, you must succeed. 16. It will 
avail you nothing to go there. 17. He should ^^ attend 
more to his business. 18. Have you asked after the 
sick lady who has come to live beside us? 19. Not to be 
aware of so important a historical event as that betrays 
gross ignorance. 20. How very awkward that young 
man looks ! 21. If they call, ask them in. . 22, Take 
two from seven, five remain. 23. All his perseverance 
availed nothing. 24. You must pay attention to what 
is said to you. 25. Shut the window, that music dis- 
tracts your attention. 26. To attend the class is not all 
that is necessary, you must also attend to your lessons. 

71. 

(Section 6.) 

1. Elle a un oncle fort riche dont elle doit heriter. 
2. Oil il n'y a rien, dit un vieux proverbe, le roi perd 



EXERCISES. 113 

ses droits. 3. C'est lui qui vous a tenu lieu cle pere. 
4. Trouvez-vous-y a sept lieures. 5. Comment pouvez- 
vous vous bien porter ? vous ne faites que boire et manger 
toute la journee. 6. II en est d'un secret comme d'un 
tresor; des qu'une fois on sait ou il est^ on ne tarde pas 
a le decouvrir. 7. Le roi deniandait un jour a un lit- 
terateur francais s'il croyait en Dieu: "Oui, Sire, j'aime 
a croire/' repondit I'ecrivain, ^^qu'il y a un Etre au-dessus 
des rois.'' 8. Je me trouve lieureux chez moi ; j'y vis 
selon mes gouts, je ne depends de personne. 9. Mai 
lui a pris de s'attaquer a elle. 10. Si vous lui dites ca, 
vous allez vous le mettre a dos. ^ 11. J'ai quitte Londres 
.pour New York il y a de cela quel que s annees, mais 
j'avoue que j'ai perdu au change. 12. Je suis a vous a 
Pinstant; je ne fais qu'aller et venir. 

72. 

1. He is badly off for money now, his father has 
just failed. 2. Take care that he is not left on your 
hands. 3. It is too bad to treat him so disrespectfully. 
4. I should have been bankrupt the week after if money 
had not come in. 5. Be that as it may, you were wrong 
from the first. 6. Ought we not to be at the Exchange 
an hour before the mail arrives ? 7. He was a father 
to those poor childreii. 8. They are always talking 
nonsense. 9. What is it to me whether ^^^ he comes or 
not ? 10. You are always complaining ; is it not with 
you as with others ? 11. That precious friend of yours 
is eating and drinking the whole day. 12. What is that 
to me, provided he does it honestly ? 13. Do not be 
afraid, I shall back you. 14. There are many people 
in this world who never trouble themselves about the 



114 EXERCISES. 

morrow. 15. You ought to write to him, he is badly off. 
16. Now that you have matters in your own hands, you 
can make (your) fortune. 17. What can prevent our 
being ^' at the station in time ? 18. You are to be taken 
there at once. 19. It would be as well to let it alone ; 
let us go. 20. What is that to me, provided I get m.y 
money ? 21= You are always slandering your brother. 

22. There would be more apples if the boys had not 
stolen so many. 23. Please wait for me, I shall be back 
presently. 24. I bought all the house furniture, and she 
gave me an old trunk with the contents in the bargain. 

23. He was astounded to hear that you were still a 
bachelor. 

73. 

(Section 7.) 

1. J^espere que vous n'allez pas vous mettre a travailler, 
malade comme vous etes ! 2. Vous feriez bien mieux de 
garder le lit. 3. Ne m'en sachez pas mauvais gre, je 
Fai fait pour le mieux. 4. Ce n'est pas a vous que j'en 
veux, c'est a lui. 5. II vous sied bien de trouver a 
redire a sa conduite ! 6. D'avocat que vous etiez, ne 
vous etes-vous j)as fait marchand de vin ? 7. Non, non, 
je ne vous en veux pas pour ce que vous avez dit, c'est 
contre votre soeur que j'ai de la rancune. 8.. Eh bien! 
trouvez-vous cela difficile maintenant? vous voyez qu'il 
n'y a que le premier pas qui coute. 9. II parait que 
Faffaire s'emmanche mal ; a en croire votre frere, mieux 
vaudrait nous en tenir la. 10. Puisque j'ai encore un 
bout de temps, je porterai ma lettre a la poste, et je 
verrai votre soeur en passant; ce sera faire d'une pierre 
deux coups. 11. J'ai beau faire, je ne puis pas lui 
fourrer cela dans la tete. 



EXERCISES. 116 



74. 



1. How can that be, if you don't know the way to set 
about it ? 2. Would it not be better to set out now ? 

3. Why should she bear ill-will toward her sister? 

4. From (a) surgeon he became (a) soldier. 5. I must 
beg of him to do it at once. 6. You should not begin 
to work so late. 7. Would it not be better to set out 
for New York by the first mail packet ? 8. Between 
this and Wednesday we have plenty of time to think 
over the matter. 9. Let us go in; I am benumbed with 
cold. 10. How long were you confined to your bed with 
that illness ? 11. He confesses that he had a hand in 
it ; it cannot be better. 12. Did you not beg of him to 
say nothing about it ? 13. Had she not better go away 
before her brother arrives ? 14. In spite of the promises 
which he had made, he began again worse than ever. 
15. Between this and Sunday you will have to finish 
that task. 16. He bears ill-will toward no one. 17. May 
I beg of you not to keep us waiting so long? 18. It 
becomes you indeed to speak so ! 19. He wishes to 
go ; let it be so ; he will soon repent. 20. Had we not 
better walk over to your uncle's this evening ? 21. Your 
bonnet becomes you very much. 22. Will you not bear 
witness to what took place ? 23. In that way, he killed 
two birds with one stone. 24. She was much benefited 
by her sea voyage. 25. That money ought to have been 
paid three weeks ago, but better late than never. 

75. 

(Section 8.) 

1. II doute que j'en vienne a bout. 2. EUe partait d'un 
eclat de rire an moment oii j'ouvrais la porte. 3. Est-ce 



116 EXERCISES. 

la ce que voiis appelez bon ton ? 4. C'est pcur vous 
Jeter de la poudre aux yeux qii'il vous dit cela ; ue 
eroyez pas un mot de ce qu'il vous conte. 5. Si c'est 
comme cela que vous vous y prenez, vous n'en viendrez 
jamais a bout. 6. Ce secret doit vous etre a charge ; ne 
pouvez-vous me le eonfier ? 7. On prit la ville sans coup 
ferir. 8. N 'est-ce pas chez vous que le feu a pris hier 
soir ? 9. Je ne me soucie pas plus de votre colere que 
de Pan quarante ; est-ce que, par hasard, vous eroyez me 
faire peur avec votre grosse voix? 10. Par exemple ! 
a-t-on jamais vu pareille cliose ! 11. Ou etes-vous done 
alle ce matin, mon petit bonhomme ? vous n'etiez pas a 
Tecole, c'est mon petit doigt qui me Ta dit. 12. II est 
venu me dire de but en blanc que je n'etais pas bien 
eleve et qu^il allait cesser tout rapport avec moi. 

76. 

1. Does *^ he hope to blind me by such paltry artifices ? 
2. At what hour shall I boil the water for tea ? 3. You 
surely would not be so bold as to ask him (for) a gold 
watch. 4. Are you quite sure that the door was bolted 
after you returned last night ? o. I was not hound to 
believe all his wonderful stories. 6. A fire broke out 
this morning in m}^ uncle's house. 7. He conquered a 
large province without striking a blow. 8. The arrival 
of that lady in the town always brings me good luckc 
9. You shoukU^ not burst out laughing every time that 
gentleman speaks. 10. The poor girl burst into tears 
when she heard the sad news. 11. By the by, you 
have entirely forgotten to repay that money ^^ you bor- 
rowed. 12. To enter the room, the thieves broke the 
door open. 13. The best way to bring about what you 



EXERCISES. 117 

wish would be to see the gentleman. 14. Could it not 
be brought about in any other way ? 15. You must 
not boil all the potatoes to-day. 16. It is three years 
since I began business, and I have succeeded pretty well. 
17. That man brings ill-luck wherever he goes. 18. You 
are not bound to show him all the letters you receive, 
19. They^^ were not at all well-bred people. 20. You 
have brought bad luck to our family 21. What did she 
burst into tears for ? 22. Is not your brother in a 
boarding school in London ? 23. That turkey is too 
large to be roasted ; you must boil it. 24. The new 
bank was burned to the ground. 25. She is too shy to 
speak to you first, you will certainly have to break the 
ice yourself. 

77. 

(Section 9.) 

1. Gardez-vous de vous lier avec lui; on a de graves 
soupcons sur son honneur. 2. On ne doit ni se moquer 
ni s'inquieter des qu'en dira-t-on. 3. Ce qu'il y a de 
certain, c'est que vous viendrez avec nous. 4. Je n'en 
suis pas bien certain, c'est selon. 5. Decidement, mon 
cher, vous vous ecoutez trop : hier vous n'avez rien fait 
de la journee, et aujourd'hui vous etes reste couche 
jusqu'a midi. 6. Prenez garde ; si vous n'avez soin de 
Yos habits, vous serez gfonde. 7. Vous devez etre en 
fonds maintenant ; il n'y a que trois jours que vous avez 
recu votre mois. 8. Chacun, dit La Eochefoucault, 
trouve a redire en autrui ce qu'on trouve a redire en lui. 
9. C'est bien dur pour lui d'etre ainsi reduit a la mi sere ; 
autrefois il etait fort bien dans ses affaires. 10. Tout 
son mobilier est en vente ; si vous voulez Pacheter, vous 
I'aurez a bon compte. 11. Nous voici dans une vilaine 



118 EXERCISES. 

passe ; comment nous tirerons-nous de la ? 12. Ne vous 
occupez pas de M. Louis ; c'est a M"'^ Louis qu'il faut 
vous adresser; M. Louis est un zero. 

78. 

1. I went last night to see the mistress of that girl; 
she gave her a very good character. 2. I happened to 
arrive before he did and get the situation. 3. Take care 
to do that exercise well. 4. You must take care what 
you do to that poor child. 5. When I get my salary, I 
shall be in funds for a week or two. 6. I caught him 
at it as I was passing. 7. As the case stands, you 
must leave to-night. 8. Perhaps I shall go with you ; 
that will depend on circumstances. 9. I don't care 
what people say if my conscience approves my actions. 
10. He was in good circumstances three years ago. 11. I 
shall call on you before leaving town. 12. Ought he not 
to take care what he does in such a difficult affair ? 

13. He took good care not ^to irritate the poor man. 

14. I care for my honor more than for my money. 15. I 
caused that poor man to drink a glass of wine. 16. Why 
do you change your dress so many times, a day? 
17. Don't stand on ceremony with us ; consider yourself 
at home. 18. I shall take care to inform him of that 
circumstance in my next letter. 19. I don't care 
whether ^^^ you walk or ride. 20. ShoukU^ she not call 
on the lady to thank her ? 21. Will you take care to 
thank him for me ? 22. I hope you don't waste your 
time in building castles in the air. 23. What did he 
cavil at ? 24. I cannot but acknowledge that we were 
both wrong. 25. It is very easy to see that he would 
like to make a cat's paw of me. 



EXERCISES. 119 

79. 

(Section 10.) 

1. Yous lie vous en tirerez pas si facilement que vous 
le pensez. 2. II est venii me trouver au moment oii je 
decaclietais votre lettre. 3. Apres tout^ est-ce que cela 
ne revient pas au meme ? 4. Fais ce que clois, advienne 
que pourra. 5. Mon cher, je yous felicite ; vous en etes 
quitte a bon marclie. 6. Ke vous etes-vous pas enrliumee 
hier soir en sortant de cliez nous? 7. Laissez-moi mon 
petit coin; voila trois ans que je I'occupe; si vous vous 
y mettiez, je ne serais pas a Taise de la soiree. 8. Je 
vais taclier de lui faire conter tout ce qu'il sait ; j'en 
aurai le coeur net. 9. Comme il sait faire patte de 
velours I 10. S'il ose me f rapper, je ne ferai ni une 
ni deux, je lui donnerai la monnaie de sa piece, et quel- 
que chose par-dessus le marclie. 11. C'est Ernest qui a 
remporte tons les premiers prix ; il est beaucoup plus 
fort que nioi dans toutes les branches; mais, en histoire 
et en geographic, je Tai serre de pres. 

80. 

1. You will not clap your hands so loudly when you 
hear "^ what your father says. 2. The weather has been 
extremely cold all this month. 3. Will you come to tea 
with us on Monday evening ? 4. She colors up when 
any one addresses her. 5. We did not get clear of the 
business so easily as you think. 6. AYill you come to 
me to-night at half-past five ? 7. Come what may, I 
did my best to ^^ succeed. 8. I shall not clear the table 
till ^^^ eveiT one has dined. 9. I have been so cold all 
day that I think I am going to be ill. 10. Poor fellow ! 
all his projects have come to nothing. 11. You did not 



120 EXERCISES. 

come off with much, glory in that encounter. 12. Will 
it not come to the same thing if I pay you before? 
13. How comes it that you are always too late for your 
dinner? 14. You were not so comfortable in your old 
house as (you are) in this one. 15. I had such a cold 
in my head it was impossible for me to sing. 16. I shall 
certainly catch cold if I am obliged to sit near this open 
window. 17. Has not the weather been colder this year 
than it was last year ? 18. When do you intend to 
come to see me? 19. Come along; it is clearing up; we 
shall have a fine walk. 20. How long have you had a 
cold ? 21. We came to an understanding before parting. 

22. Let him come to me to-morrow at twelve o'clock. 

23. I cannot get clear of that horrible confusion. 24. If 
you like^ we shall go and see him ; he lives close by. 
25. How comes it that you sing (so) much better than 
you used to? 

81. 

(Section 11.) 

1. Qu'il s'en fait accroire, cet imbecile ! 2. Je vous 
ferai incessamment connaitre un fait qu'il vous importe 
beaucoup de savoir, 3. Auriez-vous, Monsieur,, la bonte 
de coucher ceci par ecrit ? c'est la coutume dans ce pays. 
4. Ne vous derangez pas, je vous prie; je -m'y rendrai 
moi-meme, a moins que Faffaire ne vous regarde person- 
nellement. 5. Votre pendule est, ce me semble, en fort 
mauvais etat; elle vient de sonner dix-huit ou vingt 
heures. 6. N'allez pas lui manquer de respect au moins, 
c'est lui qui fait ici la pluie et le beau temps. 7. Quand 
vous voudrez, Monsieur, je suis a vos ordres. 8. Voyons, 
mettez la main sur la conscience, et dites-moi f ranchement 
si vous pensez que la conduite que vous tenez vous fait 



EXERCISES. 121 

lionueiir. 9. Que pensez-YOus de mon cousin ? il n'a pas 
Fair d'avoir inveiite la poudre, n'est-ce pas ? 10. II 
perd facilement la carte ; lorsque ma femme lui a adresse 
la parole, il est reste bouche beante. 11. Que je prenne 
garde a moi, dites-vous, de peur qu^on ne repete ce que 
je dis ! cela m'est Men egal, c'est le moindre de mes 
soucis. 

82. 

1. I think he will not consent to do him even that 
small service. 2. He is ^^ a very conceited young man. 
3. As my honor was concerned it was necessary for me to 
be present. 4. Was not your brother the second in com- 
mand in that engagement ? 5. You shall confine your- 
self to that ; it would be dangerous to excite him more. 

6. It is of consequence to me that you should come. 

7. It was of consequence to do that at once. 8. ISTow, 
sir, I am at your service; we shall go when you like. 
9. Do not concern yourself about my affairs. 10. Would 
it not be of consequence to your father to have the letter 
early? 11. If my life is at stake, that is of great con- 
sequence. 12. You are not X3ursuing a (course of) con- 
duct tliat will please your friends. 13. Why should I 
not confide in those that have been so kind to me? 
14. Do not confine yourself to that. 15. Do you think 
we should '^ confine ourselves to these orders ? 16. To 
complete my misery, I lost my w^ay in the forest. 
17. You are too conceited, my friend. 18. Why do you 
concern yourself so much about things that do not con- 
cern you ? 19. If my honor is not concerned, I need 
not trouble myself about it. 20. Was he conscious of 
what he was saying at the time ? 21. It is of consequence 
to do well what we have to do. 22. I confided in his 



122 EXERCISES. 

honor, and he has kept the secret. 23. The whole town 
was in a commotion on account of the elections. 24. A 
little bird told me that you had all been compelled to 
act together, in order to carry it through. 25. Did you 
notice how she tried to command a grave countenance ? 

83. 

(Section 12.) 

1. Vous m'avez defie de faire tomber la conversation 
sur ce sujet-la: eh Men, ne m'en suis-je pas tire avec 
honneur ? 2. En revenant, comme il faisait noir, il a 
pris un fosse plein d'eau pour un beau sentier, et il est 
alle se jeter dedans. 3. Comme vous etes de mauvaise 
humeur ce matin ! 4. Je n'ai pas dormi de la nuit, je 
n'ai fait que tousser. 6. II faut bien pen de chose pour 
le deconcert€r. 6. Voyons, ne me pressez pas tant, 
laissez-moi le temps de m'orienter. 7. C'est moi qui 
ferai les frais de son installation, coute que coute. 
8. S'il m'obsede constamment de sa presence, nous aurons 
maille a partir ensemble. 9. C'est un monsieur qui n'a 
pas Tair d'y toucher, mais il en faut un plus malin que 
lui pour m'attraper. 10. II faisait nuit noire quand 
nous sommes arrives ; il n'y avait pas un chat dans les 
rues. 11. Si votre ami n'avait pas la tete un pen felee^, 
je lui donnerais du fil a retordre. 

84. 

1. You are constantly doing what you ought not (to 
do). 2. He turned the conversation to other subjects. 
3. Don't tell such terrible stories again ; you make my 
flesh creep. 4. You are so cross, it is impossible to live 



EXERCISES. 123 

with you. 5. I dared liim to make sucli a speech. 

6. Why is the letter dated the 20th of September? 

7. It will not be dark for an hour yet. 8. I dare you 
to approach me. 9. You cannot be in danger from that 
poor little beast. 10. How long has he been paying his 
court to that young lady ? 11. That is, of course, if you 
can afford it. 12. Don't speak of him to me ; Ave are at 
swords' points. 13. I shall turn the conversation to 
another subject immediately. 14. Keep yourself cool, 
here is your brother coming. 15. I daresay she will 
come, if her father is better. 16. You must not cough 
in the middle of my speech. 17. I fell in the mud, and 
was covered wHth it up to the eyes. 18. They used to 
lay all the travellers under contribution. 19. You are 
in no danger from that slight cold. 20. Will you please 
make a clear copy of these notes. 21. I am completely 
in the dark about their projects. 22. Few people are 
consistent with themselves. 23. We w^alked all day up 
hill and dowm dale. 24. You will do well to consider 
the thing twice before you promise. 25. Here is a letter 
saying she cannot come, that caps the climax of our 
disappointment. 

85. 

(Section 13.) 

1. II s'est 6te le pain< de la bouche pour vous donner 
une bonne education. 2. Ce ne sont pas les titres, c'est 
le travail et la vertu qui decident du merite ; ceux-ci 
dependent de nous, ceux-la dependent du hasard. 8. II 
ne depend pas de nous de n'etre pas pauvres, mais 
il depend de nous de faire respecter notre pauvrete. 
4. Soyez tranquille; si Pon vous attaque, je suis la; je 
prendrai fait et cause pour vous. 5. Auriez-vous la 



124 EXERCISES. 

bonte de lui remettre ce paquet en mains propres ? je 
me defie de ses domestiques. 6. Vous ne savez pas 
le prendre : avec de la douceur et des caresses vous le 
meneriez au bout du monde. 7. Vous etes un de ceux 
qui croient voir des etoiles en plein midi. 8. Hier on 
eut dit qu'il etait a deux doigts de la mort, mais main- 
tenant il n'est pas si mal a beaucoup pres. 9. Criez plus 
fort, elle est sourde comme un pot. 10. Nous buvions 
six ou huit verres d'eau minerale par jour, et nous allions 
prendre un bain de deux jours Tun. 11. II ne tient qu'a 
vous de venir avec nous ; le cheval est attele, nous partons 
dans cinq minutes. 

86. 

1. The letter bearing the date of the 21st of January 
never reached me. 2. I promise to call on him some 
day next week. 3. It will be broad daylight at five 
o'clock in the morning. 4. It is impossible to say to 
an hour when I return. 5. Can you tell me whose deal 
it is ? 6. He was put to death in the most cruel way. 

7. She will be (found) deficient in skill at the last trial. 

8. Some people delight in scandal. 9. His letter was 
not delivered in time. 10. You cannot depend upon a 
single word she says. 11. That depends upon circum- 
stances. 12. He deprived himself of many pleasures in 
order to give his children a good education. 13. My 
dear friend, it is time for you to decide ; we are leaving. 
14. Some day next week you will hear from me. 15. She 
is an excellent servant, but you don't know how to deal 
with her. 16. Have you not deprived yourself of your 
fortune to assist your relations ? 17. Your account 
bearing the date of the 2d of November is wrong. 18. I 
hope those manners will soon go out of date. 19. Some 



EXERCISES. 125 

evening next week we shall call on you. 20. It must 
have been broad daylight when they entered the house. 
21. Could you not deliver the letter yourself? 22. I 
know to a day when he will arrive. 23. She is older 
than you; you should deal with her more politely. 
24. We deemed it expedient tiD return as quickly as 
possible. 25. When your sister was with us^ she was 
the delight of the whole household.. 

87. 

(Section 14.) 

1. J'ai oublie de vous charger de lui faire mes compli- 
ments. 2. Quelle peine il a eue a s'arracher a cette 
mauvaise habitude ! 3. Quand vous lui ecrirez^ je vous 
prie de vouloir bien me rappeler a son bon souvenir. 
4. Si vous lui rendez ce petit service, vous verrez qu'il 
se mettra en quatre pour vous. 5. Vous m'avez mis 
dans de beaux draps avec les histoires que vous etes 
alle lui conter. 6. Comment ! est-ce qu'on se rebute 
comme cela pour la moindre chose? 7. Laissez la cette 
besogne ; vous etes trop distrait ; vous ne faites rien qui 
vaille. 8. Cela ira bien quan4 je m'y serai mis tout 
de bon ; le tout est de m'y mettre. 9. Tl n'y a que le 
premier pas qui coute. 10. Vous finirez cela en deux ou 
trois jours ; ne dirait-on pas que c'est la mer a boire ? 
11. Quand je la vois jouer ainsi a tort et a travers, sans 
raisonner ce qu'elle fait, cela me casse bras et jambes. 

88. 

1. You have had great difficulty in succeeding. 2. I 
served up dinner as soon as I was told. 3. Are not the 
streets dirty to-day ? Yes, very. 4. This dish invari- 



126 EXERCISES. 

ably disagrees with me. 5. I was greatly disappointed 
in that affair. 6. This box will do for the one I lost. 

7. You should have (nothing) to do with that man. 

8. Please convey my kind regards to your father. 9. I 
think my brother is to dine out to-day. 10. Does 
not this close atmosphere disagree with your health? 
11. He would not hurt a fly. 12. How dirty it is some- 
times in this quarter of the town! 13. This will do 
for a sail. 14. She has great difficulty in walking. 
15. Give it to her, it makes no difference to me. 16. Do 
you not wish to send your kind regards to my brother ? 

17. This fine weather should agree with your health. 

18. Set about it at once; you will see that there will 
be no difficulty in the thing. 19. I cannot bring in the 
dinner till ^^^ your father comes. 20, Have you had any 
difficulty in procuring your brother a pension ? 21. He 
dismounted and came to embrace us. 22. You may do 
as you please, I have nothing to do with it. 23. He 
does nothing but sigh all day long. 24. We had invited 
those friends of yours to dinner on Thanksgiving Day, 
but they disappointed us. 25. You must do just as you 
please. 

89. 

(Section 15.) 

1. C'est assez comme cela, n'y touchez plus, c'est tout ce 
qu'il faut. 2. Je vous defie d'en faire autant. 3. Est-ce 
bien la tout ce qu'il faut ? ne vous trompez vous pas ? 
4. Cette lettre m'a longtemps tenu au coeur. 5. Je ne 
pouvais me faire a Tidee que c'etait bien lui qui I'avait 
ecrite. 6. Faites en sorte de vous passer de sa societe ; 
cela n'en ira que mieux. 7. Je crois, ma cousine, que 
vous avez ensorcele cette petite bete ; elle ne pent pas 



EXEKCISES. 127 

se passer de vous cinq minutes. 8. Vons qui faites 
Tentendu, je parie bien que vous n'en sauriez faire autant 
qu'elle. 9. Si vous ne lui donnez pas un bon pourboire, 
il vous mettra toute Faff aire sur le dos, vous pouvez j 
compter. 10. Si vous etes toujours la pres de moi, 
bavardant, riant et faisant du tapage, il n'y a pas moyen 
d'ecrire une ligne qui ait le sens commun. 11. Ou voulez- 
vous en venir avec toutes vos hesitations et toutes vos 
reticences ? 

90. 

1. That story has nothing to do with what we are saying. 
2. I advise you not to drive him to extremities. 3. I can 
do without wine, if you give me pure water. 4. That 
will do ; say no more about it. 5. Will that do ? 
6. He will bring upon himself a public rebuke. 7. The 
weather has not been so dry for many a day. 8. Did 
you not drop your handkerchief in the street? 9. Is it not 
your duty to fight when your country calls you? 10. You 
will have to do without luxuries when you emigrate. 
11. If I have done wrong in reproaching you, I am sorry 
for it. 12. I should be doing right to expel him from 
the school. 13. My leaving ^' the town dwelt long upon 
his mind. 14. The cab drove over his leg. 15. I deem 
it a duty to tell her what has happened. 16. I should 
think you are double' my age. 17. I shall not dwell 
upon your misbehavior towards me. 18. I must drop 
this bag at the next corner. 19. Will it be dry enough 
to take a walk ? 20. What is to be done to prevent him 
from coming ? 21. That will not do. 22. Our neigh- 
bor's wife is dying. 23. Those questions are not for me 
to decide. 24. Let us draw lots to decide who shall go 
to the opera. 25. I dropped her acquaintance long ago. 



128 EXERCISES, 

91. 

(Section 16.) 

1. N'etiez-vous pas en train de lier conversation avec 
elle lorsque je suis entre ? 2. Je vons ai adresse la 
parole, mais vons avez fait la sourde oreille. 3. Enfin, 
grace a vous, me voici a meme de quitter nn pays on 
j'allais perir. 4. Interrogez-les tonjours; ne lacliez pas 
prise ; ils finiront bien par Tavoner. 5. Faites done 
cesser cet affreux piano, voila trois heures que j'entends 
le commencement du meme air. 6. Le mot qui t'echappe 
est ton maitre; celui que tu retiens est ton esclave. 
7. Le chien et le chat, ennemis Puri de Tautre, finis sent 
par vivre en bonne intelligence. 8. Pardon, Monsieur ; - 
c'est assez, c'est meme plus qu'il ne faut. 9. Yous 
en parlez bien a votre aise; il semble, avec vous, qu'il 
n^ ait qu'a se baisser et a en prendre. 10. Je ne sais 
ce que j'ai ce matin; je ne suis pas dans mon assiette. 
11. II me semble que cette lettre, an lieu de vous lier les 
mains, vous laisse les coudees franches. 12. II faudra 
repasser plus tard, monsieur n'est pas visible. 

92. 

1. He turns a deaf ear to all that I say. 2. He is 
engaged in putting an end to that quarrel. 3. His 
friends will enable him to pay his debts. 4, If you say 
that, you will make an enemy of my wife. 6. We have 
enjoyed that drive very much. 6. Were they not en- 
gaged in writing ? 7. Let us not enter into conversation 
with her. 8. Will they not envy him his success ? 
9. What else is there to do ? 10. He must have been 
very hungry, for he ate very heartily. 11. I regretted 
your absence very much ; there was, indeed, enough to 



EXERCISES. 129 

laugh at. 12. Make yourself comfortable, that seat is 
good enough for ine. 13. Should you consent to treat 
him on a footing of equality ? 14. Let us endeavor to 
do our task well.^ 15. If you stop your ears, I won't 
speak any more. 16. She used to enliven the evenings 
with songs. 17. Be easy ; he always enjoys himself well. 
18. They will not be so enraged against him. 19. We 
shall end by forgiving her. 20. Are you in good earnest 
when you say that you give an entertainment to-night ? 
21. She is a very able woman, one who is always equal 
to any emergency. 22. He whispered in my ear that he 
expected to be married shortly. 23. Mary was very 
much excited because you told her that she had not 
done an earthly thing all this last week. 24. He is still 
engaged in writing that book, there seems to be no end 
of it. 25. That child has a good ear for music. 

93. 

(Section 17.) 

1. n etait temps que je vinsse a son secours, elle n'en 
pouvait plus. 2. Elle pent se vanter de Pavoir echappe 
belle. 3. Vous croyez qu'il se repentira; ne vous y 
attendez pas; il vous poussera a bout comme tout le 
monde. 4. Allons, ne vous faites pas prier ; venez avec 
nous ; c'est votre oncle" qui fait les frais de cette partie 
de plaisir. 5. Celui qui passe dans la paresse la pre- 
miere partie de sa vie, ne doit pas s'attendre a se reposer 
dans la vieillesse. 6. Vous y regardez d'un pen trop 
pres; avec vous il faut toujours mettre les points sur 
les i. 7. Pendant Pete, lorsque les classes sont fermees, 
lisez quelque bon livre franqais, et tachez de faire men- 
talement quelques phrases tons les jours ; cela vous 



130 EXEECISES. 

tiendra en lialeine. 8. Eepondre a une question par 
line autre, c'est repondre a Pecossaise; repondre sans 
rien dire, c'est repondre en Normand. 9. II a fait tons 
ses efforts pour vous etre agreable ; il f aut lui savoir gre 
de sa bonne volonte. 10. Elle a ouvert de grands yeux 
en revoyant Eugene, qu'elle croyait mort depuis plusieurs 
annees. 11. Ce qu'il m'a dit la est une defaite ; je suis 
stir qu^il a touche I'argent. 

94. 

1. I had a narrow escape last night. 2. You will be 
exhausted like myself, if you go so far. 3. He hopes 
that I shall defray the expense of my journey. 4. Let 
him not expect that. 5. It will be very expensive. 
6. They exhausted my patience at last. 7. You would 
set greater value on that book if you were able to under- 
stand it. 8. Your account is right, with that exception. 
9. I was at considerable expense to ^^ procure him that 
pleasure. 10. You excite my compassion, but I cannot 
help you; I am quite exhausted. 11. Do not set any 
value on her favor ; she is capricious. 12. I expected 
so. 13. He is a hypocrite whom you must ■ expose. 
14. He endeavors to catch the eye of everybody. 15. He 
hoped you would be a witness for him in that unfortu- 
nate circumstance. 16. The wickedness and cunning 
of that lawyer are far beyond expression. 17. Never 
ask him here ; he is an eyesore to me. 18. My uncle 
used to give me five francs a month for my petty ex- 
penses. 19. Is it not he who defrayed the expenses of 
your education ? 20. Yes ; nobody has ever evinced 
more kindness and generosity. 21. I shall never be even 
with him. 22. It will be a very expensive education. 



EXERCISES. 131 

23. Her eyes were fairly starting out of her head with 
surprise. 24. You must take exception to her state- 
ments, she always runs from one extreme to the other. 
25. It is very rude to eye people from head to foot. 

95. 

(Section 18.) 

1. C'est hier qu'on a fait Pelection des officiers, et il 
ne tenait qu'a moi d'etre lieutenant. 2. Je ne Pai pas 
voulu pour ne pas avoir affaire au capitaine Martin, car 
il y a trois ans nous nous sommes querelles a propos de 
bottes. 3. II s'en faut de beaucoup qu'il soit aussi fier 
que vous le pensez. 4. N'allez pas donner dans ces 
modes-la; c'est de Pextra^vagance toute pure. 5. II a 
su lui faire face. 6. C'est vrai, ma chere niece, voila 
de tres-belle dentelle, mais ce n'est pas pour vos beaux 
yeux. 7. II faut avoir du front pour oser se presenter 
dans le monde apres un tel esclandre. 8. C'est une 
vraie poule mouillee que votre petit cousin ; il a peur de 
son ombre. 9. C'est pour la fete d'hier que j'avais 
commande cet habit ; reprenez-le ; c'est de la moutarde 
apres diner. 10. II est ecrit qu'on ne me laissera pas 
une minute de repos. 11. Elle m'a annonce cela a brule 
pourpoint. 

96. 

1. The soldiers faced the enemy bravely. 2. The 
troops fell into the ambuscade. 3= I am far from wish- 
ing that. 4. I must bid farewell to my sisters. 5. We 
failed in spite of our efforts. 6. The tiger feeds on 
flesh. T. They felt almost offended at your remarks. 
8. Would they really quarrel about such a trifle ? their 



132 EXEKCISES. 

friends would be far from approving it. 9. Will that 
watch go too fast if I touch it ? 10. That dress is no 
longer in fashion. 11. Do you not feel reluctant to 
speak to him of all that ? 12. We would not fall into 
that snare so easily as you. 13. He quarrelled with his 
father about the lady to whom he had taken a fancy. 
14. It will be your fault if you fail. 15. All this is 
very fair, but tell me the pretext of their quarrel. 
16. She is in great fear of me. 17. Do not forget to go 
and bid farewell to your cousin before you go. 18. My 
watch is too fast by five minutes. 19. For three months 
we were constantly on the lookout. 20. It was so dark 
in church that we had to feel our way. 21. We were 
so hungry that we fell upon everything we could find. 

22. I was surprised to see them on such familiar terms. 

23. We shall esteem it a favor if you will come and dine 
with us a week from to-day. 24. When will they lay 
the corner stone of the new city hall ? 25. Those flowers 
are faded, throw them away. 

97. 

(Section 19.) 

1. Ne vous attristez pas ; le temps va se remettre au 
beau; voyez, le vent emporte tons les nuages. 2. La 
pauvre fille a le coeur gros ; je lui ai dit que sa tante ne 
viendrait pas la prendre cet apres-midi. 3. C'est cette 
petite affaire qui, tournant en insurrection, a mis le feu 
a toute FEurope. 4. On Tavait accuse de lachete, mais 
il a bravement paye de sa personne dans cette bataille. 
5. Ne me parlez pas d'Honore ; c'est un triste sire il est 
egoiste, faux et vaniteux. 6. Allez faire un petit tour 
sur le bord de la mer, et vous verrez que votre migraine 



EXERCISES. 133 

s'en trouvera mieux. 7. Depechez-vous de repondre a 
sa question, ou il trouvera bien le moyen de yous laire 
parler. 8. II s'est precipite au fort de la melee, et s'est 
battu corps a corps avec le general ennemi. 9. Est-ce 
que vous m'en voulez pour cela ? est-ce le calomnier 
que de dire qu'il n'a pas invente la poudre ? 10. J^ai 
vu passer votre frere dans son nouvel uniforme ; il avait 
fort bonne mine, et j'entendais dire autour de moi qu'il 
etait beau comme un astre. 11. Si vous allez repeter 
cette liistoire a tout bout de champ, vous vous en mordrez 
les doigts, c'est moi qui vous le predis. 

98. 

1. Henry is a good fellow, but his brother is a bad 
fellow. 2. Come and take her for a walk, then go and 
fetch the doctor. 3. When it is ^^ fine again, we shall 
go. 4. Do not set fire to that paper. 5. If you drink 
two or three glasses of that water every morning, you 
will find yourself much the better for it. 6. Kow she 
feels sick at heart, because the money is lost. 7. Your 
brother always has his French lesson at his lingers' 
ends. 8. Will he not go and bring me the book I spoke 
of ? 9. Xo, he will take it amiss if you ask it again. 
10. All those reproaches are unjust, I don't care a fig 
for them. 11. We fcfund it worth our while to sell 
our land. 12. I fear they may set fire to the house. 
13. Come and fetch me at half-past two. 14. What 
would you do if she suddenly felt sick ? 15. Be a good 
fellow and write your exercise. 16. You should go and 
take a walk when the weather is so fine. 17. It has 
just rained, but the weather has set in fine again. 18. Do 
not go ; *^ she is better. 19. They wasted the western 



134 EXERCISES. 

provinces by fire and sword. 20. Pray do not take it 
amiss if I do not go out with you ; I must not. 21. Shall 
you find it worth while to stand in line for an hour and 
a half ? 22. During the sermon you could have heard 
a pin drop. 23. Say what you will^ but you know that 
your hands are not fettered. 24. I had no money about 
me, consequently there was no book to be had. 25. We 
are very far from being ready to start. 

99. 

(Section 20.) 

1. Si c'est pour rire que vous Favez fait, je vous par- 
donne, mais que je ne vous y reprenne plus. 2. Tout ce 
que je desire maintenant, c'est qu'il me fasse parvenir ce 
paquet au moins une heure avant mon depart. 3. Je 
m'etonne que ses parents le laissent s'etablir; il va 
manger toute sa fortune, il ne voit pas plus loin que son 
nez. 4. Si vous persistez encore quelques semaines 
dans vos bonnes resolutions, vous recueillerez les fruits 
de votre perseverance. 5. Comment ! c'est a ce pauvre 
garcon que vous en voulez, mais il se mettrait au feu 
pour vous ! 6. II faut pourtant que cela finisse; je vais 
aller trouver votre frere et le mettre au pied du mur. 
7. Si vous lui laissez prendre tant de libertes, bientot il 
vous manger a la laine sur le dos. 8. Le pauvre gargon 
est malheureux, mais il fait contre fortune bon coeur. 
9. Ce qu'il y a de bon avec vous autres Anglais, c'est 
qu'on a toujours son franc parler. 10. II gele a pierre 
fendre depuis hier matin; je suis sur que la riviere est 
deja prise. 11. A Pavenir vous aurez soin de le payer 
rubis sur Pongle; n'oubliez pas que les bons comptes 
font les bons amis. 



EXERCISES. 135 

100. 

1. He fired at liim at once. 2. Yes^ but the other 
held firm. 3. At first he expected to frighten hira. 
4. I thought he was doing it for fun. 5. AYill you not 
make friends with us before leaving ? 6. If it is foggy 
in the morning, we shall not go. 7. We are extremely 
fond of music. 8. His laugh is forced. 9. I know you 
are doing it for fun, but you are frightening her to death. 
10. It is for fun they did it. 11. That hat does noj: fit 
you at all. 12. I liked that preacher from the very 
first ; he is so free from affectation. 13. ISTever ridicule 
old age or infirmity. 14. He was passionately fond of 
his children. 15. For all that he often frightened them, 
and would '^ never make friends with his daughter who 
had left his house. 16. Will you hold that ladder firm 
till I come down ? 17. Here is the small sum I owed 
you, now we are quits and friends. 18. Allow me to say 
this is not done like a friend, and that I am astonished 
at your conduct. 19. I heard my father say, that the 
reading of that book was forbidden by the Church. 
20. He succeeds in everything because he always takes 
time by the forelock. 21. The library, the kitchen, and 
the dining-room are all on the same floor ; I wish it 
could be otherwise. 22. T shall never forget as long as 
I live how he fretted alid fumed when he heard that his 
brother was trying to pass himself off for a marquis. 
23. It will be better to say nothing about that. 24. The 
poor woman missed her footing and fell the whole length 
of the stairs. 25. I hope that in future you will try to 
forget and forgive. 26. The tailor has just sent his 
new coat, and it fits like a glove, but it does not follow 
that he will be suited. 



136 EXERCISES. 

101. 

(Section 21.) 

1. Cette robe que vous trouvez si chere, je vous la 
ferai avoir presque pour rien. 2. EUe s'en est fort bien 
tiree : qu'en pensez-vous ? 3. C'est un liomme qui sait 
vivre, on voit qu'il a frequente le meilleur monde. 4. Le 
moyen de se defaire d\in ennemi est d^en faire un ami. 
6. II faudra que je me fasse faire deux ou trois paires 
de chaussures avant de me mettre en voyage. 6. Eh 
bien^ M. votre pere vous a bien gronde, n'est-ce pas ? 
voila ce que c'est que d'etre paresseux. 7. J'ai envie 
de partir avec ce monsieur pour Paris ; il me promet 
monts et merveilles. 8. Oui, attendez-vous-y! 9. Que 
desirez-vous, demandait Alexandre a Diogene ? que vous 
vous otiez de devant mon soleil, repondit le philosophe. 
10. Cette litterature me semblait d'abord triste, froide 
et monotone, mais maintenant j'y prends gout. 11. Voici 
deja trois heures qui sonnent ; je vais etre en retard 
pour mon rendez-vous; adieu, je me sauve. 



102. 

1. He is quite a gentleman. 2. I shall get that place 
for you if we are not too late. 3. You will not gain 
your point at the very first. 4. Your brother set out 
last night for England, did he not ? I hope he will gain 
his object. 5. I got home rather late, and found the 
door shut. 6. We get on slowly. He will never 
make his way in the world. 7. Yes, I am beginning 
to get rich. 8. If you can get me that situation, 
I will give you five hundred francs. 9. Get rid of that 
dog ; he does nothing but bark the whole night. 10. Let 



EXERCISES. 137 

as go away ; it is getting late. 11. Of whom are you 
making game ? 12. His coat got torn in the wood. 
13. That novel gets more and more interesting. 14. Do 
yon know your friend has got on very well ? 15. Get 
on ; if you always stop, we shall never arrive. 16. Your 
head is so large that you should order a hat for yourself. 
17. Get a third class ticket for me, and get into the 
train quickly, it will'^ leave immediately. 18. She is 
getting melancholy. 19. The goods got damaged by 
fire. 20. She gained her point by using the greatest 
prudence. 21. I am happy to hear you got clear of 
that difficulty. 22. Do take pity on that wretched dog 
and give him something to eat. 23. Something good 
must have happened, for you are as gay as a lark to-day. 
24. It has been so cold here that the river is frozen 
over. 25. We can almost see that plant grow from one 
day to another. 

103. 

(Section 22.) 

1. Otez-vous de la, s'il vous plait; c'est ma place. 
2. Un Spartiate etait puni s'il se livrait aux plaisirs de 
la table. 3. Vous ne asuriez croire a combien de sup- 
positions, d'inventions, de calomnies et de mensonges ce 
brusque depart a donne lieu. 4. Est-ce que vous croyez 
que je me tiens pour battu parce que vous me refusez 
votre appui ? 5. Quand on a de Pesprit, on se tire 
d'affaire. 6. S'il continue a m'impatienter de la sorte, 
je lui donnerai du fil a retordre, qu'il y compte ! 7. II 
me semble que c'est s'arreter en beau chemin. 8. S'il 
ose jamais vous reprocher la lettre que vous lui avez 
ecrite, c'est moi qui lui dirai son fait. 9. Les amis que 



138 EXERCISES. 

vous vous etes faits dans la prosperite ne vous serviront 
pas tons dans le malhenr. 10. II a vonln me dorer la 
pilnle, mais j'ai compris TafEaire dii premier conp. 11. II 
m'est impossible de deviner : je jette ma langne aux 
cliiens. 12. Le professeur nous a tons tances d'impor- 
tance, ancun de nous n'avait fini ses devoirs. 



104. 

1. My annt gives an evening party on Tlinrsday. 
2. Did yon give him occasion to find fault with your 
conduct ? 3. How stout you are getting ! 4. On her 
return, her mamma gave her a long lecture. 5. Get out 
of the way immediately. 6. He promised to give us an 
account of all that has passed. 7. Will you give us an 
account of your adventures in California? 8. I must 
give in my account once a^ month. 9. It is easier to 
get into a scra^oe than to get out of it. 10. Do you give 
credit to all he tells you ? 11. Do not give him occasion 
to give you a lecture. 12. His going away ^' will give 
rise to evil reports. 13. Since his death she has given 
herself up to despair. 14. I shall give an evening party 
on my birthday. 15. The affair is getting more confused 
every day ; you had better give it up. 16. His farmers 
used to give in their accounts twice a year. - 17. Every 
night I gave her an account of what I had heard. 18. On 
receipt of the money, he will give himself up to every 
kind of extravagance. 19. If you give up such a promis- 
ing affair, what will people think of you ? 20. By so 
doing you gave her the advantage over you. 21. Your 
father is most generous, he gives largely to all the needy. 
22. We start on our journey the 16th of August, and we 
return sometime in the winter. 23. You would hardly 



EXERCISES. 139 

believe the pleasure it gave me to see them all so well 
and prosperous. 24. I was very near falling into the 
river. 25. People who are always finding fault with 
everything are very tiresome. 

105. 

(Section 23.) 

1. Ne vous fiez pas tant a ses belles manieres ; elle 
s,'est oubliee, I'autre jour, jusqu'a me reprocher les cinq 
livres que j'ai voulu lui emprunter et qu'elle ne m'a pas 
pretees. 2. Xe viendrez-vous pas au-devant de moi 
quand j'irai vous voir ? 3. Elle avait deux milles a 
faire a pied tous les soirs et tous les matins. 4. Quand 
il se laisse aller a la colere, il ne se possede plus, il est 
comme enrage. 5. Xous etions vingt-cinq ou trente, et 
nous avons tous bu dans le meme verre. 6. Voyez 
comme les petites filles sont naturellement coquettes ; 
voila la troisieme f ois que cette enfant va se mirer depuis 
un quart d'heure. 7. Louis et Gustave sont comme les 
deux doigts de la main ; il n'y a rien de tel qu'un mal- 
heur commun pour vous rendre amis intimes. 8. Com- 
ment a-t-il ose se presenter chez son pere, dites-vous ? 
parce qu'il salt que son pere ne pent se passer de lui. 
9. Yous avez beau vous moquer de moi, j'ai dit que 
. je lirais toute ^^'THist^ire de TEurope," et je ne m'en 
dedirai pas. 10. Je vols, mon cher Monsieur, que vous 
vous abandonnez facilement a vos passions; cela vous 
menera loin. 11. Devinez qui s'est approche de moi 
dans le pare avec I'intention evidente de me parler ; je 
vous le donne en cent. 12. Vous pouvez vous her a ses 
promesses, c'est de Tor en barre. 13. Yous allez au 
devant de mon amie, c'est tres aimable de votre part. 



140 EXERCISES. 



106. 



1. I was going on sure grounds when I said that. 
2. Never give way to your passions. 3. She went a 
mile of the way with me. 4. The}^ gave no credit to 
his assertions. 5. Go to your cousin and invite her to 
come here. 6. Don't ask him anything^ he is not worth 
a groat. 7. I was glad to hear of your safe arrival at 
Rotterdam. 8. While I was going up stairs I heard 
a knock at the door. 9. They go along without stopping 
anywhere. 10. I used to go for my cousin every day. 
11. Do you go so far as to say that to me, sir ? 12. I 
should go to my uncle's to-morrow if I were asked. 
13. I shall go the whole ten miles with you. 14. We 
were falling short of provisions, when 8000 men came 
to the rescue of the town. 15. Go down stairs and tell 
the cook I want her. 16. It would be of no ava,il; 
he would go on in the same way. 17. Since your 
brother played me that trick, I have owed him a grudge. 
18. Will you go to your mother with a message from ^ 
me ? 19. You might go for a chair for me. 20. That 
is just what he glories in. 21. I was always glad to 
hear that she was coming to see us. 22. I went to meet 
my brother at the station. 23. Here is that precious 
bonbon box which you had given up for lost ; some time 
you will learn not to grieve for trifles. 24. • He used to 
be a fine cabinet maker, but now he is growing old. 
25. It grieves me to tell you that she played truant. 

107. 

(Section 24.) 

1. II a perdu sa place, il fait pitie a present, il vit an 
jour le jour. 2. Je n'y suis pas encore, vous feriez 



EXERCISES. 141 

mieux de me le dire sans plus de delai. 3. Vous n'y 
etes pas, vous en etes a cent lieues. 4. Ce n'est pas a 
moi qu'il faut vous plaindre de votre mesaventure^ je 
n'y suis pour rien. 5. J'ai failli avoir le pied ecrase 
par une roue de voiture ; il ne s'en est j)^s fallu de 
I'epaisseur d'un clieveu. 6. Je crois qu'il est a Paris 
et que son oncle le mene un pen rondement. 7. II ne 
faut pas lui laisser prendre ce mauvais pli; corrigez-le 
a temps. 8. S'll venait avec moi, il m'ennuierait de ses 
sottes questions tout le long du chemin; je ne veux pas 
de lui. 9. C'est tres-facile jusqu'a present, mais, quand 
vous en viendrez aux verbes, vous m'en direz des nou- 
velles ; c'est la que je vous attends. 10. Si vous n'etes 
pour rien dans cette mallieureuse affaire, je me fais fort 
de vous faire avoir la place que vous sollicitez. 11. Sa 
liberte ne tient plus qu'a un fil ; si vous me donnez un 
coup de main, a nous deux nous obtiendrons sa grace 
avant un mois. 12. Voulez-vous bien vous taire avec 
toutes ces horribles histoires ? vous me faites dresser 
les cheveux sur la tete. 

108. 

1. I am in the habit of writing two hours daily. 2. If 
he happens to know that you came with me, he will be 
very angry. 3. I was hardly able to believe what he 
said. 4. They had difficulty in believing him. 5. You 
have guessed rightly; you have it now. 6. The best 
thing we can do is ^^ to set out at once. 7. They had 
better tell the truth. 8. Beware of these two swindlers, 
they go hand in hand. 9. You would have done better 
to do without it. 10. I have it, I know how to manage 
him now. 11. How does it happen that you did not 
go to meet your mother ? 12. It hurts me to see you 



142 EXERCISES. 

suffer so. 13. The best thing these gentlemen can do 
is to be quiet. 14. The tears were in her eyes when she 
shook hands with me. 15. I will have no hand in it, 
I assure you. 16. He has too much on his hands at 
present. 17. Eorgive me. I meant no harm. 18. You 
could hardly be ready in time. 19. I shall have my 
hair cut. 20. He has it ; he has found out the reason. 
21. Unless he has it on good authority, he will not be- 
lieve it. 22. What do think it will be best for me to 
do? 23. You ask if they are on friendly terms now; 
I should say so, they are hand in glove. 24. When he 
found how he had been imposed upon by that swindler, 
he tore his hair with rage. 25. Ko, you have not guessed 
right yet, you are very far from it. 

109. 

(Section 25.) 

1. II faut battre le fer quand il est chaud. 2. Quelle 
idee s'est-elle mise en tete de partir ainsi a Timproviste ! 
3. Courez apres lui, vous le rattraperez; il ne fait que 
de partir. 4. La fatale nouvelle nous est arrivee comme 
nous sortions de table. 5. Je lui en toucherai deux 
mots ce soir. 6. Vous avez mis le doigt dessus; c'est 
bien la la cause de son eloignement pour lui. 7. EUe 
me Ta fait entendre ce matin d\uie maniere a ne pas m'y 
tromper. 8. Aussitot qu'il a vu son pere, il a pris ses 
jambes a son cou. 9. II y a vraiment de quoi se facher 
quand on voit une pareille lettre ; Qa n'a ni queue ni 
tete. 10. Que voulez-vous qu'on y fasse ? s'il veut 
absolument partir, laissez-le faire. 11. Un peu de pa- 
tience, s'il vous plait; il me semble que vous y allez bien 
a la legere. 



EXERCISES. 143 



110. 



1. 1 think you have something to do with it. 2. With 
whom have you to do ? 3. He will have heard from 
them by this time. 4. Have you heard that the queen 
is coming ? 5. Should we not be too warm there ? 
6. If she takes it into her head to stay at home, we shall 
be very glad. 7. It would be very hot in this room if 
the windows were not open. 8. They had but just dined 
when she came in. 9. We should have heard the news 
by this time. 10. Had you not just called at their 
house? 11. I have but just arrived from Paris. 12. AYill 
you give me a hint what I ought to do ? 13. They can- 
not come with us, they have company to-night. 14. They 
have heard it said that he is a bankrupt. 15. We have 
never heard it said. 16. We should be too hungry if 
we waited till ten o'clock. 17. I had heard that said 
by his enemies. 18. He hurt my arm with his cane. 
19. And everybody spoke so highly of him ; I presume 
the family will try to hush up the affair. 20. I could 
not help saying: ^^ Heaven forbid that he should have 
designs on your position ! '' 21. There was a very full 
house at the concert last night. 22. I told her there 
was no hurry about finishing that dress, because it 
grieved me to see her look so ilL 23. Last Shrove Tues- 
day he disguised himself as a minstrel, and had great 
success. 24. How cah we help it, if he takes it into 
his head to go ? 26. Did you enjoy the country last 
summer ? 

111. 

(Section 26.) 

1. On vous a jete de la poudre aux yeux, et on vous a 
fait accroire tout ce qu'on a voulu. 2. Si vous tenez 



144 EXERCISES. 

absolument a kii reprocher son inconduite, prenez bien 
garde de I'offenser ; il a la tete pres du bonnet. 3. Je 
vous ferai bien avoir cette affaire^ si vous j tenez. 4. lis 
s'en sont joliment donne; ils n'ont fait qne jouer toute 
la journee ; c'etait a qui se ferait le plus de niches. 
5. Vous ne pouvez pas vous faire une idee du monde qui 
se pressait autour de ce charlatan, 6. Auriez-vous la 
bonte dialler a vos heures perdues prendre quelques 
renseignements sur ce jeune. homme ? 7. C'est une 
guerre a coup d'epingles qu'on vous fait depuis trois ans. 
8. Je vous accompagnerais bien volontiers a Paris^~ si 
vous ne me trouviez pas de trop. 9. Le monsieur dont 
vous parlez est fort a son aise. il vit de ses rentes. 
10. Vous oubliez que c'est a ma mere que vous etes 
redevable de la position que vous occupez. 11. Pour 
pen que vous insistiez avec politesse, vous le mettrez 
certainement dans vos interets. 



112. 

1. He is not inclined to go there^ yet if he stays a 
little while, that will please them. 2. I have no intention 
of injuring him. 3. Do you not intend to return that 
book ? 4. If they had rema^ined but a little longer, they 
would have seen the review. 6. If she were -not so hard 
of hearing as she is, they would not so easily impose on 
her. 6. Do you believe I shall remain inactive all day ? 
7. Do not fear to apply to him ; he will be indefatigable 
in his efforts for you. 8. They have foolishly incurred 
that reproach. 9. I will thank you to make some 
inquiries about her. 10. Let us inquire into that story. 
11. We will introduce you to him, if you wish. 12. Is 
it not he who attends to your interest ? Then I may 



EXERCISES. 145 

rely upon him. 13. You must not interrupt me so. 
14. She improves in her studies^ but not in her manners ; 
she is very impudent. 15. It has been hard to find him 
at home, he is in and out all day long. 16. If you feel 
like it, do come with us to that picnic. 17. Shall I 
intrude if I ask to accompany you on that walk ? 18. I 
have known him for a long time, he always works like 
that, without intermission. 19. Everything is topsy- 
turvy in this room, even the table cover is wrong side 
out. 20. She plays on the harp only when she feels 
like it. 21. You will have to play cards every evening, 
you might as well be resigned to it. 22. It is time indeed 
to begin, for I have a lot of things to do. 23. I live in 
the country and I enjoy it very much. 24. We had a 
lovely time at your uncle's house ; we were treated like 
princes. 25. He called me a good-for-nothing fellow. 

113. 

(Section 27.) 

1. Pardonnez-moi, Monsieur, je crois que vous ne vous 
connaissez guere en peinture. 2. Les domains avaient 
un excellent proverbe — '^ Que le savetier s'en tienne a 
sa savate ! " 3. Ayez bien soin de me faire dire le jour 
et Fheure de votre depart. 4. Vous pouvez y compter, 
mais, de votre cote, ne me faites pas attendre. 5. EUe 
n'est pas si sotte que de partir a votre insu. 6. Je le 
connais de longue main; il veut toujours en faire a sa 
tete, mais il s'en mordra les pouces. 7. Continiiez 
d'ecrire; pendant ce temps je leur conterai la petite 
histoire que j'ai gardee pour la bonne bouche. 8. Est-il 
bien vrai qu'il roule maintenant carrosse ? ce n'est pas 
pour rire que vous dites cela ? 9. Je le reconnais a sa 

L 



146 EXERCISES. 

voix ; c'est lui ; gardez votre sang-froid. 10. Seriez-vous 
assez bon pour lui dire cela de ma part ? 11. II a, 
dit-on, trois domestiques maintenant, et hier il avait a 
peine de quoi vivre. 12. lis ne se feront pas faute de 
profiter de la bonne occasion qui se presente. 

114. 

1. Would you be so kind as to ring the bell to let him 
know that she is coming. 2. Are 3^ou not joking in 
saying that you are going to take a journey into Spain? 
3. They know how to take a jest^ don't they? 4. Are 
you a judge of music ? 5. I know it thoroughly. 6. He 
says just as you (say). 7. Did you not tell me you 
knew that gentleman? I know him by sight only. 
8. l^hey have had the kindness to let me know their 
plans in time. 9. We shall keep them waiting till we 
are ready. 10. If your watch keeps time better than 
mine, will you tell me what o'clock it is ? 11. Did you 
do it without the knowledge of your father ? 12. She 
knows better than you think. 13. Be kind to the 
orphans. 14. They will begin their journey to-morrow 
morning. 15. Keep to that, and don't lose your wits. 
16. If any one understands the art of killing two birds 
with one stone, it is you. 17. Hurry up, and tell me 
all about it, you are killing me by inches with your 
hesitation. 18. John went back on his resolution in the 
most absurd way. 19. He spent the greater part of 
his money in no time at all, and for trifles. 20. We 
gave the poor animal the finishing stroke, there was 
nothing else to do. 21. We escaped under cover of the 
night. 22. I was out of all patience with the blustering 
of that fire-eater. 23. He's a tremendous eater, although 



EXERCISES. 147 

he's as thin as a rail. 24. Your maid is exceedingly 
neat in her dress. 25. Do not keep me waiting, please. 

115. 

(Section 28.) 

1. Jean, si Ton rit et si I'on fait du bruit, c'est a vous 
que je m'en prendrai. 2. J'ai pense tomber. 3. Est-ce 
la tout ce qu'il vous reste, 3 fr. 35 cent ? 4. iSTous avons 
tons failli perir dans le port. 5. Les deux freres sont 
jumeaux et se ressemblent comnie deux gouttes d'eau. 
6. Quant a elle, eile vivote comme elle pent ; elle a bien 
de la peine a joindre les deux bouts ensemble. 7. Mourir 
pour mourir, il vaut mieux mourir en combattant qu'en 
f uyant. 8. Yous y reconnaissez-vous maintenant ? voyez- 
vous ou vous etes ? Pas le moins du monde. 9. Passe 
pour cette fois, mais tachez qu'on ne vous y revoie plus. 
10. Je ne voudrais pas, pour tout au monde, preter a 
rire a ces deux filles ; elles sont trop malignes. 11. Yous 
riez jaune, M. I'usurier ; je parie dix contre un qu'on 
YOUS a paye en monnaie de singe. 12. Je vous conseille 
de garder une poire pour la soif et de n^y toucher qu^a 
la derniere extremite. 

116. 

1. It was broad daylight this morning at five o'clock. 
2. AYell, he will leave you in the lurch. 3. The room 
was about twelve yards in length by eight in breadth. 
4. I have only nine pounds left. 5. If you do not 
succeed, my dear sir, do not lay it to me. 6. He will 
leave it to you, so do just as you please. 7. I think she 
will lay the cloth in the parlor. 8. They were like to 
fall from the mast. 9. I shall only have six days left 



148 EXERCISES. 

to wait. 10. I was like to laugh in his face. 11. Let 
my papers alone ; you will put them in disorder. 12. It 
was not daylight when she let the dog out. 13. She 
laughed in the face of the people when they tried to 
throw the blame on her. 14. They have three horses left. 
15. Do not speak to him ; leave him alone. 16. They 
were like to die of sea-sickness. 17. He reproached 
me for having been laid up for a week. 18. Never 
mind ; don't pay attention to what he says. 19. He 
left no stone unturned to gain his ends. 20. You must 
acknowledge that he led a fast life. 21. Set that bird 
free^ please, even if Mary does not like it. 22. During 
his lifetime, he was only too inclined to resist his father. 
23. Don't you consider that servant faithful ? 24. We 
had almost lost our wits, our imaginations were haunted 
with all sorts of misgivings. 25. He was sincere when 
he took the opposite stand under the late government. 

117. 

(Section 29.) 

1. La paresse chemine si lentement que la pauvrete 
ne tarde pas a Tatteindre. 2. Que vous avez tarde a 
venir ! 3. Qu'il a Pair bete ! 4. Si vous pouvez, Mon- . 
sieur, me preter un pen d' argent, tant soit pen, je vous 
en serai reconnaissant toute ma vie. 5. Je vous reconnais 
bien la; toutes les fois que je vous vois, c'est la meme 
chanson. 6. Si le coeur vous en dit, nous irons passer 
le reste de la journee a Versailles. 7. Attendez un 
moment que ie jette ce mot a la poste, et je suis a vous. 
8. Au lieu de mettre mon argent sous clef, j'ai prie la 
maitresse de Thotel de vouloir bien me le garder. 9. II 
gagne sa vie selon toute apparence. 10. Je vous en 



EXERCISES. 149 

clemanderai an fur et a mesure que j'en aurai besoin. 

11. Vous me manquez de plus eu plus chaque jour. 

118. 

1. She looks sulky to-day. 2. Does your father look 
as well as usual ? 3. They all look sickly. 4. I long 
to see them all. 5. They are very long in coming. 
6. Your brother listens to reason, but you do not. 7. I 
should like to know who told you that, f or it is not likely 
that they can come so soon. 8. We once lived close by. 
9. You look as if you had a headache. 10. She looked 
very well when I saw her last. 11. He was longing to 
see his mother;, well she will not be long in coming. 

12. It is not likely that it will be fine weather to-morrow, 
it is so foggy to-day. 13. Will you listen to reason or 
not ? 14. He appears (to be a) rich (man). 15. How 
long will it be before you are ready ? 16. If you are 
long in going out, you will lose sight of her. 17. They 
look as if they were coming this way. 18. You must 
have missed your sister very much during that long 
absence. 19. This constant hubbub becomes unendurable 
in the long run. 20. I almost missed the ten twenty 
train to Boston. 21. Much good it would do you to try 
and put a stop to it. 22. Truth is sometimes disagree- 
able to hear. 23. I cannot tell you how much we missed 
you. 24. Most things have a comical side to them. 
25. I am so tired of that everlasting song. 

119. 

(Section 30.) 

1. Je crois que deux de vos fenetres donnent sur le 
pare ; vous devez avoir de la une fort belle vue. 2. Quelle 



150 EXERCISES. 

fete je me fais de vous avoir chez nous tout Tete ! 3. Je 
ne me fie pas beaucoup a cet Individ u, ne le perdez pas 
de vue. 4. Tout a cou]p il n'a plus, su que dire et est 
rest-e bouche beante. 5. Allez faire un tour, vous n'etes 
pas en veine. 6. Quelle fete nous nous faisions de la 
voir cet ete, et quel desappointement ! 7. Tons ces 
gens-la se sont depuis longtemps perdus de reputation, 
ne remettez plus les pieds chez eux. 8. II la croit sotte, 
et moi je lui trouve un air fort eveille. 9. Vous en etes 
pour votre argent, et moi pour ma place. 10. Que veut-il 
done dire avec cette lettre ? je n'y comprends plus rien ; 
je m'y perds. 11. Malgre mon guignon, je ne me tiens 
pas encore pour batta; allez toujours. 

120. 

1. She will look after the house and bring him good 
luck. 2. If your parasol has not yet been returned,^^ 
you may give it up for lost. 3. I shall look in on my 
way to the station. 4. Has he not ruined his reputation ? 
5. I knew that she was looking forward with pleasure 
to our visit. 6, Don't lose sight of him ; I am afraid 
he will rob you. 7. He who is lucky at cards is unlucky 
in marriage. 8. You lose your temper for nothing. 
9. Be kind enough to look after my dog when'^ I am 
away. 10. Are you not looking forward with pleasure 
to hearing soon from your father ? 11. I shall try to 
find a house which looks toward the hills. 12. When 
he meets me, he is at a loss what to say. 13. Don't look 
any more for it; it is evidently lost. 14. When one 
speaks to him, he loses his self-possession. 15. The loss 
I have sustained is not very considerable. 16. Now 
that his partner is dead, he is at a loss what to do. 



EXERCISES. 151 

17. He who looks for perfect happiness in this world, 
is mistaken. 18. Look to that, if you please. 19. He 
had warned us that he wanted to go to the war, and he 
did go in good earnest. 20. Your mother always sees 
everything in a favorable light. 21. Gently, gently, 
don't go so fast. 22. You had a narrow escape when 
that boat took lire. 23. He had promised never to 
gamble, but he has begun again worse than ever. 24. You 
should not have given her the slip when you were invited 
there to dinner. 2o. I did not do it purposely. 26. We 
are all looking forward to your visit with the greatest 
pleasure. 

121. 

(Section 31.) 

1. On ne pourra se servir de cet ouvrage sans une 
table des matieres exacte et methodique. 2. Faites-lui 
place pres de vous, et reconciliez-vous tout de suite. 
3. Si vous faites tant d^embarras, vous ne pourrez jamais 
tirer parti de vos talents. 4. Le chagrin Pa rendu vieux 
avant la vieillesse. • 5. N'allez pas faire un coup de tete 
a Paris ; soyez bien sage et ecrivez-nous. 6. On les a 
extermines les uns apres les autres ; ils y ont passe tons 
jusqu'au dernier. 7. J'enrage de penser que mon coquin 
de neveu a encore fait des siennes. 8. Vous voyez que 
maintenant je parle Italien; je Testropie bien un pen, 
mais cela va tout de meme. 9. C'est un homme 
comme on n'en voit guere ; il a fort habilement mene 
sa barque par une mer tres-difficile. 10. II faut que 
ces gens-la aient perdu la tete ; comment ont-ils pu 
avancer de I'argent a un homme qu'ils ne connaissaient 
ni d'Eve ni d'Adarn ? 11. Qu'ils s'arrangent ! c'est leur 
affaire ! 



152 EXERCISES. 

122. 

1. Make use of this towel to dry your face. 2. I have 
made up my mind to return home, and make up for my 
fault by obeying my father in future. 3. They make it 
their duty to listen to him always. 4. I cannot make 
out what she means. 5. Guess what I have in my hand. 
6. If you will not make use of this opportunity, the fault 
will be all your own. 7. If you will make room for me 
beside you, I will explain to you what I mean. 8. I 
am told you have again done a crazy thing. 9. You 
must buy her a watch to make up for the one you 
lost. 10. If she makes too much of him, she will spoil 
him. 11. I made her happy by saying that you were well. 
12. We shall make up our minds after having seen the 
goods. 13. My child, you must try to make the best 
of the education I have given you. 14. We shall manage 
so that he vdll know nothing of it. 15. As soon as he 
saw you, he made off. 16. He has made it up with 
his brother after a long separation. 17. What a fuss 
he is making ! 18. They would not make way for that 
carriage. 19. All men are likely to make mistakes. 
20. This man is very ill ; if he should be taken away, his 
family would be ruined. 21. He has virtues and learn- 
ing, but he is deficient in politeness. 22. Your pretty 
little manners will not fail to strike them. 23. He lacked 
money because work failed. 24. Three of my best books 
are missing. 25. I missed my footing and fell my whole 
length on the sidewalk. 

123. 

(Section 32.) 

1. J^ai bien envie de partir avec lui, mais, si je le 
propose, je suis presque certain d^essuyer un refus. 



EXERCISES. 153 

2. An milieu cle ce grand monde on yous allez vivre, 
faites bien attention a votre conduite^ car tout le monde 
aura les yeux sur vous. 3. Prenez garde de rien dire 
qui nuise a vos amis. 4. Est-ce bien la ce que vous 
avez voulu dire? 5. Je n'ai fait que dire un mot, et 
elle s'est mise a fondre en larmes. 6. Que ne lui dites- 
vous votre facon de penser? vous verrez qu'il vous en 
saura gre. 7. Nous nous etions dispute tres-vivement 
la veille, et le lendemain il est venu me serrer la main 
comme si de rien n'etait. 8. Cela n^etonne que vous ; 
vous mesurez tout le monde a votre aune. 9. Je parti- 
rais bien volontiers avec vous, si j 'avals Fesprit tran- 
quille sur cette petite somme que je dois payer demain. 
10. Qu'a cela ne tienne, j'aurai beaucoup de plaisir a vous 
avancer ce qu'il vous faudra pour faire face a vos engage- 
ments. 11. Qu'a-t-elle done pour etre si gale ? 

124. 

1. If he v/ere polite, lie would not have taken French 
leave. 2. What^^ ails you? 3. What is the matter 
in question? It is no business of yours, upon the 
whole. 4. As matters stand, I advise you as a friend 
not to meddle with it. 5. Mind you don't fall in going 
downstairs. 6. He changed his mind on that subject. 
7. What do you mea^i? I mean that you are wrong 
and that you do not know your own mind. 8. Pay no 
attention to his demand. 9. At any rate, speak your 
mind freely, but not before them ; they are deceitful. 
10. Have you a mind to go for a walk ? 11. It is all 
one to me. 12. I do not know what was the matter with 
him. 13. He had a great mind to call for them, and 
ask what they meant. 14. I merely took it into my 



154 EXERCISES. 

hand to look at it ; it is not worth talking about. 15. Is 
that what you meant ? 16. I have a mind to go to hear 
that sermon. 17. I met her in the street as I was com- 
ing here. 18. You make my mouth water. 19. This 
gentleman means better than you think. 20. You will 
bear in mind to tell him that we reckon upon him for 
that affair. 21. Elizabeth bore malice toward Mary for 
twenty years. 22. Within the memory of man there 
never was such a strike. 23. You can never dispossess 
me of the idea that she was deeply involved in that 
miserable affair. 24. He is as mad as a March hare; 
in the middle of the winter he goes about bareheaded. 
25. He was chopping wood with all his might. 

125. 

(Section 33.) 

1. Auriez-vous la bonte de me dire le quantieme du 
mois ? 2. Si nous sommes au 13^ c'est apres-demain que je 
vais toucher nion mois. 3. Oui, mais nous recevons un 
a-compte tons les mois. 4. II a pris cela pour de 1' argent 
comptant. 5. Tachez de tirer parti de Peducation que 
vous avez rcQue. 6. Si vous vous deiiez toujours de vos 
forces, vous n'arriverez jamais a rien. 7. Je pense bien 
qu^il voudra de Targent comptant, il ne pent pas faire 
credit. 8. Est-ce que vous prenez pour argent comptant 
toutes les nouvelles qu'il fait courir ? 9. II fallait voir 
ces deux femmes se disputer, c'etait impayable. 10. Ses 
prom esses ne me touchent pas plus que ses menaces : 
autant en emporte le vent. 11. Je crois que monsieur 
aime a rire, et qu'il veut, com me on dit vulgairement, 
nous faire voir des etoiles en plein midi. 12. C'est de 
rigueur, et il n'y a la aiicun mystere. 



EXERCISES. 155 



126. 



1. Formerly you paid everything ready money, but 
now you are always short of money. 2. It is too much 
to think that I shall do all your work. 3. Don't be 
afraid; they will not mistake you for him, and if you 
hope to deceive them, you are mistaken. 4. It is 
rather too much to say that I interfere in your affairs. 
5. I have just changed my mind ; it is too muddy to 
go out. 6. I have a mind to pay every one ready money. 

7. Have you received the money which you expected? 

8. Guess how much he was mistaken in his calcula- 
tion. 9. He never mistrusts what he says, nor does he 
think that you have made a mistake. 10. It grieved 
me to see that poor old man mourning for the death of 
his son. 11. During the whole ceremony I did nothing 
but dream about the news I had just received. 12. Can 
you tell me what day of the month it is ? 13. Do not 
mistake rudeness for frankness. 14. Ought he not to 
make the most of his talents ? 15. We should get it for 
much less. 16. Is it not too muddy to go there on foot ? 

17. Put aside the question of money ; no more of it. 

18. You say that you mistrust me, but I will pay you 
ready money. 19. Yes, by all means. 20. We will 
move into that old house next September. 21. The 
industry of man keeps pace with his wants. 22. La 
Fontaine has very truly said, ^^The reason of the 
strongest is always the best.'' 23. This child hardly 
stirs, while her sister is always on the move. 24. Do, 
please, tell me all about that affair, in your leisure 
moments. 25. He changes his residence too often ; a 
rolling stone gathers no moss. 26. People mistake me 
for my sister, yet she is fair, while I am dark. 



156 EXERCISES. 

127. 

(Section 34.) 

1. J'ai beau lui refuser de I'argent cliaqiie fois que 
je lui ecris; il ne laisse pas de m^en demander tous les 
deux ou trois mois. 2. Ce n'est pas sans peine, j'en suis 
stir/ qu'il se Yoit force d' avoir recours a vous. 3. II n'a 
pas meme le necessaire. 4. A d'autres ! ce n'est pas 
a moi qu'il en fera accroire. 5. Est-ce que ce n'est 
pas une folic d'en agir ainsi avec celui qui le no'urrit ? 
6. II est plus bete que mediant; quoiqu'il se soit mal 
comporte a votre egard, ne laissez pas de lui envoyer 
quel que argent. 7. II ne tient a rien que je ne lui en 
envoie moi-meme. 8. Qu'est-ce que cela vous fait, dix 
ou douze livres de plus ou de moins ? vous etes un vrai 
Cresus. 9. Ce n'est pas a moi qu'il faut vous en prendre 
si votre cousine bat la campagne. 10. A la bonne heure 
an moins ! voila une bonne lettre, cela coule de source. 
11. Je vols tres souvent votre ami Henri, puisque nous 
demeurons porte a porte. 12. Tous les matins il sort 
a huit heures, tire a quatre e|)ingles. 

128. 

1. I nearly fell. 2. If you have the necessaries of 
life, do not complain, for you do not absolutely need 
the luxuries, and one may do without them. 3. She is 
not nearly so pretty as her sister. 4. Do you need 
ready money ? 5. I wish you all good night. 6. Would 
it not be nonsense to take offence at his speech ? 7. Non- 
sense ! he was endeavoring to enliven you by his gayety. 
8. It was nothing to him; why should he have inter- 
fered with the business ? 9. I was nearly dying of cold 



EXERCISES. 167 

and hunger. 10. Was she not under the necessity of 
writing to you about it ? 11. We sat up all night 
playing at whist, and went to bed at half-past five. 
12. Although he does not like me, he nevertheless comes 
now and then to see me. 13. Don't vex yourself for 
such a trifling loss ; it is a mere nothing. 14. You do 
nothing but play and gossip in that corner. 15. Come 
to me in case of need. 16. Do you not know me ? 
We are next door neighbors. 17. You hit the nail 
on the head, when you said that she led him by the 
nose. 18. The front doors and windows were all nailed 
up. 19. He may be good-natured, but he's narrow- 
minded. 20. I like all fruit raw, that is, as it grows. 
21. Without seeming to, he noted down every word that 
was spoken. 22. Notice that the whole discussion 
amounted to nothing. 23. He is a nice child, not nearly 
so mischievous as you say. 24. You came in the nick 
of time, for I have just come in from a nice walk. 
25. There was such a hubbub in the street all night 
long, that I did not sleep a wink. 

129. 

(Section 35.) 

1. Vous n'avez que faire de vous plaindre; cela ne 
vous avancera guere. ^ 2. Xe prenez pas ce que je vous 
dis la en mauvaise part. 3. II ne demandait pas mieux 
que de venir avec nous, mais nous ne nous souciions 
guere de sa compagnie. 4. Quel homme singulier que 
M. votre cousin ! 5. Le voila qui se fait vieux mainte- 
nant. 6. J'espere que vous ne compter ez pas cela pour 
une visite ; vous n'avez fait qu'entrer et sortir. 7. Elle 
se plaint a tout bout de champ de la ^Dluie, du froid et 



158 EXERCISES. 

de la chaleur, comme si c'etait de ma faute. 8. J'ai 
beau lui faire observer que tout le monde en souffre 
comme elle; elle se croit persecutee et s'obstine a se 
regarder comme la plus malheureuse des femmes. 9. Je 
crois, mon cher ami, qu'on vous a monte la tete ; autre- 
ment vous n'attacheriez pas tant d'importance a ces 
bagatelles. 10. Soyez des notres ; le plus fort de I'affaire 
est fait ; nous reussirons d'emblee. 11. Est-ce que son 
air egare ne vous frappe pas? cela saute aux yeux de 
tout le monde. 12. Encore un coup je le repete, il ne 
tient qu'a lui de reussir ; il ne Taura jamais plus belle. 

130. 

1. It occurs to me that you have missed the best 
opportunity. 2. I shall have occasion to call for them 
in the afternoon. 3. I lent them an odd volume of 
Walter Scott ; I hope they will not take offence if I ask 
it back. 4. It is all over with us ; we are losing right 
and left, yet, in my opinion, we have no occasion to fear 
them. 5. Go away, you only annoy me. 6. We have 
no objection to joining you there. 7. You have the 
odds against you, but, if you triumph, what a glory for 
you ! 8. Will you give me the pleasure of dining with 
me on Friday week ? 9. I need a pair of boots ; will 
you oblige me by lending me money to buy them? 
10. If you require me, send for me. 11. He was an 
odd sort of a man, a man of ten thousand ; he deprived 
himself of the necessaries of life, to give all his income 
to the poor. 12. Do not give him occasion to laugh at 
you. 13. They had no occasion to go out without my 
permission. 14. It seems to me that somebody has 
over-excited you. 15. He was merelj^ speaking to her. 



EXERCISES. 159 

16. It was all over with. them. 17. Did you see two 
odd gloves on the table ? 18. Speak to her openly, 
you must know that she had only your happiness at 
heart. 19. Take courage, the most difficult part is over. 
20. We are not obliged to grant your request. 21. Say 
on, that is no reason for being afraid to speak ; you know 
that money is no object to me. 22. How often he has 
opposed your election ! 23. You will never have a better 
opportunity ; seize it. 24. She will make a great fuss 
when she finds the fire out and all her papers out of 
order. 25. Why don't you pay her back in her own coin ? 

131. 

(Section 36.) 

1. II n'y a pas moyen de plaisanter avec lui, il prend 
tout en mauvaise part. 2. Ce pauvre enfant etait en 
haillons ; il avait la tete et les pieds nus ; j'en avals 
vraiment pitie. 3. A la guerre comme a la guerre : en 
voyage il n^ f aut pas regarder de si pres. 4. II n'a pas 
eu Phonnetete de me faire part de son mariage. 5. II 
ne tient qu'a vous de m'en debarrasser pour tou jours ; 
dites un mot, et tout est fait. 6. C'est bien dommage 
que vous n'ayez pas affranchi votre lettre. 7. II y regarde 
de si pres qu'il vous en voudra longtemps. 8. Ce n'est 
que quand il m'a fait toucher la chose au doigt et a Poeil 
que je me suis rendu. 9. II semble que vous ayez pris 
a tache de Firriter : vous voici maintenant dans de beaux 
draps. 10. Vous aurez beau dire et beau faire, c'est a 
vous que Ton fera payer les pots casses. 11. Je la 
trouve passable ; il y a a prendre et a laisser. 12. Cette 
dame a les bras longs ; c'est a elle, non a moi, qu'il f aut 
vous adresser. 



160 EXERCISES. 



132. 



1. Pack np immediately ; the train will ''^ soon leave, 
2. Will slie take a part in the concert to-night ? 3. I 
am going to pay a visit to my aunt. 4. Take pity on 
her. 5. It is a pity that you are in such a hurry. 6. Be 
so good as to invite her also. 7. If you are not going 
to any party to-morrow, come and play a hand at whist 
with us. 8. We are a small party of friends, vvdll you 
not come with us ? 9. Beware of spoiling his books^ 
he is particular about them. 10. They would have 
taken a part in it, if they had been invited. 11. There 
will be no possibility of packing up our luggage in time. 
12. Will they be so polite as to call for us? 13. It 
would be a pity not to see such a famous man. 14. It 
is your turn to play. 15. It was not my place to 
speak first. 16. It will be in his power to come soon. 
17. He knows his rights, and is particular about 
them. 18. Was there no possibility of going to meet 
them ? 19. Was it not their place to yield to the orders 
of their superiors ? 20. Be sure to come ; we shall be 
only a small party of friends. 21. You have got your- 
self in a fine scrape, by refusing once more to yield 
to persuasion. 22. Having had full power to draw 
money, you ought to have paid your bills when due. 
23. Believe it or not, as you please, but it is the plain 
truth. 24. They keep a coach and pair, and yet they 
are said to be as poor as church mice. 

133. 

(Section 37 ) 

1. Ce n'est pas la peine de vous caclier, je vous ai bien 
vu ; ne f aites done pas Penf ant. 2. Vous voici en fort 



EXERCISES. 161 

belle passe ; vous allez vous reiiclre a Paris, et il ne 
tiendra qn'a vous cle faire fortune. 3. II fait le bon 
apotre, mais ne vous y fiez pas. 4. Si vous le mettez 
an fait du petit tour que nous lui preparons, nous ne 
nous amuserons plus guere. 5. Que d'affronts il lui faut 
essuyer pour se conserver en place ! 6. Commencez par 
mettre votre vanite de cote, et vous verrez que cela ne 
coutera pas si cher que vous le dites. 7. Veuillez sonner, 
je vous x^rie. 8. Je crois que vous faites la petite bouche. 
9. Aucun des faits qu'elle avait mis en donte ne s'est 
trouve vrai, apres examen. 10. C'est un livre apres 
lequel j'ai longtemps soupire ; je Facheterai conte que 
coute. 11. Quand je lui demande le paiement de mon 
petit compte, il me renvoie aux calendes grecques. 

134. 

1. Do not ask so many questions ; you annoy us. 2. He 
could not put up with her airs ; she pretended to be sick, 
and he pretended not to observe it. 3. You may ]3ut 
off your engagement, if you think proper. 4. If that 
report prove true, we are ruined. 5. Put him in mind 
of his promise to pay you. 6. To what purpose? he 
will never do it. 7. Do not pretend to be surprised at 
seeing them. 8. We should like to know what he will 
do with all the monejr he puts by. 9. That is nothing 
to the purpose. 10. You pretend to be rich, and you 
are not so. 11. The judge postponed his decision. 

12. They will, as usual, put the cart before the horse. 

13. I fear that story may prove too true. 14. You 
may tell him so, but it will be nothing to the purpose. 
15. You must not question what he says. 16. I asked 
if they would put aside a few books for us. 17, They 



162 EXERCISES. 

said yes, if I would put them in mind of it. 18. We 
will put lier up to your little tricks. 19. If you are 
willing to put up with his extravagance, it is all one to 
me. 20. Can^t you prevail on him to prevent that mar- 
riage. 21. Put on your hat ; it is too cold to stand bare- 
headed by the open window. 22. We have a good many 
apples left yet- do not buy any w^hile they are so extrav- 
agantly dear. 23. Speak a few words to her concern- 
ing that affair; she is far from understanding it. 24. He 
is still in the prime of life and proof against fatigue. 
25. They did not fail to take advantage of the auction, 
to buy a good deal of furniture cheap 



135. 

(Section 38.) 

1. Par cette pluie je serais perce jusqu'aux os avant 
d'etre a moitie chemin. 2. Ne vous en remettez pas a 
un autre du soin de votre honneur: nul n'y est plus 
interesse que vous. 3. Votre observation n'a aucune 
espece de rapport avec ce qu'elle vient de dire. 4. Je 
me mettrais en route, lors meme qu'il pleuvrait des 
hallebardes. 5. Au train dont vous y allez, mon bon 
ami, vous n'en finirez jamais. 6. Eaison de plus pour 
que vous me donniez un coup de main. 7. Si vous avez 
jamais compte sur lui pour vous rendre le plus leger 
service, vous pouvez rayer cela de vos tablettes. 8. Aidez- 
moi done un pen, le titre de cet ouvrage ne me revient 
pas. 9. Comment ! vous voulez que je lui ecrive de but 
en blanc une lettre si impertinente ! vous allez un .pen 
vite en besogne. 10. Nous ecrirons cette lettre a tete 
reposee et nous attendrons jusqu'a demain ; la nuit porte 



EXERCISES. 1(33 

conseil. 11. Ce petit gamin se fait toujours tirer Poreille 
quand on lui commande quelque chose. 

136. 

1. I like rain better than sleet. 2. He lent his money 
at the rate of four per cent. 3. You will never reach 
that position. 4. Hear reason for once, I beg you, or 
we shall refer it to an arbitrator. 5. Do they not reflect 
credit on their teachers ? 6. He is rejoiced at their 
success. 7. That story relates to what you told us this 
morning. 8. They rejoice at coming back to Scotland. 
9. I think it is going to rain fast, but no matter; you 
will soon reach home. 10. If you are quick, you will see 
the queen pass. 11. They would rather lose their 
money than follow his counsel. 12. What cause have 
you to be dissatisfied with her ? 13. I have reason to 
be pleased with them. 14. We reached the steamer 
in a pouring rain. 15. Will not those children be quiet ? 

16. If you refer it to me, I will give you a flat refusal. 

17. Would you not rather have a situation in Paris than 
in London? 18. He was walking rapidly, not like a 
man just recovering from sickness. 19. I have every 
reason to believe that he consented very reluctantly. 

20. jSTone of us were resigned to that misadventure. 

21. When I am embarrassed, my voice fails me; I can- 
not help it. 22. We are far from being pleased at the 
turn of affairs. 23. It is interesting to see in what a 
masterly way he manages the whole court. 24. To the 
best of my recollection, it happened in the reign of 
William the Fourth. 25. Hasten home; we are going 
to have a terrible storm, and we shall be drenched 
through before we get half-way there. 



164 EXERCISES. 

137. 

(Section 39.) 

1. II est alle, comme un fou, donner de la tete centre 
son oncle qui entrait. 2. IST'est-ce pas de vous qu^il 
s'agit? 3. II ne faut pas toujours se fier a I'enseigne. 
4. Parfois on est trahi par ceux sur lesquels on comptait 
le plus. 5. II s'agit maintenant de savoir qui de vous 
a tort ; je parie bien que c'est Victor. 6. A quoi voulez- 
vous que je me decide? je ne sais vraiment de quel bois 
faire fleche. 7. 'Ne vous mettez pas en peine de votre 
frere ; il va son petit bonhomme de chemin. 8. Si vous 
ne vous reposez une heure ou deux apres le diner vous 
ne ferez rien qui vaille. 9. Vous avez tout le temps de 
faire un tour dans le jardin, la bonne est en train de 
faire votre chambre. 10. Les oreilles me tintent, on 
doit parler de moi quelque part. 11. Je me suis mis 
sur le pied de ne plus faire de visites. 

138. 

1. We will repair to-morrow to our lawyer's to inquire 
as to the best way to get rid of Mm. 2. Do not reproach 
him with laziness, he has done his utmost. - 3. The 
question is, to know if they have a right to share in our 
profits. 4. How did you run your head against that 
wall ? 5. I will not rely upon your assistance in future. 
6. We shall remember your services, and also remind 
the government of them. 7. It was reported that the 
Exchange had taken fire last night. 8. I resolved to 
stay here, but he resolved to repair to Naples. 9. You 
repeat continually the same thing. 10. One does not 
know on whom to rely. 11. We shall not roast those 
pheasants till he comes. 12. Glance over this book, 



EXERCISES. 165 

and tell me what you think of it. 13. He sold the goods 
at retail to get rid of them more quickly. 14. Remember 
me kindly to your grandmamma. 15. I have no relish 
for that sort of novels; they tire me. 16. The duke 
repaired to the plain, in order to review his troops. 
17. You must not be under restraint with me. 18. A 
report was then spread, if I remember rightly, that the 
king had resolved to dismiss his ministers. 19. They 
were just rising from dinner when I entered the room. 
20. Eemove the cloth as soon as we leave the dinner 
table. 21. What decision did they come to concerning 
your sister ? 22. Eemember that all of us deserve more 
pity than contempt. 23. I brought all his books, good 
and bad together, 24. When he once went so far as to 
sit at the whist table, it was hard to make him leave 
it. 25. It would not have taken half of that to make 
her happy. 

139. 

(Section 40.) 

1. C'est hier seulement qu'on me Pa fait dire, je ne 
pouvais gu^re venir plus tot. 2. Elle s'est contentee de 
me serrer la main et de me jeter un regard d' adieu. 
3. II etait tard quand ils ont mis a la voile. 4. On n'y 
voit goutte pour lire son journal; garcon, allumez le gaz. 
5. Envoyez-le done promener ; est-ce que vous allez 
sacrifier vos interets aux siens ? 6. Je ne savais pas 
qu'il eut la conscience si large : ni vous non plus, je 
parie? 7. Sortez sans faire semblant de rien, et allez 
faire un bout de toilette; vous n'etes vraiment pas pre- 
sentable. 8. Avant d'aller plus loin, voyons ou en sont 
les affaires. 9. Je crois etre sur la voie ; j'irai jusqu'au 
bout : je veux en avoir le coeur net. 10. Le pauvre 



166 EXERCISES. 

garcon s'est mis en quatre pour vous faire plaisir, et 
voici que yous le recompensez par une longue kyrielle 
de reproches; ce ii'est pas bien. 11. Elle venait tous 
les soirs faire sa partie de whist, et tous les soirs j'allais 
la reconduire chez elle. 

140. 

1. The fleet set sail on the 20th of July to demand 
satisfaction from the Chinese. 2. The admiral sent 
word to the commissioners that he should take satisfac- 
tion for the injuries done to our merchants. 3. They 
were forced to remain satisfied with that reply, but 
they were not convinced of the truth of that reason. 
4.' I can scarcely walk. 5. Send for the surgeon and 
let him see your foot. 6. Send word that I am here. 
7. Beware of that grocery he will not scruple to cheat 
you. 8. You will scarcely get out of that scrape with- 
out suffering great losses. 9. I was happy to hear that 
you had arrived safely. 10. Come with us, we shall 
have a sail till dinner time. 11. Sailors like to live by 
the sea-side. 12. You will see nothing at all there. 
13. If she had more experience, she would be second 
to none. 14. That telescope will show us the spots on 
the sun. 15. He will not be satisfied with such a small 
salary, and he will be quite right. 16. Go on, you are 
upon the scent. 17. Sit down at the piano and give us 
a sample of your skill. 18. Some one cried ^^Eire!" 
and you ought to have seen the stampede. 19. What 
a scrawl! seriously, I cannot decipher it. 20. I have 
studied this paragraph a good deal, but I cannot under- 
stand it. 21. That remark of his put me on the wrong 
track. 22. That conundrum is too much for me ; I give 
it up. 23. When I saw you laugh in your sleeve, I 



II 



EXERCISES. 167 

knew I had made a blunder. 24. The road is very 
sandy; you must walk the horse. 25. You must not 
take everything we say in such a literal way. 

141. 

(Section 41.) 

1. II fait I'entendu, et il ne sait ni A ni B. 2. Quand 
il lui faudra se mettre au travail a six heures^ elle trou- 
vera la chose un pen dure. 3. Gardez, je vous prie^ le 
silence sur ce detail ; elle ne voudrait plus partir. 4. lis 
ne reussiront jamais; voila deja deux fois que je les 
remets sur pied. 5. Veuillez faire silence dans ce coin 
vous etes toujours a bavarder. 6. Ceux qui disent ce 
qu'il faut taire, taisent ordinairement ce qu'il faut dire. 
7. Vous ne savez pas vous en servir, vous ne vous y 
prenez pas Men, ce n'est pas comme Qa. 8. Si vous 
gardez le silence la-dessus, je vous en saurai gre toute 
ma vie. 9. Vous n'avez qu'a lui rappeler les services 
que vous lui avez rendus ; c'est le prendre par son endroit 
sensible. 10. Qui n'entend qu'une cloche n'entend qu'un 
son. 11. II ne sait plus depuis quelque temps, ni ou 
se caser, ni a quel saint se vouer. 

142. 

1. That sofa will serve as a bed. 2. Don't be afraid ; 
she Avill not dare to show her face. 3. I hope you will 
be silent respecting his mistake. 4. You set yourself 
up for a learned person, but you are not. 5. They 
set up again the statue thrown down by the lightning. 
6. We shall be sheltered here from the rain. 7. They 
refused to do him (a) service. 8. Are you not afraid of 



168 EXERCISES. 

being sea-sick ? 9. ISTot at all, I am a very good sailor. 
10. Two days after sailing from Greenock, they were 
shipwrecked on the coast of Ireland. 11. We were 
silent, not knowing what to say. 12. If they ask you 
to sit down, don't do it. 13. I shall ask them to sit 
down till I am ready. 14. Are you really siding against 
us? 15. That parasol serves also as an umbrella. 
16. If he does not set about his lesson right off, it will 
soon be too late. 17. If you were in my shoes, you 
would not say that. 18. You don't know the way to 
set about it. 19. He never takes the right side, when 
it is possible to take the wrong. 20. If they should 
happen to know it, they would not be pleased. 21. My 
cold in my head makes me feverish; I am shivering 
with cold. 22. Go and shake hands with her, to set her 
at ease. 23. Thank you, I have never been fond of 
walking in other people's shoes. 24. I am sick and 
tired of being shut in the house ; it has rained hard for 
a whole week now. 25. Do you sing at sight ? 26. To- 
morrow I will go shopping, and I will make a great show 
of my skill. 

143. 

(Section 42.) 

1. Cette horloge retarde d'une demi-heure, depechons- 
nous de partir. 2. Ah qa! qui de nous va porter la 
parole ? 3. Mais il m'a avoue qu'il avait quelquefois 
la tete pres du bonnet: c'est toujours cela. 4. Si elle 
vent arriver avant qu'il tombe de la neige, elle n'a pas de 
temps a perdre. 5. II n'a pas d'ordre, c'est un panier 
perce; il depense tout ce qu'il gagne. 6. J'ai connu 
une vieille dame qui avait passe sa jeunesse aux Indes- 
Orientales, et qui croyait qu'elles faisaient partie d'une 



EXERCISES. 169 

autre planete. 7. Figurez-vous qu'elle m'avait promis 
de venir faire ma robe aujourd'hui et qu'elle m'a fait 
faux bond. 8. II fallait au contraire lui remonter le 
courage, il est si facilement abattu. 9. J'avais une dent 
contre lui. 10. Tirez le rideau la-dessus; je n'aime pas 
a entendre parler de querelles entre mes amis. 11. No 
vous inquietez pas, vous arriverez tant bien que mal; 
vous avez encore de la marge. 

144. 

1. See bow thin that poor animal is ; he is nothing 
but skin and bone. 2. To s^Deak plainly, you have no 
right to spend money. 3. You spend your time some- 
how or other, but quite uselessly. 4. If she falls into 
that snare, and spends her money extravagantly, her 
mother will be sorry for it. 5. Has he fallen into the 
snare laid for him? 6. They will not sit down to table 
before six o'clock. 7. Will you not be too sleepy to 
write that letter before going to bed ? 8. His watch is 
never too slow, and yet, somehow or other, he is alwa3^s 
late. 9. It is so cold that I rather think it will snow. 
10. I should be very sorry for it, as I mean to go to the 
country. 11. Sit closer, to make room for your new 
friend. 12. He always speaks for the rest. 13. I put 
your letter in the post in time for to-night's mail, so you 
may sleep soundly. 14. You said I was only pretending 
to be sleepy, but I slept like a top the whole night. 
15. He is far too stingy to sit for his picture, he is such 
a skinflint. 16. She la.ughed in her sleevC; I know, when 
I made that slip. 17. He's a queer sort of a man; most 
of the time he's out of a situation. 18. When he's all 
smiles and graces, beware, there is surely a snake in the 



170 EXERCISES. 

grass. 19. Open all the windows ; the room is close. 
20. Spare me from hearing her remarks ; I am acquainted 
with her style. 21. Sleep over it, to-morrow we will 
discuss it again. 22. You bought that cheap; that is 
what I call an excellent bargain. 23. Set the table for 
ten people ; I will help you a little. 24. Whether you 
do it or not, it all comes to the same thing. 25. She 
was not taken unawares the least bit in the world. 

145. 

(Section 43.) 

1. II y a un defaut dans ce tableau, Qa saute aux yeux. 
2. Ne badinez jamais avec Thonneur des autres. 3. Tenez- 
Yous-en la au moins, et ne changez pas d^idee a toute 
heure du jour; vous etes une yraie girouette. 4. Mon 
cher ami, voila quinze jours que nous ne yous avons yu, 
Yous dcYcnez rare comme les beaux jours. 5. II s'est 
eYcille en sursaut et criant a tue-tete : " Au secours ! au 
meurtre ! on m'assassine ! ^' 6. II faut en linir avec 
toutes ces querelles. 7. N'est-ce pas Yingt kilometres 
qu'il a fait ce matin tout d'une haleine ? 8. II ne fait 
que badiner; il n'est pas homme a yous tenir tete. 
9. Je me soucie de Yotre mauYaise humeur comme de 
Pan quarante. 10. Quand yous yous y mettez, yous n'y 
allez pas de main morte. 11. II ne faut pas aller par 
quatre chemins, dites-lui franchement Yotre facon de 
penser. 

146. 

1. Two friends of old standing do not stand on such 
ceremonies. 2. In his eyes, a laugh stands for an argu- 
ment. 3. The resemblance between you and your sister 



EXERCISES. 171 

is very striking. 4. Make her come upstairs secretly. 
5. He stood by thein till the last hour. 6. Would you 
make a stranger of him who rendered you so many 

services ? 7. How can I cope with Mr. M ? he is 

much stronger than I, and he will leave no stone un- 
turned to succeed. 8. It is more than a month since 
we have seen him; he is becoming a great stranger. 

9. I wish he would hold to his first engagements. 

10. Eespect my old friend ; after me, he will be a father 
to you. 11. Ask the lady upstairs. 12. Is not your 
reputation at stake in this affair ? 13. The authorities 
came immediately to the spot. 14. He bantered me 
about my opinions, but I stood out against him. 15. I 
am afraid you forgot to put a stamp on your letter. 
16. Although I was born in a southern climate, I cannot 
stand heat. 17. You should stand by what you said. 
18. If you feel like it, will you walk three miles with 
me ? 19. They told old women's stories the whole 
evening. 20. He started out of his sleep at their 
arrival. 21. Do you intend to make a long stay in 
Scotland ? 22. Are you expecting a registered letter ? 
23. I cannot stand this any longer, I must go and see 
for myself how she is. 24. The robbers went upstairs 
by the private staircase, that is evident. 

< 147. 

(Section 44.) 

1. Si je ne m'y prends pas autrement, je n'en viendrai 
jamais a bout. 2. L'accident est arrive comme elle se 
mettait a table. 3. Xe manquez pas de me rappeler a 
son bon souvenir, dites-lui que je ne fais que penser a 
elle. 4. Je parie qu'il prendra tout cela pour de Pargent 



172 EXERCISES. 

comptant. 5. On appelle science du monde le grand 
art de reussir et de plaire. 6. Ces manieres d'agir ne 
me conviennent pas le moins du monde. 7. Que de 
mauvais sang vous m'avez fait faire quand nous etions 
a la campagne! quelle mauvaise tete vous aviez! 8. II 
a jure ses grands dieux que ce qu'il venait de dire etait 
la pure verite. 9. Monsieur, vous le prenez bien haut ; 
a qui croyez-vous avoir affaire ? 10. Nous allons faire 
un petit voyage au bord de la mer: cela vous va-t-il? 
etes-vous des notres ? 11. Cela me va, j'en suis. 12. II 
y a dix a parier qu'il vous donnera cinq ou six ans de 
moins que vous n^avez. 

148. 

1. Do not take it ill, if I scold you when you talk 
nonsense. 2. George the Fourth succeeded his father. 
3. If you are required to write all these letters, you have 
a heavy task before you. 4. She said she would be sure 
to come to see me in London. 6. If you succeed in 
convincing him, be sure to let me know. 6. I will be 
sure not to say one word about it to her. 7. Sit down 
to table immediately, and don't wait for him. 8. To 
be sure, we shall see you with much pleasure. 9. That 
trial will be the talk 'of the whole country. 10. She 
takes an airing every morning before breakfast ; she likes 
getting lip early. 11. Good-by, we will' talk it over 
again some day. 12. He will take her with him to 
Italy ; I am quite sure of it. 13. Don't trouble yourself 
about that ; I'll take it upon myself. 14. Sure enough, 
I turned the tables on her by taking literally what she 
had just said. 15. Take this letter to the post-office, 
after which you will take Amy to school. 16. His book 
did not succeed, while his brother's met with a great 



EXERCISES. 173 

success. 17. If you take the first prize, I will take you 
to the opera. 18. Suffice it to say that, with them, it 
was a deliberate system. 19. I would not take him to 
be more than eighteen, although he's a head taller than 
his father. 20. Are you very sure that she is trying to 
supplant you ? 21. The park swarmed with people, all 
dressed up in their Sunday clothes. 22. The rich earth 
gave everything in plenty, when the world was in its 
infancy. 23. California abounds in all sorts of fruits 
and flowers. 24. Do learn how to take a joke and keep 
your temper with your brother. 25. She told me, with 
tears in her eyes, that she knew her father to be the 
talk of the town. 

149. 

(Section 45.) 

1. Pour le coup c'est trop fort, maintenant on ne pent 
plus dire sa facon de penser. 2. Un de ces jours vous 
vous en mordrez les doigts. 3. A la longue^ on se fait 
a tout. 4. Du train dont Qa va, ma bourse sera bientot 
plus legere. 5. II arrangera I'affaire pour vous ; c'est 
ce que vous avez de mieux a faire. 6. II n'y a rien de 
plus insupportable que ce monsieur, il se jette a la tete 
de tout le monde. 7. Veuillez done passer chez elle ce 
soir, ne fut-ce qu'un^ moment. 8. Ce n'est pas grace a 
elle que vous avez rcQu cette lettre ; elle a fait tout son 
possible pour empecher qu'on ne vous ecrive. 9. Votre 
plus court parti est d'aller vous-meme a Paris; partez. 
ce soir. 10. Puisqu'il s'entete, je ne lui laisserai pas 
cet ouvrage, dusse-je y perdre cent francs ! 11. De fil 
en aiguille, il en est venu a parler de Pepreuve que vous 
venez de subir. 



174 EXERCISES. 



150. 



1. He treats me always with great kindness. 2. Tell 
him to be sure to come in good time, because she is 
generally late. 3. Distrust those who have a smooth 
tongue. 4. He declared that it was no such thing. 
5. Speak out your thoughts without any reserve, sir, in 
the proper time and place. 6. Till then, adieu, and tell 
her that some time or other I shall answer his letter. 
7. Do you think it proper to go out alone so late at 
night ? 8. They said that was just the thing for them. 
9. We were so thirsty that we drank glass after glass of 
lemonade. 10. If you gave him notice in time, he would 
come to the wedding. 11. You will repent some time 
or other. 12. I should speak out my thoughts were I 
in your place. 13. I should think so. 14. A thought 
strikes me, — why not buy our return tickets at the same 
time. 15. In less than no time, those children had set 
my room topsy-turvy. 16. I beg of you to be indulgent, 
as this is my first attempt. 17. As matters stand, I 
must speak, even if I should lose my position for it. 
18. It's a little too much ; he expects us to translate such 
a book as that at sight. 19. His joking borders on 
impudence. 20. The train being late, I reached home 
too late ; it was all over with her. 21. The best thing 
I can do, is to send away all those broken chairs. 
22. The savages fought our army as well as they could ; 
they fought to the death. 23. He has no one to thank 
but himself for his lack of success. 24. In these 
days of reviews and examinations, time does not hang 
heavy on my hands. 25. You will regret it in the long 
run. 26. She told us that long story, in all its details, 
the last time we met her. 



EXERCISES. 175 

151. 

(Section 46.) 

1. Vous n'etes pas, je Pespere, sans les moyens de 
repondre a cette attaque que vous avez si longtemps 
provoquee. 2. Maintenant, Mademoiselle, c'est a vous a 
parler, ne vous effrayez pas, vous y serez bientot faite. 

3. J'ai beau faire tout mon possible ; les expressions 
m'echappent, mes idees s^embrouillent, et je reste a court. 

4. Vous en avez agi fort mal avec moi, avouez-le. Vous 
vous entendiez a me faire enrager. 6. En toute chose 
fais ce que tu dois, et, quelle que soit P opinion du vul- 
gaire, ne t'en inquiete pas. 6. Usez, n'abusez pas, dit 
le proverbe. 7. II est inconvenant de rire ainsi au nez 
des gens. 8. Je vous rembourserai Men entendu les 
sommes que vous allez verser pour moi. 9. Tout a ete 
fini en moins de rien, 10. II crie misere a tout bout de 
champ. 

152. 

1. Do not trouble yourself about him. 2. Would you 
take the trouble to write that to him ? 3. If there is 
any unfairness, you will bring yourself into trouble. 
4. She wishes to become a governess. 5. I used to be 
very uneasy about him when he was away. 6. She 
was quite unprovided with the materials necessary for 
her work. 7. They understand how to manage him. 
8. Will you undertake to let him know what has hap- 
pened ? 9. She used to be always in trouble about 
something. 10. If I promise to use you well, will you 
come ? 11. Tired of the world, Charles V. turned monk. 
12. I will turn him out of doors, if he refuses to obey 
my orders. 13. We shall be very uneasy about that 



176 EXERCISES. 

affair till it is settled. 14. Use this quill pen; it is 
better than that one. 15. Do you understand how to 
do that ? 16. If I can get nothing else to do, I will 
turn soldier. 17. Were I you, I would not trouble my- 
self about it. 18. It was a sight to make the bravest 
turn pale. 19. I would not trust her to pack my trunk, 
if I were you. 20. She was taken unawares and said 
whatever came uppermost in her mind. 21. My youngest 
sister and brother both played truant, in turn. 22. He 
considered the question in another light. 23. He related 
the whole affair to me, in every particular. 24. They 
spoke in such ambiguous terms, that, although I tried 
hard, I could not understand what they meant. 25. He 
used my bicycle without my knowledge, and now it is 
not fit to use. 

153. 

(Section 47.) 

1. Vous avez beau faire, vous n'en viendrez pas a bout. 

2. Est-ce la le cas que vous faites de mes presents? 

3. C'est un garqon qui se fait trop valoir. 4. lis sont 
partis tons les quatre en meme temps et out couru a qui 
mieux mieux. 5. II avait bean se demander pourquoi 
elle s'en etait allee, il ne pouvait en deviner la raison. 
6. J'ai beau frotter, Qa ne veut pas s'en aller. 7. Des 
gros mots ils en sont bientot venus aux voies de fait. 

8. A quoi bon vous ingenier a vous rendre malheureuse. 

9. Quand vous verrez la chose de plus pres, vous serez 
de mon avis. 10. Je sais parfaitement qu'il ne regarde 
pas a Targent et qu'il depense tout ce qu'on lui donne. 
11. Est-ce que, par hasard, vous voulez jouer au plus fin 
avec raoi, mon petit ami ? 



EXERCISES. 177 

154. 

1. Do you vouch, for the truth of what you say now ? 

2. It is in vain for me to ask her; she will not go. 

3. I set great value on that ring ; it was a gift from my 
mother. 4. They walked from Edinburgh, to Glasgow 
in two days. 5. I will venture to say they did nothing 
of the kind. 6. Let us wait upon your master as soon 
as he comes to town. 7. G-o to his office and wait for 
an answer. 8. That is just what he used to do when he 
was with me. 9. It is of no use to try to dissuade him,^ 
he is so obstinate. 10. Was that the fine picture you 
value so much ? 11. I am always best waited on in my 
own house. 12. Will you not walk with me half-way ? 
13. Take a walk with me ; you will enjoy it, the weather 
is so fine. 14. He kept me waiting three hours. 15. I 
always walk to church, I never drive. 16. I can assure 
you he values your services highly. 17. Wait for the 
carriage, and we shall all take a drive. 18. Never lay 
a wager with that man ; he will cheat you. 19. It would 
be in vain for me to attempt to gain a prize, I am too 
stupid. 20. Would it be of no use for you to try ? 
21. He is utterly ruined b}^ the failure of the bank, is 
he not ? 22. I should like to know what this old gun 
can be good for. 23. She is very underhand, and 
behaved in the most ungrateful manner to those who 
had helped her. 24 All his promises are mere talk; no 
heed must be given to what he says. 25. They vied 
with each other in their studies all through their college 
course. 



* Do not use avoir beau in this sentence, as a clause containing avoir 
beau must always be followed by another, explaining or completing 
the first. 



178 EXERCISES. 

155. 

(Section 48.) 

1. II manque trois feuillets a mon livre; comment 
vais-je me tirer d'affaire ? 2. Cette ombrelle ne vous 
servira de rien ; dans cinq minutes elle sera en morceaux 
et vous serez trempe jusqu'aux os. 3. Combien de kilo- 
metres Yous reste-t-il a f aire ? 4. II ne manque a ce 
pay sage qu'une coUine et un ruisseau. 5. Moi ? je veux 
le voir et lai parler. 6. Je viens de faire liuit milles a 
pied expres pour le voir, mais qui ne risque rien n'a 
rien. 7. La seule pensee que je pouvais d'un mot 
detourner ce malheur, me met le desespoir dans Tame. 

8. A premiere vue il n'a pas Pair de manquer d'intelli- 
gence, mais vous verrez qu'il est facile a desorienter. 

9. Le pauvre garqon est malade depuis pres de trois ans; 
il ne tient plus ; il n^a qu'un souffle de vie. 10. Quelle 
mouche vous pique, ils n'y a pas de milieu vous dis-je, 
il faudra que vous en passiez par ou je veux. 11. Nous 
en sommes revenus il y a aujourd'hui liuit jours, et nous 
y retournerons d'aujourd'hui en huit. 12. En somme, 
ce voyage m'a passablement plu. 

156. 

1. That young man is deficient in politeness ; he is a 
perfect boor. 2. I wonder what he could possibly want 
with me. 3. You complain incessantly of the heat; 
you are always warm, even in the coldest weather. 
4. Please speak to her yourself, I know your opinion 
goes a great way with her. 5. It is well for you that 
your father is wealthy. 6. She had all her own way, 
and yet she was never pleased. 7. George asked me 



EXERCISES. 179 

what I wanted with such a large sum of money. 8. She 
is so wasted away that she cannot walk even to church 
without being tired. 9. Were I to put on my greatcoat, 
I should be too warm. 10. I need not tell you that you 
are welcome to all my books. 11. Shall I not be in 
your way if I come to-night when Henry is there ? 
12. Ko ; we shall want you to play at whist. 13. I will 
explain their position to you ; this large stone is the 
fort, as it were, and these are the enemy's troops. 
14. For want of money, I had to refuse her what she 
really was in want of. 15. On my Avay back, about 
half-way, I met Mary, and I was forcibly reminded of 
the proverb, '^ Smooth waters run deep.'' 16. You ought 
to know that, in this cold weather, a muslin dress is not 
the thing to wear. 17. On the whole, she did it the 
right way ; what ails you that you find fault with it ? 
18. Instead of wasting your time, you'd better watch 
those workmen. 19. We have lost our way ; will you 
please put us in the right path ? 20. It is not worth 
while to weep so bitterly for such a trifle. 21. We are 
glad to see you; draw near the fire and dry yourself, 
you're wet through. 22. It is as well for you that you 
did not accept his invitation. 23. I'll tell you what, 
there is no other way, and we might as well submit 
cheerfully. 24. The imperturbable coolness with which 
you answered, staggered me. 2o. It will be of no use to 
send for him, he will not stir from his house to-day. 

157. 

(Section 49.) 

1. Le jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 2. Dieu sait 
s'il m'en veut ! 3. Je voudrais bien savoir de combien 



180 EXERCISES. 

il est riche, ce faquin-la ! 4. Vous decidez sans examen 
qu'il a eu tort de tenter cette entreprise; et je crois, moi, 
qu'il en retirera honneur et profit. 5. Quelque obstinee 
que vons soyez, Mademoiselle, il fandraj bon gre mal 
gve, que vous vous rendiez a Tevidence. 6. Vous dites 
que non, je dis que si. 7. Maintenant que vous avez 
tout ce que vous reclamiez, en etes-vous plus avancee ? 
8. Honnete ou non, il est certain qu'il a de Pesprit 
jusqu'au bout des doigts. 9. Ah ca mais ! est-ce que 
vous croyez que je vais travailler pour le roi de Prusse ? 
10. Allons, du courage ! il ne faut pas jeter ainsi le 
manche apres la cognee. 11. Je crois que ce petit bon- 
• homme n'a plus la tete a lui ; je n'ai pu lui arracher une 
parole de la journee. 12. II parle le francais a faire 
pitie ; il devrait etre defendu par la loi d'estropier ainsi 
une langue vivante. 13. II est pauvre comnie Job, il 
n'a pas le sou vaillant. 

158. 

1. There is nothing I should be more willing to do 
than that. 2. Jane wishes very much to see Eome. 

3. I wonder if she will ever have that desire fulfilled. 

4. Take care, he is not a man to mince his words. 5. He 
assured us that we would not be the worse for it, if we 
complied with his request. 6. That marquis is said to 
be worth three hundred and sixty -five thousand pounds 
per annum, and yet he gets out of his carriage on the 
other side of the bridge, in order to save the toll. 7. Our 
butler grew worse and worse every day ; he was never 
sober. 8. If you break your word to me once, I shall 
never trust you again ; I am not a man to allow myself 
to be twice deceived. 9. You will find, sir, that I am 
as good as my word. 10. I wonder why that pretty 



EXERCISES. 181 

girl married that tiresome old man ? 11. Your brother 
writes a very bad hand; he is wrong not to take lessons. 
12. Willing or unwilling^ she was compelled to listen 
to his sallies of wit. 13. I suppose that 1 shall have 
to read that book, but I know that I shan't be any the 
wiser for it. 14. He was at his wits' end when he found 
out that he had not a cent left. 15. Don't say another 
word; where there's a will, there's a way. 16. I took 
him at his word, because it was really a great windfall. 
17. If you are ^Nvise you'll wink at that; a woman must 
have her own way. 18. When you get mad without 
rhyme or reason, I always wish myself a hundred miles 
away. 19. Xo wonder she is so witty, she takes after 
her mother. 20. You are wrong to scorn what the 
world may say. 21. Yes, indeed, you have brought the 
wrong book, as usual. 22, They had a bonfire, and for 
a wonder, it was not worth much. 23. Eemember that 
'' a soft answer turneth away wrath " ; try it, and you 
will win her over. 24. Take my word for it, I will 
not mention it. 25. She was beside herself with joy 
when she heard that you were to be here at Christmas. 
26. We went to the ball, and enjoyed ourselves to our 
hearts' content. 



II. IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



The sections are arrang-ed, so far as possible, in alphabetic order. Phrases that 
are out of place alphabetically will be found at the ends of the sections. 



* = colloquial. 



X = antiquated. 



p. = person. 



th. = thing. 



not to knoio A from B, 

to be able, 

to be above (doing, etc.), 

to care about, to trouble one^s self 

about, 
to set about (th.), 
what is it about? what is the 

matter? 
to abuse (p.), to rail atf 

to abuse (th.), 

to launch out into abuse, 

to accomplish (th.) with easCy 

of my own accord, 

according to your account, or to 

you, 
not on any account, < 

on my account, 
to account for (a fact), 
to account for, to give an account, 
to call (p.) to account for, 

to give an account of one's conduct, 

to take into account, 

short accounts make long friends, 



*ne savoir ni A ni B. 

pouYoir ; etre en etat de. 

etre trop tier pour. 

se soucier de ; se mettre en peine 

de. 
se mettre a. 
de quoi s'agit-il ? de quoi est-il 

question ? 
injurier ; dire des injures a ; *dire 

des sottises a. 
abuser de. 

se repandre en iuA^ectives. 
avoir bon marche de. 
de mon propre mouvement. 
a vous entendre ; selon vous. 

pas pour rien au monde. 

par rapport a moi. 

expliquer. 

rendre compte de. 

faire rendre (or demander) compte 

a {p.) de {th.). 
rendre compte de sa conduite. 
tenir compte de ; faire la part de. ' 
les bons comptes font les bons 

amis. 



183 



184 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



hy all accounts^ 

to accustom one's self to, 

to be accustomed to, 

to apply to, 

to be firm., 

to happen (th.), 

to do one's best, 

to be wrong, 

not to yield an inch, 



au dire de tout le monde. 

se faire a ; s'accoutumer a. 

etre fait a. 

s'adresser a. 

tenir bon. 

se passer. 

faire de son mieux. 

avoir tort. 

*ne pas en demordre. 



to ache, 

to acTcnoioledge a letter, 

to acquaint (p.) loith, 

to get acquainted, 

to be among acquaintances, 

to act foolishly , 

to act like a man, 

to act, to impersonate, 

to act contrary to reason, 

to be taken in the very act, 

to be in the very act of, 

to 7nake much ado about nothing, 

he made no more ado about it, 

to address (p.), to accost, 

to take advantage of (th.), 

to take advantage of (p.), 

to give one's enemies an advantage, 

that is another affair, 

to affect the manners of, 
to be able to afforxl to, 
to be afraid of, 
to get ahead of (p.), 
to repent, to regret. 



avoir mal a. 

accuser a (p.) reception de sa lettre. 

faire part de {th.), faire savoir 

{th.) a (p.). 
faire connaissance. 
etre en pays de connaissances. 
faire une folie, une sottise. 
faire voir qu' (on) a du coeur. 
jouer le role de ; faire. 
agir en depit du bon sens, 
etre pris sur le fait, en flagrant 

delit. 
etre en train de. 

faire beaucoup de bruit pour rien. 
*il n'en a fait ni une ni deux, 
adresser la parole a {p.). 
profiter de. 
exploiter {p.). 
donner prise sur soi. . 
*cela change la these; *c'est une 

autre paire de manches. 
trancher de. 
avoir les moyens de. 
avoir peur de ; craindre. 
prendre les devants. 
se mordre les doigts. 



to take after, 

after the French fashion, 

against one's will. 



tenir {th.) de. 
a la fran9aise. 
a centre coeur, malgr^. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



185 



to he of an age to. 

to be of age, 

not to be of age^ 

to agree loith (p.), 

to agree to lohatever one pro- 
poses, 

to agree loith (in regard to one' 
health) , 

to^igree to it, 

to agree on, 

to have agreed on (th.), 

to ail, 

to aim at (th.), 

to lie, to sleep, in the open air, 

to enjoy the cool air, 

if that is all, 

it is all one to me, 

for all you can say and do^^^ 

blindly, in all confidence, 

to let alone, 

to alloio so much a year, 

to alloio that, to admit that, 

to allude to (p. or th.), 

to overlook (th.), 

to acknoioledge, 

to mean (th.), 

to take place, 



etre en age de, d'age a. 

etre majeur. 

etre mineur. 

etre d 'accord avec. 

en passer par ou Ton veut. 

s faire du bien a. 

en convenir. 

etre d' accord snr. 

etre convenu de (th.). 

avoir. 

viser a, aspirer a, en vouloir a. 

concher en plein air, au grand air, 

a la belle etoile. 
prendre le frais. 
s'il ne tient qu'a cela. 
cela m'est egal. 

* Yous avez beau dire et beau faire. 
les yeux fermes. 
laisser tranquille. 
faire une pension de. 
admettre que. 
faire allusion a. 
savoir passer, 
reconnaitre, avouer. 
vouloir dire, 
avoir lieu. 



4. 



to alter one^s mind, 

to be amazed at (th.), 

to speak ambiguously, < 

amicably, 

to amount to the same thing, 

to amuse one's self very much, to 

be very much amused, 
to be angry at or about (th.), 
to be angry loith (p.), 

to be an annoyance to, 
to answer for it, 



changer d'avis or d'idee. 
*tomber des nues. 
parler a mots converts, 
de gre a gre, a Taimable. 
revenir au meme. 
*s'en donner a coeur-joie. 

etre fache, pique, irrite, de. 

etre fache contre : en vouloir a ; 

se mettre en colere contre. 
tracasser, importuner. 
en repondre. 



186 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



• he has anticipated his revenue, 
to be anxious about, 

to be anxious fo?' (tli.)» 

to apologize for, 

it ivould appear, 

to apply to (p.), 

to apply one's self to (th.), 

to apply too late, 

to approve that, 

to be too apt to, 

afar-fetched argument, 

arm in arm, 

to make (p.) ashamed, 

as I see, as it seems, 

to implore, 

to remember to (p.), 

to say or do nothing more, 



*il a mange son ble en herbe. 
etre en peine de ; etre inquiet sur 

or de. 
avoir (th.) a coeur. 
faire des excuses de. 
a ce qu'il par ait ; il y a apparence. 
s'adresser a, avoir recours a. 
s'appliquer a. 
s'y prendre trop tard. 
trouver bon que {ivith subj.). 
n'etre que trop porte a. 
* un argument tire par les cbeveux. 
bras dessus bras dessous. 
faire hoiite a {p.) de (th.). 
a ce que je vois ; a ce qu'il parait. 
se mettre a genoux devant. 
rappeler au souvenir de. 
en rester la. 



5. 



to ask for, to ask after, 
to ask (p.) to dine, 
to ask (p.) in, 
to be fast asleep, 

to assume consequential airs, 

to be astounded at, astonished, 
to be attached to (th.), to value 

(th.), 
to attempt impossibilities, 

to attend (a class), 
to attend to (th.), 

1 10 ill attend to him in a minute, 

to attend to one's business, 

to pay, to give, attention, 

to be all attention to (p.), to be 

very attentive to (p.), 
to distract a person's attention. 



s'informer de. 

inviter {p.) a diner.- 

faire eutrer. 

dormir i)rofondement ; etre dans 

un profoud sommeil. 
*faire le gros dos; se rengorger; 

*trancher de I'important. 
n'en pas revenir, tomber des nues. 
tenir a. 

*vouloir prendre la lune avec les 

dents, 
suivre. 
faire attention a; s'occuper de; 

{emphatic) tenir la main a. 
*je suis a lui dans une minute. 

s'occuper de ses affaires. 

faire, preter, attention. 

*en etre aux petits soins avec {p,) . 



donner des distractions a ; 
traire. 



dis- 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



187 



to avail nothing, 

to avail one's self of, 

it avails nothing, it is of no use, 

on an average, ' 

to he aware of, 

not to he aicai^e of, 

to take away from, 

to have a very awkward look, 

to heUeve one's self the first man 

in the land^ 
to he conceited, 
to eat a great deal, 
to he pretty well, 
two remain (subtraction), 



ne servir a rien, ne servir de rien 

(de). 
profiler de. 

<cela ne sert a rien, de rien. 
en moyenne ; I'un dans I'autre. 
etre preVenu de ; savoir. 
ignorer. 
prendre, oter {th.) a {p.) ; em- 

mener {p.). 
* avoir I'air bien emprunte. 
se croire le premier montardier 

du pape. 
s'en faire accroire. 
manger comme quatre. 
aller tout doucement. 
deux de reste. 



to he a hachelor, 
to he hack presently , 

to he had weather, 
to he hadly off, 
to he hadly off for, 
to he hankrupt, to fail, 

to lose hy the hargain, 

to he (at a place), to happen to he, 

to he a father to, 

to he always (with a pres. part.), 

to incur one's ill will, to hring 

ahout one's ears, 
he has matters in his ovm hands, 
into the hargain, over and ahove, 
it would he as well, 
he that as it may, 
hoxo can that he? 
how can that possihly he? 
that may he, 

there ivas a good deal of hlood 
shed. 



etre gar^on. 

ne faire qu'aller et venir ; revenir 

a I'instant. 
faire mauvais temps {impers.). 
etre malheureux. 
avoir grand besoin de. 
faire faillite {legal failure) ; faire 

banqusroute {fraudulent). 
perdre au change, 
se trouver. 

servir, tenir lieu, de pere a. 
ne faire que. 
*se mettre {p.) a dos. 

t il a le pied a I'etrier. 

par-dessus le marche. 

autant vaut, or autant vaudrait. 

quoi qu'il en soit. 

comment cela se peut-il ? 

*le moyen que cela soit? 

peut-etre ; cela se pent ; cela se 

pent bien. 
il y eut beaucoup de sang verse. 



188 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to hope, 

what is that to me ? 

he was to start yesterday y 



aimer a croire. 

qu'est ce que cela me fait ? 

il devait partir hier. 



7. 



to bear ivitness to, 
to bear ill will to, 



to beat into a person's head, 

to become, 

to become, to suit, to Jit, 

it does not become to (complain, 

etc.) , 
to be in bed, confined to one's bed, 
to go to bed, 
I will go before, 
to beg of (p.) to, 
and he began to cry most bitterly, 

to begin to, to set about, 

to begin ivorse than ever, 

to begin with the best, 

the beginning is the loorst, 

to behave, ^ 

to behave loell (or ill) to (p.), 

/ believe you I 

I believe so, 

I believe not, 

one icould not believe it, 

if they are to be believed, 

is that the first bell? 

to belong to (a club, etc.), 

to be benefited by, 

to be benumbed with cold, 

to do one's best, 

to make the best of, 

one had best, 

it is better (impers.)^ 



rendre temoignage de, etre temoin 

de. 
savoir mauvais gre a ; en vouloir 

a ; garder, avoir, de la rancime 

contre. 
*fourrer (th.) dans la tete a {p.). 
se faire ; devenir. 
aller bien a. 
vous avez mauvaise grace de (vous 

plaindre, etc.). 
etre au lit, garder le lit. 
se coucher ; aller se coucher. 
je prendrai les devants. 
prier (p.) de. 
et le Yoila a pleurer a cbaudes 

larmes. 
commencer a; se mettre a. 
recommencer de plus belle. 
* manger son pain blanc le premier, 
il n'y a que le premier pas qui coute. 
se comporter ; se conduire. 
agir bien {or mal) envers. 
je crois bien! 
je crois que oui. 

je crois que non ; je ne le crois pas. 
c'est a n'y pas croire. 
a les en croire. 
est-ce la le premier coup ? 
etre de. 

se trouver mieux de. 
*ne pas se sentir de froid, etre 

transi. 
faire de son mieux, faire tout son 

possible. 
tirer parti de, faire valoir. 
mieux vaudrait. 
il vaut mieux. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



189 



/ had better, 
I had better not, 

better late than never, 

to be better (health) , 

to be better (impers.)) 

to get the better of (p.) , 

beticeen this and {to-morrow), 

to bid good moryiing, 

to bid good night, 

to kill two birds loith one stone, 

to have plenty of time, 



je ferais raieux (de) . 

j'aurais tort (dej ; je ferais mal 

(de). 
*mieux vaut tard que jamais, 
se porter mieux, aller mieux. 
valoir mieux. 
venir a bout de. 
d'ici a (demain). 
souhaiter le bonjour. 
souhaiter le bonsoir. 
faire d'uue pierre deux coups, 
avoir tout le temps. 



8. 



to blind, to deceive (p.), 
to bloiv up (with powder) , 
to say (th.) bluntly , plainly , 
to be in a boarding school, 
to boil, 

to be so bold as to, 
to bolt, 

to be a great bore to, 
to be bound to, 

to be bound to observe (modera- 
tion, etc.), 
to break out (speaking of a fire), 
to break open (a desk, etc.), 
to break loose, 
to break forth, 
to break a person's heart, 
to break in, 

to break the ice (figuratively), 
to break off there, to stop there, 

to break up (meeting, ball, etc.), 
to run one's self out of breath, 
to breathe not a word about it, 
to be loell bred, 

to bring (p.), 
to bring (th.), 
to bring (th.) about. 



*jeter de la poudre aux yeux a. 

faire sauter. 

*dire {th,) de but en blanc. 

etre en pension. 

faire bouillir. 

prendre la liberte de, 

fermer {th.) au verrou. 

*etre la bete noire de. 

etre oblige de. 

etre tenu a. 

prendre a. 

forcer. 

s'echapper. 

eclat er. 

fendre le coeur a {p.). 

s'introduire ; penetrer de force. 

faire les premiers pas. 

en demeurer la ; en rester la ; s'en 

tenir la. 
se separer. 

courir a perte d'haleine. 
*ne pas en souffler mot. 
avoir bon ton ; etre bien ne, bien 

eleve. 
amener. 

porter; apporter. 
venir a boat de. 



190 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to bring good luck, 

to hiding ill luck, 

to he a burden to, 

to burn doivn to the ground, 

to burst out laughing, 

to burst into tears, 

to begin business, 

I don't care a button for it, 

by the bye, by the ivay, 

by and by, 

by all means, 

a little bird told me, 

indeed ! really ! you don*t say so ! 

without striking a blow, 



porter bonheur. 

porter malheur. 

etre a charge a. 

bruler de fond en comble. 

rire aux eclats, partir d'un eclat 

de rire. 
fondre en larmes. 
s'etablir. 
* je ne m'en soucie pas plus que de 

I'an quarante. 
a propos ; en passant ; soit dit en 

passant ; par parenthese. 
tout de suite, tout a I'heure. 
a tout prix ; quoi qu'il en coute, 
mon petit doigt me I'a dit. 
par exemple ! 
sans coup f erir. — -"^ 



to call {at a place), 

to call on (p.), 

to call together, 

as well as (/) can or could, 

I can, or cannot, but, 

it is a feather in his cap, 

I don^t care, 



to take care to, 

to take care (to beware) , 

to take care what {one) does, 

to take care not to, 

to take care for or about, 

to be over careful of one's self, 

in a sad case, 

in tvhich case, 

should the case occur, 

this is not the case, 

as the case stands, 

it is a clear case. 



passer (dans un endroit) . 

passer chez ; aller voir. 

assembler ; reunir ; convoquer. 

de (mon) mieux. 

je ne puis m'empecher de. 

tc'est une bague au doigt. 

*9a m'est bien egal; ^je m'en 

moque bien; *qu'est-ce que 9a 

me fait ? 
avoir soin de. 
prendre garde. 

prendre garde a ce qu'(on) fait, 
n'avoir garde de, se bien garder de. 
se soucier de; s'embarrasser de; 

tenir a. 
s'ecouter trop. 
*dans une ^alaine passe, 
auquel cas. 
le cas echeant. 

il n'en est pas aiusi ; il n'en est rien. 
la chose etant ainsi ; au point ou 

en sont les choses. 
cela est clair. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



191 



to he in cash , 

to be out of cash, 

to build castles in the air, 

to make (p.) one's cat's paw, 

to catch (p.) at it, 

to cause (followed by a verb) , 

to give cause to (suspicions, etc.), 

to cavil at (th.), 

to use ceremonies, ■ to be cere- 
monious, 

certain it is that, 

certainly, doubtless, 

to a certainty, 

to chance to, to have the good 
luck to, 

to stand the chance, 

to change one's dress, one's linen, 
etc., 

to give a character to (p.), 

to ask about a person's character, 

to have cheap, to get cheap, 

to be a mere cipher, 

to be in good circumstances, 

to be in narroiv circumstances, 
that depends on circumstances, 

a printed letter (to announce 
births, deaths, or marriages) , a 
funeral letter, 

what people say, 



etre en fonds. 

etre sans argent. 

batir des chateaux en Espagne. 

*f aire tirer a(p.)ses marrons du f eu. 

y prendre. 

faire. 

donner prise a. 

trouver a redire a {th.). 

faire des ceremonies, * faire des 

famous, 
ce qu'il y a de certain, c'est que. 
a coup siir. 
pour siir et certain, 
avoir le bonheur de ; parvenir a. 

courir la chance. 

changer d'habit, de linge, etc. 

donner des renseignements sur. -^ 
aller aux informations, prendre 

des informations, sur. 
avoir a bon compte. 
etre moins que rien ; etre un zero, 
etre bien dans ses affaires, * avoir 

de quoi. 
etre, or vivre, a I'etroit. 
cela depend des circonstances, c'est 

selon. 
une lettre de faire part. 



le qu'on dira-t-on. 



10. 



to be uncommonly civil to, 

to clap hands, 

to clean the room, 

the maid is cleaning your room, 

it clears up, 

to get clear of (th.). 



faire mille honnetetes a. 

battre des mains. 

faire la chambre. 

la bonne fait votre chambre. 

le temps s'eclaircit; le temps se 

decouvre. 
se (bien) tirer de; se (bien) demeler 

de. 



192 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to clear away (a table after meals), 
to dear up that point, 
it is clearing up, 

that is clever enough, 

to live close by, 

to stick close to a person's skirts, 

to coax, 

to pay (p.) back in his oxen coin, 
I ivill pay him back in his own 

coin, 
to be cold. 



to have a cold ; to have a cold in 

one's head, 
to catch cold, 
to color up, 
to color up to the eyes, 
he colored up, 
come along, 
come ivhat may ! 



first come, first served, 
how comes it that? 

to come in, 

to come near, 

to come off, to get off, 

to come to (p.), 

to come to blows, 

to come to nothing (projects), 

to come to pass, 

to come to tea, 

to come to the same thing, 

to come to an understanding with, 

to come in the loay, 

to be comfortable, 

to not hesitate, 
than I used to, 



desservir. 

en avoir le coeur net. 

le temps s'eclaircit; le temps se 

decouvre. 
*cela n'est pas maladroit, 
demeurer a deux pas. 
serrer (p.) de pres. 
*faire patte de velours a {p.) ; 

amadouer (p.). 
donner aQ;.) la monnaie de sa piece. 
*je lui donnerai la monnaie de sa 

piece, 
avoir froid {p.) ; faire froid 

{weather, impers.) ; etre froid 

{things). 
etre enrhume ; avoir un rhume de 

cerveau. 
s'enrbumer. 
rougir. 

*rougir jnsqu'au blanc des yeux. 
le rouge lui monta au visage. 
venez done ; allons, venez. 
* vogue la galere; *au petit bon- 

heur! advienne que pourra! a 

tout basard ! 
ties premiers venus vont devant. 
comment se fait-il que? {with 

subj.). 
entrer. 

s'approcber de. 

se tirer d' affaire ; en etre quitte. 
venir trouver. 
en venir aux mains, 
s'en aller en fumee. 
arriver, se passer, 
venir prendre le tbe. 
revenir au meme. 
s' entendre avec. 
sur venir ; se presenter, 
etre bien ; se trouver bien ; etre a 

raise, 
ne faire ni une ni deux, 
qu'a I'ordinaire. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



193 



11. 



to command a grave countenance, 

to he first, second, etc., in com- 
mand, 

to have everything at one's com- 
mand, 

to have no command of one's self, 

to he at one's command, 

to commit to icriting, 

to compose one's self, 

to complete {one's misfortunes) , 

to he conceited, 

to concern one's self with or ahout, 

to he one's concern, 

that does not concern him, 

to he concerned for (p. or th.), 

to he concerned in, 

my honor is concerned, at stake, 

this is my least concern, trouhle, 

the parties concerned, 

they act in concert, 

to he out of condition, 

to pursue a course of conduct, 

to confide in, 

to confine one's self to that, 

to get confused, 

he is no conjurer, no great genius, 

speak according to your con- 
science, 

to he conscious of, 

not to consent to, 

to he of consequence to (p.), 

to he of consequence {to do), 

to he of great consequence (speak- 
ing of things) , 

it is hy no means a matter of con- 
sequence, 
o 



prendre, se donner, un air grave, 
commander en premier, en second, 

etc. 
*faire la pluie et le beau temps. 

ne pas savoir se moderer. 

etre aux ordres de. 

concher par ecrit. 

se calmer. 

mettre le comble a (ses malheurs) . 

*s'en faire accroire ; etre plein de 

soi-meme. 
se meler de. 

regarder iDersonellement. 
eel a ne le regarde pas. 
etre afflige pour, 
etre interesse', s'inte'resser, a or 

dans, 
il y va, il s'agit, de mon honneur ; 

mon honneur est en jeu. 
*c'est le moindre de mes soucis. 
les partis interesses. 
ils se sont donne le mot. 
etre en mauvais etat. 
tenir une conduite. 
se fier a ; compter sur. 
s'en tenir la. 
*perdre la carte; {th. heing suh- 

ject) s'embrouiller. 
*il n'est pas sorcier; il n'a pas 

invente la poudre. 
*mettez la main sur la conscience. 

avoir la conscience de. 
se refuser a. 
imi)orter a {impers.). 
importer de (faire) {impers.). 
tirer a consequence. 

*cela ne fait ni chaud ni froid. 



194 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



I have been compelled to do that, 

to carry through, 

the ivhole town is in a commotion, 



on m'a force la main. 

faire reussir. 

toute la ville est en I'air. 



12. 



to consider twice before doing a 

thing, 
to consider, or to make, one^s self 

at home, 
let me consider, 

to be consistent, 

to be constantly (doing), 

to contribute the most to, 

to put, to lay, under contribution, 

if you can conveniently , 

the conversation turned to or upon, 

to turn the conversation to, 

to keep one's self cool, 

to make a fair copy of, 

to cost, 

cost what it may, 

to be covered loith it up to, 

to keep one's countenance, 

to put (p.) out of countenance, 
to pluck up one's courage, 
to summon up all one's courage, 
to be cracked, 
to be cross, 

to be cunning and deceitful, 
to cut out work for (p.), 
to be in danger of one's life, 
to be in no danger from, 
to dare say, 
to dare, to bid defiance^ 
to be dark, 

to be in the dark about, 
as dark as pitch, 



y regarder a deux fois. 

faire comme cliez soi ; (in a bad 

sense) ne pas se gener. 
*donnez-moi le temps de m'ori- 

enter. 
etre consequent, 
ne cesser de. 
faire les frais de. 
mettre a contribution, 
si cela ne vous gene pas. 
la conversation roula sur. 
faire tomber la conversation sur. 
se posseder ; garder son sang-froid, 
mettre {th.) au net. 
couter, revenir, a. 
coute que coute. 
*en avoir jusqu'a. 
faire bonne contenance; garder 

son serieax. 
deconcerter (p.). 
prendre son courage a deux mains, 
s'armer de courage. 
*etre timbre, * avoir la tete felee. 
etre de mauvaise humeur ; faire la 

mine a (p.). 
*n'avoir pas I'air d'y toucher. 
*donner du fil a retordre k {p.). 
courir risque de perdre la vie. 
n'avoir rien a craindre de. 
croire bien que. 
defier (p.) de. 
faire nuit, faire sombre, faire noir 

{impers.). 
etre dans I'ignorance sur. 
*noir comme dans un four, or 

comme dans un sac. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



195 



it grows dark, it is getting dark, 

till dark, 

to be dated the, 

that caps the climax, 

in the course of the day, 

my flesh creeps, 

there is not a living creature, 

I shall have a bone to pick loith 

him, 
to be at swords' points, 



il se fait nuit. 

jusqu'a la nuit. 

etre date du. 

11 ne raanquait plus que cela. 

dans le courant de la journee. 

*j'ai la chair de poule. 

il n'y a pas ame qui vive ; *il n'y 

a pas un chat. 
*j'aurai maille a partir avec lui. 

etre a couteaux tires. 



13. 



bearing the date of the, 

to go out of date, 

from this day, henceforth, 

from day to day, 

the next day, 

eveinj other day, 

some day next week, 

to a day, 

by daylight, 

it is daylight at 8 in the evening, 

to be daylight, broad daylight, 

to deal loith (p.), 

to know how to take (p.) , to deal 

with (p.), 
whose deal is it f 
to put to death, 
to be near death, 
to run into debt, 

4 

he deceives himself, 

it is not for me to decide, to judge, 

about it, 
to decide, 
to deem it expedient to, to think 

it best to, 
to undertake the defence of, 
to be deficient in, 



en date du ; date du. 

passer de mode. 

a dater d'aujourd'hui, de ce jour; 

a partir d'aujourd'hui. 
de jour en jour, 
le lendemain. 
de deux jours I'un. 
un jour de la semaine prochaine. 
a un jour pres. 
en plein jour. 

on voit clair a 8 heures du soir. 
faire jour, faire grand jour, 
en user avec. 
savoir prendre (p.). 

a qui est-ce a faire ? a donner ? 
mettre a mort ; faire mourir. 
*etre a deux doigts de la mort. 
faire desdettes; se jeter dans les 

dettes ; s'endetter. 
*il croit voir des etoiles en plein 

midi. 
cela n'est pas de mon ressort. 

prendre (son) parti, 
juger a propos de. 

prendre fait et cause pour, 
manquer de. 



196 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to act deliberately, 
to delight in, 

to he the delight of, 

to deliver (th.) to the person him- 
self, 

to deliver (a letter), 

to take one's departure, 

to depend on or upon (a person 
being subject), 

to depend upon (th. being subject) , 

it depends entirely on yourself, 

to deprive one^s self of , 

for an hour yet, 

the next corner, 



aller pas a pas, pied a pied, 
prendre plaisir a ; aimer a ; se 

plaire a. 
faire les delices de. 
remettre en propres mains. 

remettre. 
partir ; s'en aller. 
faire fond, compter, sur; se re- 
poser de (th.) sur. 
dependre de. 
cela ne tient qu'a vous. 
s'oter ; se priver de. 
avant une heure d'i9i. 
le premier coin de rue. 



14. 



he has ivell deserved it, it served 

him right, 
by or at the desire of, 
it is my desire that you {do), 
that makes no difference, 

that makes no difference, or little 

difference, to me, 
it is not a very difficult thing, 
the beginning is the only difficulty, 
to have a difficulty in, 
to bring (p.) into difficulties, 
to dine out, 

to serve up, to bring in, dinner, 
by dint of, 
to direct (a letter), 
to be dirty (streets, etc.), 
to disagree ivith (health). 

to disappoint (a person being sub- 
ject of the verb) , 

to disappoint (a thing being sub- 
ject of the verb), 

that disappoints me, 

to be discouimged by the least thing. 



*il ne I'a pas vole. 

a la priere de. 

je vous prie de (faire). 

il n'importe ; pen importe, *cela 
ne fait rien. 

pen m'importe; *cela ne me fait 
rien. 

*ce n'est pas la mer a boire. 

il n'y a que le premier pas qui coute. 

avoir de la peine a. 

*mettre (p.) dans de beaux draps. 

diner en ville. 

servir le diner. 
,aforcede. 

adresser ; mettre I'adresse a. 

faire sale ; faire crotte {Impers.) . 

incommoder ; faire mal a ; de- 
ranger. 

*faire faux bond a {p.). 

contrarier (p.). 

cela me contrarie. 

se rebuter pour la moindre chose- 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



197 



it disheartens me altogether^ 
to take a dislike to, 

to dismount, 

to dispense with, 

to keep (p.) at a distance, 

to do one's best to, 

to do for (instead of) , 
to do nothing good, 
to do harm to (p.), 
to do nothing hut, 
to do nothing of the kind, 
to have to do with (p.), 
/ have nothing to do icith it, 
as yoTi like, 
at random, 

to give or send one's kind regards 
to, 



*cela me casse bras et jambes. 
prendre undegout pour {p. or th.) ; 

* prendre (p.) en grii)pe. 
mettre pied a terre. 
se passer de. 
tenir (p.) a distance; tenir (p.) 

dans le respect, 
faire tout ce qu'on pent pour, *se 

mettre en quatre pour, 
tenir lieu de. 
ne faire rien qui vaille. 
faire mal a. 
ne faire que. 
n'en faire rien. 
avoir alfaire a. 
cela ne me regard e pas. 
com me bon vous semble. 
a tort et a travers. 
faire ses amities, ses compliments, 

presenter ses respects, a. 



15. 



to have something to do loith (th.), 

to have nothing to do icith, 
will that do ? 

that will do (that is enough), 

that ivill do (that will fit) , 

that won't do, 

that loill just do for me, just suit 

me, * 

but how could one do otherwise ! 
please do ! 
don't, I say, 
to do right to, 
to do vjrong to, 
to do so that, 

to do the same or as much, 
never to do any other thing, 
to do without, 



avoir quelque chose de commun 

avec. 
n'avoir rien de commun avec. 
*cela va-t-il? est-ce bien comme 

cela? 
cela suffit ; c'est tout ce qu'il f aut ; 

c'est bien comme cela. 
*cela va; cela ira. 
*cela ne va pas. 
*cela fera mon affaire. 

le moyen de faire autrement ! 

je vous en prie ! 

laissez done ! 

faire bien de. 

faire mal de. 

faire en sorte que. 

en faire autant. 

n'en faire jamais d'autres. 

se passer de. 



198 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to he in doors, 
to he out of doors, 
to he douhle the age, 
to draw upon one's self, 
to draw lots, 
in full dress, 

to give drink-money, 

to drive over (p.) , 

to drive to extremities, 

to drop, 

to drop acquaintance loith (p.), 

to he dry (weather) , 

in the dusk of the evening, 

it is your duty to, 

I deem it a duty to, 

to swerve from one's duty, 

to dwell upon (th.), 

to dwell upon one's mind, 

to he dying, 

it is for you to, 

it is all Greek to me, 

one can't get along ivith that, 



etre a la maison. 

etre dehors. 

avoir cleux fois I'age. 

s'attirer. 

*tirer a la courte paille. 

en grande toilette, en grand cos- 
tume. 

donner un pourboire. 

passer sur le corps a. 

pousser (p.) a bout. 

laisser tomber. 

cesser de voir (p.). 

faire sec {imjjers.). 

sur la brune. 

11 est de votre devoir de. _ 

je crois de mon devoir de ; je crois 
qu'il est de mon devoir de. 

s'ecarter de son devoir. 

s'arreter sur. 

tenir au coeur a. 

semourir; *s'en aller. 

c'est a vous de. 

*je n'y entends goutte. 

*il n'y a pas moyen de marcher 
avec cela. 



16. 



to have a good ear, 

not to have a good ear, 

to turn a deaf ear to, 

in good earnest, 

to stop one's ears, 

to whisper (th.) into one's ears, 

an earthly thing, 

you don't do an earthly thing, 

to take it at one's ease, 
to he at one*s ease, 



avoir de I'oreille; avoir I'oreille 

juste, 
n'avoir pas- d'oreille; manquer 

d'oreille. 
faire la sourde oreille a; fermer 

I'oreille a (th.). 
tout de bon ; serieusement ; de 

bonne foi ; raillerie a part. 
se boucher les oreilles. 
chuchoter, dire {th.) a roreille. 
chose au monde. 
vous ne faites oeuvre de vos dix 

doigts. 
*en prendre bien a son aise. 
*etre dans son assiette. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



199 



it is easy for you to speak, 
to eat the chicken in the egg, 
to eat heartily, 
to give (p.) elbow-room, 
ivhat else ? anything else ? 
noiohere else, 

to enable (p.) to, 
to be enabled, 
to endeavor, 

to end in or loith, 
to put an end to, 

to make an enemy of (p.), 

to be engaged, not at home, 

to be engaged in, 

he is engaged in, 

to enjoy one's self constantly, to 

enjoy life, 
to enjoy one's self loell, 
to enjoy (a walk, a sail, etc.), 
I have enjoyed that loalk (or drive, 

or sail) very much. 



to enliven with, 

to be enough for (p.), 

to be enough (to complain, etc.), 

more than enough, 

to be enraged at, 

to enter into conversation, 

to give an entertainment, 

to envy, 

to be equal to the emergency , 

to treat on a footing of equality, 

to escape from, 

the loord escaped me, 

to be in the act of, 

not to give up, 

to play hide and seek, 



vous en parlez bien a votre aise. 
manger son ble en herbe. 
* manger comme quatre. 
*laissera {p.) les coudees f ranches, 
qu'y a-t-il encore? quoi encore? 
nulle autre part; nulle part ail- 

leurs. 
mettre (p.) en etat de. 
etre a meme de ; ponvoir. 
s'efforcer de ; f aire tons ses efforts 

pour, 
finir par. 
mettre tin a ; faire cesser ; en 

finlr avec. 
se faire un ennemi de (p.) se mettre 

a dos. 
n'etre pas visible, 
etre occupe a. 
il est occupe a. 
*se donner du bon temps. 

se bien amuser. 

aimer beaucoup. 

cette promenade (cette promenade 
en Yolture or en bateau) m'a 
fait beaucou]D de plaisir, m'a 
bien amuse, m'a bien diverti. 

egayer par. 

suffire a. 

y avoir de quoi (se plaindre). 

plus qu'il n'en faut. 

etre irrite, furieux, de (th.), 
contre (p.). 

lier conversation. 

recevoir du monde. 

envier (th.) ; porter envie a (p.). 

etre a la hauteur de la situation. 

tr alter d'egal a egal. 

echapper a. 

le mot m'a echappe. 

etre en train de. 

ue pas lacher prise. 

jouer a cache-cache. 



200 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



17. 



ere long, shortly, 

to have a narroio escape^ 

he had a narrow escape from being 

killed, 
to make one's escape, 
to esteem it a favor, 
to esteem, to value (tli.), 

to give an evasive ansicer, 
to he even with, 

at all events. 



to evince, 

to be scrupulously exact, 

to take exception to, 

to excite the compassion of, 

to be excited at, 

a false excuse, 

to exert one's self to, 

to exert one's self to the utmost, 
to exhaust one's patience, 
to be quite exhausted, 

to expect (th.), 

beyond one's expectation, 

to defray the expense of, 

to be at expense, 

petty expenses, 

to be expensive, 

to expose (p.), 

to be far above expression, 

to run into extremes, 

to eye from head to foot, 
to catch the eye of, 
to be an eyesore to (p.), cl bore, 
the sum is complete. 



sous peu ; dans peu ; bientot. 
*]'echapper belle {never followed 

by a complementary phrase). 
il I'a echappe belle. 

s'echapper, se sauver. 
regarder comme une faveur. 
faire cas de, attacher de la va- 

leur a. 
X repondre en Normand. 
etre quitte avec; *rendre la pa- 

reille a. 
en tout cas; a tout evenement; 

de toute maniere; yaille que 

Yaille. 
faire voir. 

*mettre les points sur les i. 
se formaliser de; s'offenser de. 
faire pitie a. 
prendre feu a. 
une defaite. 
se donner de la peine pour; *se 

mettre en frais. 
faire tons ses efforts pour, 
pousser {p.) a bout. 
n'en pouvoir plus; *etre rendu; 

*etre sur les dents, 
s'attendre a. 
au-dela de son attente. 
faire les frais de. 
faire des depenses. 
menus frais. 
couter cher. 
demasquer. 

passer toute expression. 
se Jeter dans les extremes ; pas- 
ser d'un extreme a I'autre. 
toiser (p.). 
se faire remarquer de. 
*Otre la bete noire de {p.)- 
le compte y est. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



201 



to keep in practice f 

to stare, 

to be a witness, 



tenir (p.) en haleine. 
ouvrir de grands yeux. 
servir de temoin. 



18. 



to face, 

to do {th.) for (p.) a fair face, 

to have a face of brass, 

to stare or to look full in the face, 

to say (th.) to one^sface, 

to fail (not to succeed), 

^o/ca7 (in business), 

to be faint-hearted, 

this is coming a day after the fair, 

all this is very fair, 

to fall in loith, 

to fall into (a snare), 

to fall out, 

to fall upon (th.), 

to fall upon (p.) treacherously, 

to fall out of the frying-pan into 

the fire, 
to take a fancy to, 
to be far from, 

how far is it ? 

so far as to, • 

as far as one can see, 

to go further and fare worse, 

to bid farewell, 

I don't bid farewell, ive shall 

meet again, 
to be in fashion, ^ 

to be too fast (a watch, etc.), 

it is fated that I shall see him 

every day, 
to be loom out ivith fatigue, 

touse,toinure,07ie's self to fatigue, 
to be the fault of, 



faire face a. 

*faire (th.) pour les beaux yeux 

de. 
*aYoir du front, du toupet. 
*regarder {p.) entre les deux yeux. 
dire (th.) a brule-pourpoint. 
manquer {p.) le or son but. 
faire faillite. 

*etre une poule mouillee. 
*c'est de la moutarde apres diner. 
*tout ceci est bel et bon. 
rencontrer. 
donner dans. 

se quereller ; se brouiller ; rompre. 
faire main basse sur. 
prendre en traitre. 
tomber de Charybde en Scylla. 

prendre du gout pour. 

s'en falloir de beaucoup que 

(impers.). 
combien y a-t-il ? 
jusqu'a. 
a perte de vue. 
tomber de mal en pis. 
dire adieu a. 
sans adieu, nous nous reverrons. 

etre a la mode, etre de mode ; etre 

de mise. 
avancer. 
il est ecrit que je le verrai tous 

les jours. 
*etre rendu ; n'en pouvoir plus de 

fatigue ; etre roue. 
se faire, s'endurcir, a la fatigue, 
ne tenir qu'a (impers.). 



202 



IDIOMATIC YEKBS AND PHRASES. 



to he 171 fear of^ 

to feed on^ 

to feel reluctant to, 

to feel one's way, 

to feel hurt at, 

beyond one's expectation, 

to lay the corner stone, 

a iveekfrom to-day, 

tivo iveeksfrom to-day, 

to try to keep in with both sides. 



craindre, avoir peur de. 
se nourrir de. 

eprouver de la repugnance a. 
marcher a tatons. 
se trouver offense de. 
aii-dela de son attente. 
poser la premiere pierre. 
d'aujourd'hui en huit. 
d'aujourd'hui en quinze. 
* vouloir menagez la chevre et le 
chou. 



19. 



to feel sick (suddenly), 

to feel sick at heart, 

to be a good fellow, 

to be a badfelloiv, 

to be a sad fellow , 

to be hail fellow well met with (p.) , 

to come and fetch (p.), 

to go and fetch, 

to fight bravely, 

to fight hand to hand, 

toJiJid one's self the better for it, 

to find the door shut, to find no 

one at home, 
to find fault loith (th.), 
to find it loorth one's while, 
to be fine (weather), 
io be fine again, 

to have (th.) at one's fingers' ends, 
to bite one's fingers for it, 

to set fire to, 

far from it, 

to be on the lookout, 

07ie might ivish that it could he, 

to have money about one (p.), 

so much so, 

to stand in line, 

not to take it amiss if, 



se trouver mal ; n'etre pasbien. 

avoir le coeur gros. 

etre un bon enfant. 

etre un mauvais sujet. 

etre un triste sire, un pauvre sire. 

traiter (p.) de pair a compagnon. 

venir prendre. 

aller chercher. 

payer de sa personne. 

se battre corps a corps. 

s'en trouver mieux. 

* trouver visage de bois. 

^trouver a redire a {th.). 

*y trouver son compte. 

faire beau {impers.) . 

se remettre an beau. 

*savoir sur le bout du doigt. 

*s'en mordre les, doigts {or les 

pouces) . 
mettre le feu a. 
il s'en faut de beaucoup. 
etre aux aguets. 
on voudrait que ce fut. 
avoir de I'argent sur soi. 
au point que. 
faire queue, 
ne pas trouver mauvais que 

{subj.). 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



203 



20. 



to go through fire and water for 

(p.), 
to fire at, 

to be, to hold, firm, 
to be firm in, - 
to fit, to fit well (p.), 
to fit like a glove, to suit to a jT, 
to be flat (trade), 
to flatter (p.) grossly, 

to be foggy, 

to be passionately fond off 



not to be very fond of, 

to be fond of drink, 

to make a fool of, 

to make a fool of one^s self, 

he missed his footing, 

to be forbidden the use of (th.), 

to force a laugh, 

to force (p.) to explain one's self, 

to take time by the forelock, 

to have no foresight, 

never to forget ichile one lives, 

forget and forgive, 

from fo rge tfuln ess , 

I forgive you this time, but don't 

do it again, , 
and so forth,. and so on, 
to tell (p.) his fortune, 
to be born to good fortune, 
to bear up against bad fortune, 
to forward (a letter, parcel, etc.), 
to be free spoken, 
to freeze intensely, 
to fret and fume, 
this is not done like a friend, 
to make friends ivith, 
to be on friendly terms. 



*se mettre au feu pour {p.). 

tirer sur ; faire feu sur. 

tenlr bon. 

persister dans. 

aller bien a. 

*aller comme un gant. 

ne pas aller. 

*donner de I'encensoir par le nez 
a {p.). 

faire du brouillard {impers.) . 

aimer beaucoup; etre passionne 
pour; etre coiife de; s'etre en- 
goue de ; aimer a la folie. 

n'aimer guere. 

* aimer la bouteille. 

se moquer de ; se jouer de. 
se faire moquer de soi. 
le pied lui a manque, 
etre a I'index. 

*rire du bout des levres, or des 
dents. 

* mettre (p.) au pied du mur. 
^prendre I'occasion aux cheveux. 
*ne pas voir plus loin que son nez. 
n'oublier (th.) de sa vie. 

sans rancune. 
par oubli. 

* passe pour cette fois, mais que 

cela n' arrive plus, 
et aiusi de suite, 
dire a (p.) sa bonne aventure. 
*etre ne coiffe. 

faire contre fortune bon coeur. 
faire parvenir (th.) a (p.). 
avoir son franc parler. 
geler a pier re fendre. 
Jeter feu et llamme. 
ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. 
se reconcilier avec. 
etre sur un pied d'amitie. 



204 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



we are quits and friends, 

to frighten to death, 

the river is frozen, 

to pass one's self for, 

to pay cash, 

to say nothing about, 

to fall the lohole length of the 

stairs, 
every man has his hobby, 



nous sommes quittes et bons 

amis. 
faire mourir de peur. 
la riviere est prise, 
se faire passer pour, 
payer rubis sur I'ongle. 
passer sous silence, 
tomber du haut en bas de I'escalier. 

*chacun a sa marotte. 



21. 



to gain one's object, 

to gain one's point, 
to make game of, 
as gay as a lark, 
to be a gentleman, 

to get, to order, 
to get, to obtain, to gain, 
to get, to 2oossess, 
to get angry ivith, 
to get away, 
to get (th.) /or (p.), 
to get home, 

to get, to take, a liking for, 
to get on (the way), 
to get on (in the world) 
get on ! go on ! 
to get over a great difficulty, 
to get out, to clear off, to get off, 
to get rich, 
to get rid of, 
to get, to become, 
to get (buy), 
to get into, 
to get clear of, 
I luish you may get it ! 
see noio what you get by your dis- 
obedience. 



reussir dans ses projets, ses des- 

seins. 
arriver a ses fins, 
se moquer. 

gai comme un pinson. 
etre un homme comme il faut; 

savoir vivre. 
faire faire. 
obtenir, gagner. 
avoir, posseder. 
se mettre en colere contre. 
s'en aller; *se sauver. 
faire avoir {th.) a (p.). 
arriver chez soi. 
prendre gout a. 
avancer. 

faire son chemin. 
avancez done ! 
*se tirer une epine du pied. 
se tirer de ; s'en tirer. 
s'enrichir. 

se defaire de; se debarrasser de. 
devenir. 
acheter. 
monter, entrer. 
se tirer de. 
attendez-vous-y ! 
voila ce que c'est que d'avoir 

desobei; voila ce qu'on gagne 

a desobeir. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



205 



to he latCf 

you are late, 

hoio can one, 

to have good manners, 

to set out, 

to find the door shut, 

to promise great things, 

to start on a journey, 



se faire tard. 

vous etes eu retard. 

le raoyen de. 

savoir vivre, avoir du savoir vivre. 

se mettre en route. 

trouver visage de bois. 

promettre monts et merveilles. 

se mettre en voyage, en route. 



22. 



to get into a scrape, 

to get out of a scrape, 

to get stout, 

to get out of the way, 

to gild the pill, 

to give an account of, 

to give in one's account, 

to give credit to (th.), 

to give (p.) his own, 

to give it up, 

I hope you don't give it up, 

to give up guessing, 

to give up an enterprise ivhich 

ivould succeed, 
to give largely, 
to give a lecture to, to reprimand. 



to give occasion to (p.), to offer 

(p.) a chance, 
to give an evening party , ^ 
to give rise to, 
to give one's self up to, 
to give the advantage over (p.), 
it has given me much pleasure to 

{see) , 
you would hardly believe, 
the thing is getting confused, 
to take pity on. 



se mettre dans I'embarras; *se 

faire d€S affaires, 
se tirer d'affaire; *retirer son 

epingle du jeu. 
prendre de I'embonpoint. 
s'oter. 

dorer la pilule. 

faire le recit de, rendre compte de. 
rendre ^es comptes. 
a j outer foi a. 
dire a (p.) son fait, 
abandonner la partie. 
j'espere que vous ne vous tenez 

pas pour battu. 
*jeter sa langue aux cbiens. 
s'arreter en beau chemin. 

donner a pleines mains. 

* faire une mercuriale, une se- 
monce, la le9on; *tancer d'im- 
portance ; donner un savon. 

donner lieu a (p.) de. 

donner une soiree. 

faire naitre ; produire. 

s'abandonner a ; se livrer a. 

donner prise sur. 

j'ai ete tres-heureux de (voir). 

vous ne sauriez croire. 
la chose s'embrouille. 
avoir pitie de. 



206 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



23. 



to give (p.) something to do, 
to give up (p. or th.) for lost, 
to give way to, 

to he glad to hear, 

to look at one's self in a glass 

(with pleasure) , 
to drink out of a glass, 
to glory in, 

to he hand and glove, 

to go (away) , 

to go ahroad, 

to go along, 

to go hack (on one's decision), 

to go in company (th. being subj.) , 

to go together, , 

to go for (to fetch), 
to go on the same to ay, 
to go so far as to, 
to go up stairs, 
to go doivn stairs, 
to go to (p.) , 
to go to meet (p.), 

to go two miles, 

to go upon sure grounds, 

to go without, 

I am going immediately, 

to he going on (speaking), 

to he as good as gold, 

to he worth one's weight in gold, 

he thinks himself a great man, 

to grieve for trifles, 
to grieve without cause, 
it grieves me to tell you, 
not to he worth a groat, 



*donner du fil a retordre a (p.). 
regarder {p. or th.) comme perdu, 
se laisser aller a {th.), ceder a {p. 
or th.) ; lacher la bride a {th.), 
apprendre avec plaisir. 
se mirer. 

boire dans un verre. 

se glorifier; se faire gloire, hon- 

neur, de. 
etre amis intimes; *etre comme 

les deux doigts de la main, 
partir. 

aller a I'etranger. 
passer son chemin. 
s'en dedire. 
marcher de front. 

aller chercher. 

* aller tou jours son train. 

s'oublier jusqu'a. 

monter ; aller en haut. 

descendre ; aller en has. 

aller trouver ; aller chez. 

aller au-devant de, a la rencontre 

de. 
faire deux milles. 
etre sur de son fait ; aller a coup 

sur. 
se passer de. 
j'y vais de ce pas. 
etre en train. 
*etre de I'or en barre. 
valoir son pesant d'or. 
*il se croit le premier moutardier 

du Pape. 
se chagriner pour des riens. 
s'attrister mal a propos. 
il m'en coute de vous dire. 
*n'avoir pas le sou; n'avoir pas 

une obole. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



207 



without a groat, penniless, 

to grow into a habit, 

to grow old, 

ill weeds grow apace, 

it grows or draios toward the 

close of the day, 
to owe a grudge to (p.), 
at a guess, 

to give (p.) ten times to guess it in, 
to leave (p.) to guess, 
to he of no avail, 
to fall short of, 
to become good friends, 
at a glance, 
to play truant, 



*sans le sou ; sans im sou. 

devenir habitude. 

se faire vieux. 

mauvaise herbe croit toujours. 

la fin du jour approche or s'ap- 

proche. 
* avoir une dent contre. 
en devinant. 
le donner a (p.) en dix. 
le laisser a {p.) a deviner. 
ne servir de rien. 
commencer a manquer de. 
devenir bons amis, 
d'un coup d'oeil. 
faire I'ecole buissonniere. 



24. 



to be in the habit of, 

to break one's self of a habit, 

to contract a bad habit, 

to grow into a habit, 

to get into the habit of, 

I had best do ; the best thing I 

call do is, 
I had better, 
you had better go, 
to tear one's hair, 
to be ivithin a hair's breadth of, 



to make one's hair stand on end, 

to go halves loith (p.), 

to car?^ it ivith a high hand 

over, 
to have a hand in, 
to have no hand in, 
my hand is in, 
ivhile my hand is in, or ivhile I 

am at it, 
with a book in his hand, 
to shake hands with, 



avoir I'habitude de. 

se defaire d'une habitude. 

prendre un mauvais pli. 

devenir habitude. 

prendre I'habitude de. 

ce que j'ai de mieux a faire, c'est 

de. 
je ferais mieux de. 
vous feriez mieux de partir. 
s'arracher les cheveux. 
*ne pas s'en falloir de I'epaisseur 

d' un cheveu ; * etre a deux doigts 

de. 
faire dresser les cheveux. 
se mettre de moitie avec (p.). 
* mener rondement. 

avoir part a. 

n'etre pour rien dans. 

je suis en train. 

pendant que, or puisque, j'ai la 

main a la pate, 
un livre a la main, 
donner une poignee de main a; 

serrer la main a. 



208 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to go hand in hand, 

to have on one's hands , 

to live from hand to mouthy 

to lend a hand, 

to take it in hand, 

to he hand in glove, 

by handfuls, 

to hang by a thread, 

his life hangs on a thread, 

hoiv does that happen f 

to happen to, 

to be happy to see (p.), 

to be hardly able, 

to harm, to hurt (physical), 

to hurt one's feelings, 

to be no harm in (impers.), 

to mean no harm, 

to hate work, 

to have (to cause) , 

to have it (to understand) , 

now I have it, 

to have on good authority, 

there I will have him, 

to have tears in one's eyes, 

I had better, 

let me hear about it, 

indeed it is, I should say so, 

to go and meet. 



agir de concert ; s'entendre. 
avoir sur les bras, 
vivre au jour le jour. 
*donner un coup de main. 
se faire fort de. 

* etre comme les deux doigts de la 
main. 

a pleines mains, 
tenir a un fil. 
sa vie ne tient qu'a un fil. 
comment cela se f ait-il ? 
venir a. 

etre charm e de voir (p.). 
avoir de la peine a. 
faire mal a. 
faire de la peine a. 
n'y avoir pas de mal a {impers.). 
ne pas songer a mal; ne pas y 
entendre malice. 

* aimer la besogne faite. 
faire. 

etre au fait; *yetre; deviner. 

*m'y voila. 

savoir, tenir, de bonne part. 

c'est la que je I'attends. 

avoir les larmes aux yeux. 

je ferais mieux de. 

vous m'en direz des nouvelles. 

je le crois bien. 

aller au devant de. 



25. 



to have but just, 

to have but just (dined, etc.), 

to have company, 

to have designs upon, 

to have a home, 

to have neither house nor home, 

to have just (before a verb), 

to have something to do with it, 

to have to do with (p.), 

to have loherewithal. 



ne faire que de. 

sortir de. 

avoir du monde. 

avoir des vues sur. 

avoir un chez soi. 

n'avoir ni feu ni lieu. 

venir de. 

y etre pour quelque chose. 

avoir affaire a. 

avoir de quoi. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



209 



to come into one's head, to enter 

one's head, 
to take into one's head to, 
to do (th.) out oj one's oion head 

or to do of one's oion accord, 
to have neither head nor tail, 
to hear of or from (p.) , 
to hear of (th.), to hear said, 
to he happy to hear, 
to hear out, 
to ask to be heard, 
to he hard or dull of hearing, 

rather deaf, 
to he ivithin hearing, 
to have at heart, 
his heart is full, 
he takes it to heart, 
to have hy heart, 
to have the heart to, 
Heaven forhid / 
you seem very heedless, 

to take to one's heels, 

to help (p.) out of trouble, 
hoio can I help it ? 
I can7iot help saying, 
it cannot he helped, 

hovj can it be helped f 

it is high time, 

to speak highly of, 

to think highly of, 

to hint, to give a hint, ^ 

to give a broad hint, 

to give some hints on the subject, 
to hit the right nail on the head, 
you have hit the nail on the head, 

to he hot (th.), 
p 



venir a la tete de; passer par la 

tete de. 
se mettre en tete de ; s'aviser de. 
faire (th.) de son chef. 

*n 'avoir ni queue ni tete. 
avoir, recevoir, des nouvelles de. 
apprendre; entendre dire, 
apprendre avec plaisir. 
entendre jusqu'au bout, 
demander la parole, 
avoir I'oreille dure ; entendre dur. 

etre a portee d' entendre. 

avoir a coeur de. 

il a le coeur gros. 

cela lui tient au coeur. 

savoir, posseder, par coeur. 

avoir le courage de. 

le ciel (m') en preserve. 

*il me semble que vous y allez 

bien a la legere. 
*prendre ses jambes a son cou; 

*jouer des talons, 
tirer (p.) d'embarras. 
que voulez-vous que j'y fasse? 
je ne puis m'empecher de dire. 
on n'y pent rien ; on ne saurait 

qu'y faire. 
qu'y faire ? que voulez-vous qu'on 

y fasse ? que voulez-vous ? 
il est^grandement temps, 
dire du bien de. 
penser avantageusement de. 
donner a entendre ; faire entendre; 

dire a demi-mot. 
faire entendre d'une maniere a 

ne pas s'y tromper. 
*en toucher quelques mots. 
* mettre le doigt dessus. 
*vous y etes; *vous avez mis le 

doigt dessus. 
etre chaud. 



210 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



there's a full house, 

to he hungry, 

to he ravenously hungry, 

there is no hurry, 

to hurt (physically) , 

to hurt (one's feelings), 

to he hurt, 

it hurts me, it grieves me to see, 

to hush up the business, 

to fall into hysterics, 

to he free, or ahle, to do, 

hut not your friend, 

to disguise one^s self as, 

to enjoy (a place) , 

hoiv does it happen 9 

how is it that ? 

to meet with success, 



la salle est pleine. 

avoir faim. 

* avoir une faim de loup. 

il n'y a rien qui presse. 

faire du mal a. 

faire du tort a. 

avoir du mal. 

cela me fait de la peine de voir. 

etouffer I'affaire. 

avoir une attaque de nerfs. 

etre a meme de. 

mais votre amis pas. 

se deguiser en. 

aimer, se plaire a. 

comment se f ait-il que ? 

d'oii vient que? 

avoir du succes. 



26. 



to have, to entertain, an idea, 
idle hours, spare time, leisure time, 
if . . . hut a little, 
to take it ill or amiss if, to take 

offence, 
to he taken ill, 
to feel ill, 

to he dangerously ill, 
immediately, 
to impose on or upon, 



to wish an impossibility, 

to impress one's self with, 

to improve an advantage, 

to improve in (study, etc.), 

to he very impudent, 

to he in and out, 

to he inactive, to sit with one's 

hands folded, 
hy inches, 



avoir, se faire, une idee, 
heures de loisir, heures perdues. 
pour peu que. 
trouver mauvais que (suhj.). 

tomber malade. 

se sentir mal, malade. 

etre entre la vie et la mort. 

sur le champ, a I'instant. 

en imposer a ; en faire accroire a; 

donner le change a ; jeter de la 

poudre aux yeux. 
* vouloir prendre la lune avec les 

dents, 
se penetrer de. 
profit er d'un avantage. 
faire des progres dans, 
etre effronte comme un page, 
aller et venir. 
rester les bras croises. 

pied a pied ; a petit feu ; *a coups 
d'epingles. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



211 



to he inclined to, 

if you feel inclined to it, 

to live upon one's income, 

if it is inconvenient for you to, 

to incur, to bring on one's self, 
to be indebted to (p.) for, 
to be indefatigable for (p.), 
to ask information, to inquire 

about, 
to supply (p.) loith information^ 

to injure (p.), 

to inquire of (p.) about, 

to inquire for (p.), 

to inquire into (th.), 

to be inquisitive about (th.), 

to insist on, 

to intend to, to have the intention 

of, 
to intend for (p.), 
to attend to the interests of, 

to bring (p.) over to one's inter- 
est, 
without intermission, 
to interrupt (p.), to cut short, 
to introduce (p.) into (a room), 
to introduce (p.) to (p.), 
/ hope I don't intrude, 

to be hotheads, 

to be hard of hearing, 

but ever so little, ^ 

to have a good time, enjoy, 

it is good in itself, 

for instance, 

a lot of things, 

for the least reason, 

to be resigned, 

it is time indeed, 

topsy-turvy, 



etre enclin, porte, dispose, a. 

si Ten vie vous en prend. 

vivre de ses rentes. 

si cela vous de'range, si cela vous 

gene, de. 
s'attirer. 

etre redevable a (p.) de. 
*se mettre en quatre pour (p.). 
prendre des renseignements sur. 

fournir des renseignements sur 

(th.) a (p.). 
faire tort a; faire injure a. 
s'informer a (p.) de (th.) ; de- 

mander des nouvelles a (p.) de. 
demander. 
examiner. 

etre curieux de savoir (th.). 
tenir a. 
avoir intention, or Tintention, de. 

destiner a. 

veiller aux interets de; soigner 

les interets de. 
mettre (p.) dans ses interets. 

d'arrache-pied. 

couper la parole a (p.). 

faire entrer. 

presenter a. 

*j'espere que je ne suis pas de 

trop. 
avoir la tete pres du bonnet, 
avoir I'oreille dure, 
tant soit pen. 
s'amuser. 
c'est bon en soi. 
par exemple. 
un tas de choses. 
a propos de tout et de rien. 
en prendre son partir. 
il n'est que temps de. 
sans dessus dessous. 



212 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



27. 



to jest about (th.)j 

to be full of jests f 

to be 171 jest, 

to know hoio to take a jest, 

many a true loord is spoken injestf 

to turn to a jest, 

to understand jesting, 

to join in the sport, 

are you joking ^ 

to begin a journey, 

to take a journey, to be on a 

journey, 
to be a judge of, 
to keep a carriage, 
to keep a house, 
to keep a servant, 
to keep straight on, 
to keep one's temper, to keep cool, 
to keep one waiting, 
to keep (reading), 
to keep to (th.) , 
to keep the best bit for the last, 
to keep time (watch), 
to kill by inches, 
to kill two birds with one stone, 
to be kind to, 

to be so kind as to, 



to know (by senses), to be ac- 
quainted, 
to know (by mind) , to be aicare of, 
to knoiv by name, 
to know by sight, 
to know (p.) by {his walk, etc.), 

to know of old, 

to let (p.) know how things go on, 

to know better, 

to know what to think of it. 



railler. 

avoir toujours le mot pour rire. 

plaisanter. 

entendre raillerie. 

on dit souvent la verite en riant. 

tourner en plaisanterie. 

entendre la raillerie. 

se mettre de la partie. 

*vous moquez-vous du monde? 

se mettre en voyage. 

faire un voyage, etre en voyage, 
voyager. 

se connaitre en. 

rouler carrosse ; avoir equipage. 

tenir une maison. 

avoir un domes tique. 

aller tout droit. 

garder son sang-froid. 

faire attendre. 

continuer de (lire) . 

s'en tenir a. 

*garder {th.) pour la bonne bouche. 

aller bien. 

faire mourir a petit feu. 

* faire d'une pierre deux coups. 

avoir de la bonte pour ; etre bon 
pour. 

etre assez bon pour; avoir la 
bonte I'obligeance, la complai- 
sance, de. 

connaitre. 

savoir. 

connaitre de nom. 

connaitre de vue. 

reconnaitre {p.) a (sa marche, 

etc.). 
connaitre de longue main, 
msttre {p.) au courant. 
n'etre pas si sot. 
savoir a quoi s'en tenir. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



213 



one does not know if he will not 
some day require the assistance 
of such a person, or thing, 

you woidd not Tcnoio him again, 

to know thoroughly, 

I knoio now ivhere I am, 
to let knoio, 

to go back on, 

to give the finishing stroke, 

afire-eater, 

for trifles, 

just so, 

just as you say, 

to lose one's toils, 

very neat in dress, 

nothing else to do, 

nothing of the kind, 

in no time at all, 

all out of patience, 

to regret, 

to rely on, 

a tremendous appetite, 

under cover of, 

to he very witty, 



il ne faut pas dire: ** Fontaine, 
je ne boirai pas de ton eau." 

vous ne le reconnaitriez pas; il 
n'est pas reconnaissable. 

savoir a fond ; ^savoir sur le bout 
du doigt. 

je me reconnais maintenant. 

faire connaitre, faire savoir, faire 
dire {th.) a {p.). 

revenir sur. 

donner le coup de grace. 

un brave a quatre polls. 

pour des riens. 

exactement. 

tout comme vous dites. 

perdre la tete. 

tire a quatre epingles. 

pas d 'autre parti a prendre. 

rien de la sorte. 

en un rien de temps. 

a bout de force et de patience. 

se mordre les pouces de. 

compter. 

manger comme quatre. 

a la faveur de. 

avoir de I'esprit comme quatre. 



28. 



to have one's labor for one's pains, 
to labor under great difficulties. 



to be laid up, ^ 

God tempers the wind to the shorn 

lamb, 
to see how the land lies, 

to be late (impers.). 

to be late (persons, watches, etc.), 

to be too late (impers.), 



en etre pour sa peine. 

lutter contre de grandes diffi- 
cultes ; avoir de grandes diffi- 
cult es a surmonter. 

etre force de garder la chambre ; 
garder le lit. 

a brebis tondue Dieii mesure le 
vent. 

sonder le terrain ; ^prendre Fair 
du bureau. 

etre tard {impers.). 

etre en retard. 

n'etre plus temps de {impers.). 



214 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



better late than never, 

dog latin, 

to laugh in the face of, 

to laugh in one's sleeve, 

to laugh on the wrong side of the 

mouth, 
to laugh at a creditor, 
to afford subject for laughter, 
to lay up for a rainy day, 
to lay the blame on. 



to lay the cloth, 

to lay it to, 

at the very least, 

not in the least, not at all, 

with your leave, permission, 

where did you leave off? 
I leave you to judge if, 
to leave it to, 
to leave in the lurch, 
to leave no stone unturned to, 
not to leave (p.) a leg to stand upon, 
I have {p7ie pound) left, 
there is still some left, 
scarcely any is left, 
at your leisure, spare moments, 
to go great lengths, 
to be (three inches) in length by 
(tivo) in breadth. 



to let alone (p.), 

to let alone (th.) , 

to let out, 

let it be for this time only, 

to set at liberty, 

to lie scattered about (speaking of 

papers, etc.), 
to save the life of. 



il vaut mieux tard que jamais. 

du latin de cuisine. 

rire au nez de. 

rire sous cape, rire dans sa barbe. 

*rire de travers ; *rire jaune; 

*rire du bout des dents, 
payer (p.) en monnaie de singe, 
preter a rire a (p.). 
*garder une poire pour la soif. 
rejeter la faute sur ; s'en prendre 

a; *mettre tout sur le dos de; 

donner tort a. 
mettre la nappe, mettre le convert, 
s'en prendre a (p.) de (th.). 
pour le moins ; tout au moins. 
nullement ; en aucune maniere ; 

pas le moins du monde. 
avec votre permission ; ne vous en 

deplaise. 
ou en etes-vous reste? 
je vous laisse a penser si. 
s'en remettre, s'en rapporter, a. 

* planter la ; * laisser en plant, 
remuer ciel et terre pour. 

* mettre (p.) au pied du mur. 
il me reste (une livre) . 

il en reste encore. 

il n'en reste presque plus. 

a vos heures perdues. 

aller bien loin. 

avoir (trois pouces).de long sur 
(deux) de large ; avoir (trois 
pouces) de longueur sur (deux) 
de largeur ; etre long de (trois 
pouces) et large de (deux) . 

laisser tranquille, or en repos. 

ne pas toucher a. 

laisser sortir. 

* passe pour cette fois. 
mettre en liberte. 

etre tout en desordre; trainer. 

sauver la vie a. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



215 



to lead a fast life^ 
for the life of iiie^ 
during his or her lifetime^ 
to give a lift^ a helping hand, 
to vieiv things in their best light, 
to be light or daylight, broad day- 
light, 
to be as like as tivo peas, 

to have like to, to be like to, 

to like (a place) , 

to consider, 

even if, 

the late government, 

to make both ends meet, 

to have misgivings, the blues, 

since one must die, 

to be only too inclined, 

the opposite stand, 

to resist, 

to recognize a place, 

to keep soul and body together. 



mener la vie a grandes guides. 

pour tout au moude. 

de son vivant. 

*donner un coup de main. 

voir tout en couleur de rose. 

faire jour; faire grand jour 

{impers.). 
se ressembler comme deux gouttes 

d'eau. 
penser ; faillir ; pen s'en faut que 

{impers.). 
se plaire a. 
tenir pour, 
quand bien meme. 
le regime tombe. 
joindre les deux bouts ensemble, 
avoir des papillons noirs. 
mourir pour mourir. 
n'etre que trop porte a. 
le contre pied, 
tenir tete. 
s'y reconnaitre. 
vivoter. 



29. 



to look like (p.), to be like, 

I should like to see it, 

I should like to know, 

I donH like his looks, 

that's very much like my brother, 

it is like enough, 

it looks very like it, 
if you like, 
it is not likely that, 
in all likelihood, 
to listen to reason, 
to take literally, 

little by little, 
ever so little, 
to live loell, 



ressembler a. 

je serais curieux de le voir. 

je voudrais bien savoir. 

*sa mine ne me revient pas. 

*je reconnais bien la mon frere! 

c'est assez vraisemblable, or croy- 

able. 
*cela en a tout I'air. 
*si le coeur vous en dit. 
il n'y a pas d'apparence que. 
selon toute apparence. 
entendre raison. 
prendre {th.) a la lettre, au pied 

de la lettre. 
au fur et a mesure ; petit a petit. 
tant soit pen. 
faire bonne chere. 



216 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to live on or by, 

to live in common, 

to live close by, 

enough to live on, 

to get an honest livelihood, 

to seek a livelihood, 

for a living, 

to make a living, 

to load iDith favors, 

to lock, 

to lock up, 

under lock and key, 

to be long, to tarry, 

to think it so long, 

all his life long, 

all day long, 

in the long run, 

how long loill it be before, 

I long to, 

to long for, to have a longing for, 

to look (to appear), 
to look better (p.), 
to look ill or loell, 
to look like or as if, 

to look very much as if, 

to look, to be, ladylike, 

to look sulky, 

she is very ladylike, 

she almost fell, 

I miss you, 

to miss (til.), 

7nuch good ivould it do, 

a great ncise, 

to stop a noise, to p>ut a stop to, 

to keep repeating the same thing, 

to be . . . nevertheless, 



vivre de. 

faire bourse commune. 

demeurer ici pres. 

de quoi vivre. 

gagner homietement sa vie. 

chercher a gagner sa vie. 

pour vivre. 

gagner sa vie. 

combler de bienfaits. 

fermer a cle or clef. 

mettre sous cle or clef. 

sous clef. 

tarder a. 

trouver le temps si long. 

toute sa vie durant. 

*toute la saint e journee. 

a la longue. 

dans combien de temps. 

il me tarde de. 

avoir un grand desir de ; soupirer 

apres. 
avoir Tair. 
avoir meilleure mine, 
avoir bonne, or mauvaise, mine, 
avoir I'air de; *prendre la tour- 

nure de. 
avoir bien la mine de. 
avoir I'air distingue, 
faire la mine. 

elle a I'air tres comme il faut. 
eile a pense, or failli, tomber. 
vous me manquez. 
perdre. 

la belle avance.- 
un brouhaha, 
mettre la hola. 
un sempiternel refrain, 
ne pas laisser d'etre. 



30. 



to look after or to (th.), 
to look for. 



avoir soin de. 
chercher. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



217 



to look for a knot in a bulrush, 
to look forioard loith pleasure, 
to look on (said of a room, window, 

etc.), 
to look sharp, 
to look about one, 

to look 171, 

to look over, to glance over, 
look about you, take care of your- 
self, beivare, 
one must look before one leaps, 
to keep a sharp lookout, 

by his looks you ivould think he 

loere ill, 
to lose one^s reputation, 
to lose sight of, 
to lose one's temper, 

to sustain, to suffer, to meet ivith 

a loss, 
to be at a loss lohat to say, 
to give (th.) up for lost, 

I have lost my money thereby, 
all is not lost that is delayed, 
that is not lost lohich comes at 

last, 
neither for love nor money, 
to give one's love to, 
to send one's love to, 
to be in love ivith, 
to be in luck, to be lucky, 

to be always in luck, 
to have bad luck, 

to bring good luck, bad luck, 
to have a lucky hand, 
to become bankrupt, 
in good earliest. 



chercher midi a quatorze heures. 
se faire une fete, un plaisir, de. 
donner sar; avoir vue sur. 

avoir I'air e'veille ; se depecher. 
avoir les yeux ouverts; avoir 

Toeil ouvert. 
faire une petite visite ; *dire un 

petit bonjour. 
Jeter les yeux sur ; parcourir. 
prenez garde a vous. 

il y faut regarder a deux fois. 
*etre sur le qui-vive; avoir I'oeil 

ouvert. 
a le voir, vous le croiriez malade. 

se perdre de reputation, 
perdre {p. or th.) de vue. 
perdre son sang-froid ; perdre 

patience, 
essuyer, faire, une perte, en etre 

pour, 
ne savoir que dire, 
regarder (th.) comme i^erdu; en 

faire, or prendre, son deuil. 
*j'en suis pour mon argent, 
ce qui est differe n'est pas perdu, 
il vaut mieux tard que jamais. 

pas pour tout I'or du monde. 

faire ses amities a. 

faire faire ses amities a. 

etre amoureux de. 

etre en bonheur, avoir du bon- 

heur, jouer de bonheur. 
*etre ne coiffe; etre en veine. 
avoir du malheur ; jouer de mal- 

heur ; avoir du guignon. 
porter bonheur, porter malheur. 
avoir la main heureuse. 
faire banqueroute. 
bel et bien. 



218 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



gently I gently ! 
loorse than ever, 



tout beau ! tout doux ! 
de plus belle. 



31. 



to be mad, 

a maid of all loork, 

to make (before an adjectlye), 

to make much of, 

to make out (th.), 

to make it one's duty to, 

to make it up ivith (p.), 

to make the best of, 

to make up for (th.), 

to make up for (th.) by, 

to make up one's mind to, 

to make a fuss, 

to make room or way for, 

to m^ake use of, 

to make one's mouth loater, 

to make money, 

I can make nothing of it, 

to a man, 

manage as you can, 

to miss (p.), 

she missed her footing, 

not to know at all (p.) , 

to commit an error, 

to be deficient, fail, lack, 

you failed in your duty, 

to do a crazy thing, 



etre fou ; avoir perdu la tete. 

une bonne a tout faire. 

reudre. 

faire grand cas de ; faire des 

caresses, des amities, a. 
deviner; trouver; comprendre. 
se faire un devois de. 
se raccommoder, se reconcilier, 

avec. 
tirer parti de ; faire valoir. 
reparer, remplacer. 
se rattraper de [th.) sur. 
prendre le parti de ; se decider, 
faire de I'embarras. 
faire place a. 
se servir de. 

* faire venir I'eau a la bouche a {p.) . 
gagner, amasser, de I'argent. 
je m'y perds, je n'y concois rien, 

j'y perds mon latin, 
jusqu'au dernier, 
arrangez-vous. 
manquer (impers.). 
le pied lui a manque, 
ne connaitre ni d'Eve ni d'Adam. 
manquer. 
manquer de. 

vous avez manque a votre devoir, 
faire un coup de tete, * faire des 

siennes. 



32. 



to bear malice, 

to have good manners, to be polite, 

ivell bred, 
to get married, 
to be master of a language, 



en vouloir a. 

savoir vivre ; avoir du savoir vivre. 

se marier. 

posseder une langue a fond. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



219 



to he the matte?' (th.), 

to be the matter (p.), 

to come to the matter, to the point, 

to find matter, subject, reason, 

as if nothing loere the matter, 

as matters stand, 

to mean, 

to mean loell, 

to mean loell to (p.), 

lohat does that mean? 

by all means, 

he would have it by all means, 

by no means, 

what is meant by ? 

to measure other people^ s corn by 
one^s oion bushel, 

to meddle loith or i7i, to interfere, 

to meet (by chance) , 

to meet (on purpose, by appoint- 
ment) , 

till ive meet again, 

to meet halfioay, to divide the 
difference, 

to meet ivith (an accident) , 

to meet with a refusal, 

to come to meet, 

to meet (expenses, engagements), 

to make both ends meet, 

to have a short memory, 

to the best of my memory, 

within the memory of man, 

do not mention it I 

it is not loorth mentioning, 

he merely took it in his hand, 

as merry as a cricket, 

in the very middle of, 

to be in the midst of lointer, 

loith one's might, 

to mind (th.), 



y avoir, etre question de. 

avoir. 

venir an fait. 

trouver de quoi. 

*comme si de rien n'etait. 

au point oii en sont les choses. 

vouloir dire. 

avoir de bonnes intentions ; etre 

de bonne foi. 
vouloir le bien de. 
qu'est-ce a dire ? 

certainement ; par tons lesmoyens. 
il le voulait a toute force, 
en aucune maniere ; nullement. 
que veut dire ? que signifie ? 
mesurer les autres a son aune. 

se meler de. 

rencontrer. 

rejoindre ; aller trouver ; voir. 

aurevoir; jusqu'au revoir. 

faire chacun la moitie du chemin ; 

se rencontrer a mi-cbemin ; par- 

tager le differend. 
arrive r. 

essuyer un refus. 
venir au-devant de. 
faire face a. 

*joindre les deux bouts ensemble, 
avoir la memoire courte. 
autant qu'il m'en souvienne. 
de memoire d'homme. 
*il n'y a pas de quoi ! 
cela ne vaut pas la peine d'en 

parler. 
il n'a fait que le prendre a la main, 
gai comme un pinson. 
au beau milieu de. 
etre au coeur de I'hiver. 
a tour de bras, 
s'occuper de, faire attention a, 

prendre garde {before a verb). 



220 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to he easy in one^s r)iind, 
to hear in mind, 
to have a mind to, 
to have (th.) in mind, 
to open one's mind to, 
to know one's own mind, 
to change one's mind,, 
to mind trifles, 

to tell one's mind (about some- 
thing unpleasant), 
to have everything to one's mind, 
to dioell upon one's mind, 
to speak one's mind freely, 

you don't knoiv your own mind, 
you will never put that out of my 

mind, 
if you have a mind, 
never mind, 

do not mind him, 

to he this minute {gone, etc.), 

it is no concern of youi^s, 

upon the ivhole, 

to take French leave, 



avoir I'esprit tranquille. 

ne pas oublier. 

avoir en vie de. 

avoir {th.) present a I'esprit. 

s'ouvrir a. 

savoir ce que Ton yeut. 

changer d'avis, d'opinion. 

s'arreter a des bagatelles. 

dire tout ce que Ton a sur le coeur. 

avoir tout a souhait. 

tenir au coeur a. 

dire franchement sa facon de 

penser ; dire sa pensee. 
vous ne savez ce que vous -voulez. 
*vous ne m'oterez jamais cela de 

la tete. 
*si le coeur vous en dit. 
c'est egal! n'importe! pen im- 

porte ! qu'a cela ne tienne. 
ne faites pas attention a lui. 
ne faire que de (partir, etc.). 
cela ne vous regarde pas. 
apres tout, a tout prendre, 
partir a TAnglaise. 



33. 



to mistake for, 

to mistake (th.), to he mistaken 

in, 
to make a mistake, 
hy mistake, 

to mistrust, to douht, to suspect, 
to mix (th.) xoith (th.) , 
spare moments, leisure moments, 

ready money, 

pocket-money, 

this is worth any money, 

to he short ofm^oney, 

to receive money, 

to he worth any money, 



prendre pour. 

se tromper de, sur or dans. 

faire une meprise. 

par megarde. 

se mefier, se defier, de. 

meler {th.) avec {th.). 

moments perdus ; moments de 

loisir. 
argent comptant. 
menus plaisirs. 
ceci a une grande valeur. 
etre, se trouver, court d 'argent, 
recevoir, toucher, de I'argent. 
Ctre impayable. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



221 



to have money about one^s self, 

to have money by, 

to invest money ^ 

to throw away one's money ^ 

to turn everything into money, 

money governs the icorlcl, 

he would make me believe that the 

moon is made of green cheese, 
by moonlight, 
that is moonshine, it is as light as 

air, 
more and more, 
no more of it, 
the more the merrier, 
the more haste, the icorse speed, 
the next morning, 
early in the morning, 

a rolling stone gathers no moss, 

to make the most of, 

he mounted upon his high horse, 

to mourn for (th.), 

as poor as a church mouse, 

by 10 or d of mouth, verbally, 

in everybody' s mouth, 

to move (to stir) , 

to move (from one's residence), 

to be continually on the move, 

to be too much, too bad, 

to be too much or too many, 

for much less, 

as much again, ^ 

to be muddy, 

to muse upon, to dream of, 
by mutual agreement, 
there is some mystery in it, 

that beats all, 
to believe easily, 
to keepj pace with. 



avoir de T argent sur soi. 

avoir de I'argent en caisse. 

placer de I'argent. 

Jeter I'argent par les fenetres. 

faire argent de tout. 

I'argent fait tout. 

*il veut me faire voir des etoiles 

en i3lein midi. 
au clair de la lune. 
*autant en emporte le vent. 

de plus en plus. 

n'en parlous i^lus. 

plus on est de fous, plus on rit. 

plus on se hate, moius on avance. 

le lendemain matin. 

le matin de bonne heure ; de bon 

matin, de grand matin, 
pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de 

mousse, 
tirer parti de ; faire valoir. 
il monta sur ses grands chevaux. 
s'affliger de. 
gueux, pauvre comme un rat 

d'eglise. 
de vive voix. 
tout le monde en parle. 
*bouger. 
demenager. 

ne pouvoir rester en place, 
etre trop fort (de) . 
etre de trop. 
a beaucoup moins. 
line fois autant. 
faire crotte {impers.) y avoir de 

la bone, 
rever a. 
de gre a gre. 
*il y a quelque anguille sous 

roche. 
ceci est impayable. 
prendre pour argent comptant. 
croitre en raison de. 



222 IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 

autant en emporte le vent. 



lightly spoken, lightly broken; 

empty words, 
part payment, 
to pay cash, 



■ payer, donner un a compte. 
payer argent comptant. 



34. 



to nail up a door, a windoiv, 

to hit the nail on the head, 

a narroio mind, 

a narrow understanding , 

that is natural, that comes from 

the heart, 
in its natural state, 
from nature, 
to be good-natured, 
near, nearly, almost, 

to be nearly falling , dying, etc., 

to be not nearly so, 

he is not nearly so proud as you 

say, 
to be as neat as possible, 
to have the necessaries of life, 
to be wider the necessity of, 
to stand in need, to need, 
in case of need, if need be, 
ivhat need is there of 9 

what need you care f 

to have a sort of negligence, care- 
lessness, nonchalance, about 
one, 

to be next door neighbors, 

nevertheless, 

he nevertheless comes to see me, 

ivhat is the neivs ? anything new ? 

no 7iews is good news, 

ivhat next ? 
a nice child, 



condamner une porte, une fenetre. 

*mettre le doigt dessus ; *y etre. 

iin esprit etroit. 

une intelligence bornee. 

cela coule de source. 

au naturel. 

d'apres nature. 

etre d'un bon naturel. 

peu s'en faut, il ne tient a rien, 

que ne (ivith the subjunctive). 
raanquer de tomber, de mourir, 

etc. 
n'etre pas a beaucoup pres aussi. 
il n'est pas a beaucoup pres si fler 

que vous le dites. 
etre tire a quatre epingles. 
avoir le necessaire. 
se voir force de. 
avoir besoin de. 
au besoin ; s'il le faut. 
*quel besoin y a-t-il de ? a quoi 

bon? 
de quoi vous mettez-vous en peine ? 
avoir du laisser-aller. 



demeurer porte a porte. 

ne laisser pas de. 

il ne laisse pas de venir me voir. 

quelles nouvelles y a-t-il? qu'y 
a-t-il de nouveau ? 

point de nouvelles, bonnes nou- 
velles. 

apres ? ensuite ? quoi encore ? 

un srentil enfant. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



223 



a nice ivalk, 

to a nicety, 

in the nick of time, 

by night, in the nighty 

a sleepless night, 

to ivish a good night, 

to stay out all night, 

to pass a sleepless night, 

to sit up all night, 

to say no, 

to talk nonsense, to rave, 



nonsense, 

nor I either, 

to lead by the nose, 

to note down, to take note of, 

good for nothing, 

next to nothing, 

(he got angry) for nothing, 

it is a mere nothing, a trifle, 

as if nothing at all iva the 

matter, 
to amount to nothing, 

to do nothing but, 
to be nothing to (p.), 
to be nothing to (th.), 
to take no notice of, 

to take notice, to observe, 
he took no notice of me, m 

how now 9 vjhat is itf 

now and then, 
without seeming to, 
to be quite dark, 
he is exceedingly rich, 

not to sleep a vjink, 



une promenade agreable. 

a point ; parfaitement. 

a point nomme. 

de nuit, pendant la nuit. 

une nuit d'insomnie ; une nuit 

blanche, 
dire, souhaiter, le bonsoir a. 
ne pas rentrer de toute la nuit. 
*passer une nuit blanche. 
* passer la nuit. 
dire que non. 
deraisonner ; dire des sottises ; 

*dire des betises; *battre la 

camiDagne. 
allons done ! ah bah ! *a d'autres ! 
ni moi non plus. 
*mener par le bout du nez. 
prendre note de. 
bon a rien ; vaurien. 
presque rien. 
*a propos de rien; *a propos de 

bottes. 
*c'est une misere. 
*comme si de rien n'etait. 

n'avancer en rien; ne signifier 

rien. 
ne faire que. 
ne point regarder. 
ne rien faire a. 
ne faire aucune attention a ; ne 

faire semblant de rien. 
remarquer, observer, 
il n'a pas fait semblant de me 

voir, 
qu'est-ce? qu'y a-t-il? eh bien? 

que veut dire ceci ? 
de temj)s en temj)s. 
sans faire semblant de rien. 
faire tout a fait nuit {impers.). 
il est riche comme Cresus, il roule 

dans I'or. 
ne pas fermer roeil. 



224 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



35. 



7)%oney is no object to me, 
to have no objection, 
to oblige, 

to be obliged to (do), 

to be obvious, to be evident, 

as occasion requires, 

there is no occasion, 

there is no occasion, no necessity, 

for it, 
what occasion is therefor, 
on every occasion, 

to have occasion for, to require, 
to have no occasion for, 
to give occasion, 

it occurs to me that, 

odd or even, 

an odd kind of a man, 

an odd volume, 

at odd times, 

to have the odds against one^s self, 

one mile off, 

be off, get away, 

to take offence at, 

hoiv often ? 

hoio old would you take me to be? 

to be old enough to, 

to get, to groiv, old, 

on the right hand, on the left hand, 

say on, 

and so on, 

for once, 

once more, 

to be all one to, 

to be one of us, 

if that be the only obstacle, 

only, merely, 



je ne regarde pas a I'argent. 
ne demander pas mieux que de. 
faire le plaisir a (p.) de {before a 

verb) . 
etre tenu a. 

etre evident ; * sauter aux yeux. 
suivant {or selon) I'occasioii. 
*il n'y a pas de quoi. 
*il n'en est pas besoin ; il n'y a 

pas besoin. 
qu'est-il besoin de {or que) . 
a tout propos ; * a tout bout de 

champ, 
avoir besoin de. 
n'avoir que faire de. 
donner lieu or sujet de {before a 

verb). 
il me vient a I'idee que. 
pair ou non. 

un bomme singulier, bizarre, 
un volume depareille. 
dans les moments perdus. 
avoir affaire a forte partie. 
a un mille d'ici, de la. 
allez-vous-en. 

s'offenser, se piquer, se facher. 
combien de fois ? 
quel age me donneriez-vous? 
etre d'age a, o?' en age de. 
vieillir ; se faire vieux. 
a main droite, a main gauche, 
dites tou jours. 

et ainsi de suite ; et ainsi du reste. 
une fois dans (votre) vie; une 

bonne fois. 
encore une fois ; encore un coup, 
etre egal a; etre la meme chose 

pour, 
etre des notres. 
s'il ne tient qu'a cela. 
ne faire que. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



225 



at the first onset, at once, 

that loindoio does not open, 

let us speak openly, 

to speak openly, 

to do it openly, 

in my opinion, 

to he of opinion, 

to have a fair opportunity, 

to miss, to let slip, the opportunity , 

to seize the opportunity, to take 

time by the forelock, 
you will never have a fairer 

opportunity, 
to oppose (th.), 
to he out Q).), 
to he out (fire) , 
to he out of order, 
to over-excite (p.), 
to overrate (th.) , 
to pay (p.) hack in his own coin^ 
you must not he so particular , 
a coach and pair, 
to point out (th.) to (p.), 
as poor as a church mouse, 
poverty is no crime, 
as much as lies in my power, 

on or under pretence o/, 
he is a hoohy. 



d'emblee. 

cette feuetre ne s'ouvre pas 

parlons a coeur ouvert. 

parler a coeur ouvert. 

ne point s'en cacher. 

a mon avis ; selon moi. 

etre d'avis. 

avoir beau jeu. 

manquer, laisser echapper, lais- 

ser passer, Toccasion. 
^prendre I'occasion aux cheveux. 

* vous ne Faurez jamais plus belle. 

mettre de rempechement a. 

etre sorti. 

etre eteint. 

etre derange. 

monter la tete a {p.). 

attacher trop d'importance a. 

Prendre la pareille a {p.). 

il n'y faut pas regarder de si pres. 

une voiture a deux chevaux. 

faire observer {th.) a (p.). 

pauvre comme un rat d'eglise. 

pauvrete n'est pas vice. 

autant qu'il est en mon pouvoir ; 

de tout mon pouvoir. 
sous pretexte de ; sous couleur de. 
c'est une cruche. 



36. 



to pack up, 

to take o.part in, 

to part with ov from (p.), 

to part with or from (th.), to give 

up, 
the most difficult part is over, 
to he particular, 
to he particular in or ahout, 

to go to a party, 
Q 



faire sa malle. 
prendre part a, or dans. 
se separer de ; quitter, 
se defaire de ; ceder. 

le plus fort est fait. 

y regarder de pres ; tenir a. 

etre difiicile sur; etre exigeant 

pour, 
aller en soiree, 



226 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to he a small party offriends^ 
to pass round, to hand round y 

to he too patient, 

to hear one's misfortunes patiently, 
he wanted to make a cat's paw of 

me, 
to pay to the uttermost farthing , 
to pay a hill when due, 
to pay attention to, 
to pay the carriage or postage, 
to pay no regard to (th.), 
to pay a visit to, 
to pay one's respects to, 
whoever does the damage must 

pay for it, 
no performance I 
at his peril, 
to yield to persuasion, 
one may pick and choose, 
to he in a fine pickle, to get into a 

scrape or dilemma, 
to have a finger in the pie, 
to tear into pieces, 

I had to swallow that pill, 

take council of your pillow, or 

sleep on itj 
it is a thousand pities, 

it is a pity, 

it is a great pity, 

the more is the pity, so much the 

worse, 
to have, to take, pity on; to shoiv 

pity to, 
to take place, to happen, 
in the first place, 
in the next place, 
in the last place, 
it is your place to^ 



etre en petit comite. 

faire passer de main en main ; 

faire passer a la ronde. 
*se laisser tondre la laine sur le 

dos. 
prendre son mal en patience. 

* il voulait me faire tirer les mar- 

rons du feu. 
*payer rubis sur I'ongle. 
payer un billet a I'echeance. 
faire attention a. 
affranchir. 

n 'avoir aucun egard a. 
rendre une visite a ; faire visite a. 
pre'senter ses respects a. , 
*qui casse les verres les paie. 

relache ! 

a ses risques et perils, 
se rendre a 1' evidence. 
*il y a a prendre et a laisser. 
*etre, s'etre mis, dans de beaux 
draps. 

* avoir la main a la pate, 
mettre en pieces; dechirer en 

morceaux. 
*il m'a fallu avaler cette pilule 

{or cette couleuvre) . 
la nuit porte conseil. 

c'est grand dommage; c'est bien 

facbeux. 
c'est dommage (de). 
c'est bien dommage (de). 
tant pis. 

avoir, prendre, pitie de; avoir 

compassion de. 
avoir lieu, arriver, se passer, 
d'abord ; en premier lieu, 
pais ; ensuite. 
enfin ; en dernier lieu, 
c'est a vous de. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



227 



in plain terms, 

the plain truth, 

to make (th.) plain, 

to play on the piano, 
to play a game at, 
as you please, 

if I please, 

loill you please sit doivn, 

to be pleased ivith, 

to be pleased ivith one's self, 

to do ivhat one pleases, to have 

full, free scope, 
to take, to find, pleasure in, 

to pledge one's honor, 

to be so polite as to, 

there is no possibility of, 

to take pot-luck, 

to be in one's poioer (impers.) , 

to have extensive power, 

to give full poioers, 

to practise (music), 

to speak in praise of, 

to preclude one's self from, 

to prejudice a person's mind, 

to be prejudiced against, 

she did not fail to, 

to spend money freely , 

to send notice, 

all is over, 

it is all over ivith him, 



en termes tres-clairs; *en bon 

fran9ais. 
la pure verite ; la f rauche verite. 
expliquer, eclaircir, faire toucher 

{th.) au doigt et a I'ceil. 
jouer du piano, 
faire une partie de. 
comme bon vous semble ; comme 

vous voudrez. 
si cela me plait, 
donnez-vous la peine de vous as- 

seoir. 
etre content, satisfait, charm e, de. 
*etre content de sa petite per- 

sonne. 

* avoir ses coudees f ranches. 

prendre plaisir, se plaire, a; 

trouver du plaisir dans, 
en donner sa parole d'honneur; 

jurer sur son honneur. 
avoir I'honnetete de. 
11 n'y a pas moyen de. 

* diner a la fortune du pot. 

ne tenir qu'a (p.) de (impers.). 

* avoir les bras longs. 

* donner carte blanche, 
etudier. 

faire I'eloge de. 

se priver de. 

monter la tete a (p.). 

etre prevenu contre. 

elle ne se fit pas faute de. 

ne pas regarder a I'argent. 

faire part de. 

tout est fini. 

e'en est fait de lui. 



to be presumptuous, 
to pretend to be, 
to pretend to, 



37. 



ne douter de rien. 

faire le, la, les. 

faire semblant de ; feindre de. 



228 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHEASES. 



to pretend to great tnatters^ 

that pretended doctor^ 

there is a pretty quantity of it, 

to prevail on (p.) to, 

to prevent (p. or th.), 

at any ijrice, 

the loivest price, 

to pride one^s self on (th.) , to take 

pride in, 
to he in the prime of life, 
to act up to one's principles, 

to proceed to (a place) , 

to proceed icith (a journey, etc.), 

to form idle projects, 

to proinise ivonders, to promise 

mountains of gold, 
to he proof against, 
to have, to feel, a propensity 

towards, 
if you think proper, 
properly speaking, 
a prophet has no honor in his oivn 

country, 
in proportion as, 
in proportion, 

man proposes and God disposes, 
to have a very fine prospect, 
to prove, to hecome, 
to prove true or to he true, 
all proved in vain, 
it is not within my province or 

sphere, 
to lay in provisions, 
without provocation, loantonly, 
to pull the hell, 
to he a mere puppet, 
for the purpose of, 
on purpose, 

to no purpose, uselessly, 
it is nothing to the purpose, 

to talk to the purpose, 



faire I'homme d'importance. 

ce soi-disant medecin. 

il n'y en a pas mal. 

engager, decider (p.) a. 

empecher. 

a tout prix ; coute que coiite. 

le plus juste prix. 

se faire gloire or honneur, se 

glorifier, de. 
etre a la fleur de I'age. 
agir, se conduire, suivant ses 

principes. 
se rendre a. 
reprendre; continuer. 
faire des projets en I'air. 
promettre mouts et merveilles. 

etre a I'epreuve de. 
avoir du penchant pour. 

si bon vous semble. 

a proprement parler. 

nul n'est prophete en son pays. 

a mesure que. 

au fur et a mesure. 

rhomme propose et Dieu dispose. 

* etre en fort belle passe. 

devenir. 

se trouver vrai, se realiser. 

tout fut en vain. 

cela n'est pas de mon ressort. 

faire ses provisions. 

de gaiete de coeur. 

tirer la sonnette, sonner. 

etre un vrai mannequin. 

dans le but de. 

expres. 

sans effet ; en pure perte. 

cela ne dit rien ; cela ne fait rien, 

cela ne signifie rien, 
parler a propos, 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



229 



to he nothing to the purpose, 
to he to no purpose, 
to ansiver various purposes, 
to push 07ie's self forward, 
to put hy or aside, to lay hy, 
to put the cart hefore the horse, 
to put an end to, 
to put in mind, 

to put off, to postpone, 

to put out of joint, to dislocate, 

to put on one's hat, 

to put one' s self out for , 

to put up at (a hotel), 

to put up (p.) to it, 

to put up with (to bear, to endure) , 

to put up icith (to be satisfied with) , 

to put up with an affront, 

to he puzzled, 

to question (p.)? 

to question (th.), 

that is without question, as a 

matter of course, 
to postpone indefinitely, 
extravagantly dear, 
to hefarfro'in, 
to hroach a suhject. 



*ne faire rien a I'affaire. 

n'aboutir a rien. 

servir a plusieurs usages. 

se pousser. 

mettre a part or de cote ; epargner. 

mettre la charrue devant les boeuf s. 

mettre fin a ; faire cesser. 

rappeler (th.) a (p.) ; faire res- 
souvenir (p.) de. 

remettre ; ajourner. 

se demettre. 

se couvrir. 

se deranger pour. 

descendre a. 

mettre (p.) au fait; *donner le 
mot a. 

essuyer; souffrir; supporter. 

se contenter de ; se soumettre a. 

*boire un affront. 

etre bien embarrasse. 

faire des questions a. 

douter de ; mettre {th.) en doute. 

*cela va sans dire. 

*renYoyer aux calendes grecques. 
hors de prix. 
s'en falloir de beaucoup. 
toucher quelques mots a. 



38. 



to he a question of, 

to call in question, ^ 

as quick as lightning, 

to he quick, 

to he quick in one's proceedings, 

to he quiet, 

to he quits, 

to rack one's hrain ahout (th.), 

within a radius of (tico miles), 

to he all the rage, 

the storm is raging, 



s'agir de; etre question de 

{impers.). 
mettre, revoquer, en doute. 
prompt comme I'eclair. 
se depecher. 
*aller vite en besogne. 
rester tranquille. 
etre quittes. 

se mettre I'esprit a la torture pour 
a (deux milles) a la ronde. 
faire fureur. 
il fait un temps affreux. 



230 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to rain fast f to pour, 

small 7'ain lays great dust, 

it is raining cats and dogs, 

to talk at random, 

to ransack one's brains, 

to be in raptures, 

at any rate, cost ichat it may, 

at the rate of, 

at the rate he goes on, 

to walk at a great rate, 

to have rather, 

to reach (th.), 

to reach (a place), 

within reach, out of reach, 

he is out of reach, 

the letter reached me, 

I have reached it noio, 

to bring up the rear, 

to have reason, cause, 

to have every reason to, 

to have reason to be satisfied loith, 

to give reason, room, cause, 

loith good reason, 

with still greater reason, 

another reason why, 

it stands to reason, 

there is reason to suppose that . . ., 

to be reasonable, 

he will not go, he has his reasons 

for it, 
for reasons best knoion to myself, 
to receive injury (goods) , 
short reckonings make long 

friends, 
I cannot recollect his name at 

present, 
to the best of my recollection, 
to have recourse to, 

to recover from illness, 
to recover one's senses, 
to reduce one' s pretensions, 



pleuvoir a verse (impers.). 

petite pluie abat grand vent. 

*il pleut des hallebardes. 

parler a tort et a travers. 

se mettre I'esprit a la torture. 

*etre aux anges. 

a tout prix, cotite que coute, 

a raison de. 

*au train dont il y va. 

marcher a grands pas. 

aimer mieux. 

atteindre. 

arriver a. 

a la portee, hors de la portee. 

on ne pent pas le rejoiudre ; il est 

hors d'atteinte. 
la lettre m'est parvenue. 
m'y voila arrive, 
fermer la marche. 
avoir sujet or lieu de. 
avoir tout lieu de. 
avoir a se louer de. 
donner sujet or lieu de. 
a bon droit. 

a plus forte raison. ' 

raison de plus pour, 
le simple bon sens le veut ainsi. 
il y a lieu de croire que . . . 
entendre raison. 
*il n'ira pas, et pour cause. 

pour raisons a moi connues. 

etre endonimage. 

les bons comptes font les bons 

amis, 
son nom ne me revient pas. 

autant qu'il m'en souvient. 
avoir recours a {p. or th.), en 

venir a (th.). 
relever de maladie. 
re venir a soi. 
* mettre de I'eau dans son vin. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



231 



to refer to (p.), 

to give (p.) a reference to, 

in reference to, In or loith regard to, 
to have respectable references, 
good recommendations, 

to reflect credit on, 

upon reflection, on second 

thoughts, 
to do (th.) loith due reflection, 
to give aflat refusal, 
to meet with a refusal, 
to have, to show, regard for, 
regard being had to, 
my kind regards to, 
as regular as clock-ioorTc, 
in the reign of, 
to rejoice at, 
to relate to (th.), 
to relax one's mind after loorJc, 
with reluctance, 
to fail, 

she cannot help it, 
it is interesting to see, you ought 

to see, 
to be resigned, 



s'en remettre a; s'en rapporter a. 
renvoyer {p.) a; fouruir de bons 

renseiguements. 
par rapport a. 
pouvoir donner de bons renseigne- 

ments ; avoir de bounes recom- 

mandations. 
faire bonne ur a. 
toute reflexion faite. 

faire {th.) a tete repose'e. 

refuser net. 

essuyer un refus. 

avoir, temoigner, des egards pour. 

eu egard a. 

mes amities a ; mille cboses a. 

*reg] e comme un pa^Dier de musique. 

sous le regne de. 

se rejouir de. 

avoir rapport a, se rapporter a. 

se distraire. 

a contre-coeur. 

manquer. 

c'est plus fort qu'elle. 

il faut voir. 

prendre son parti de. 



39. 



to rely on or upon, 

rely upon it, 

to remember, ^ 

to remember (p.) kindly to (p.), 



if I remember rightly, 

give my kind remembrance to 

him, 
to the best of my remembrance, 
to remind (p.) of. 



se fier a (p.) ; compter sur {p. or 

th.), 
comptez-y ! comptez la-dessus ! 
se souvenir de (p. or th.) ; se rap- 

peler (th.) ; se remettre (p.)- 
rappeler Q;.) au bon souvenir de; 

dire a (p.) bien des choses de 

la part de (p.). 
si j'ai bonne memoire. 
dites-lui mille choses (or bien des 

choses) de ma part, 
autant que je puis m'en souvenir, 
rappeler (th.) a (p.). 



232 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to remove the cloth, 

to repair to (a place) , 

to he quick in one's repartees^ 

it is reported that, 
they are mere reports, 
to reproach (generally), 
to reproach (p.) for or loith, 
to reprove (p.) gently, 
to take a resolution to, 
it is a firm resolution, 
to resolve to, 

with respect to (th.), 

with respect to (p.), 

in that respect, 

it is a want of respect, 

respecting, 

in all respects, 

in some respects, 

it respects, regards, concerns, 

among the rest, 

there is no enjoyment when one 

is under restraint, 
to he under restraint, 
to put a violent restraint upon 

one's self, 
let us resume our discourse, let us 

return to our subject, 
to retrench from, 
to return immediately ^ 
to have returned, 
to review, 
as rich as a Jeio, 
to get rid of, 
to ride, 
to take a ride, a drive, 

to ride, to drive, through {a place) , 

to give cause for ridicule, 
to make one's self ridiculous. 



oter le couvert. 

se rendre a. 

avoir la repartie promi)te; etre 

vif a la riposte, 
on dit ; le bruit court que. 
*ce sont des on dit. 
faire des reproches a (p.). 
reprocher {th.) a {p.). 
reprendre {p.) avec bonte. 
se mettre sur le pied de. 
c'est un parti pris. 
se resoudre a ; se determiner a ; se 

decider a ; prendre le parti de. 
par rapport a ; quant a. 
a regard de. 
a cet egard. 

c'est un manque d'egards. 
a regard de. 
a to us egards. 
sous quelques rapports, 
il s'agit de. 
entre autres. 
ou il y a de la gene il n'y a pas de 

plaisir. 
se gener, se contraindre. 
se faire violence. 

re venous a nos moutons. 

prendre sur. 

ne faire qu'aller et venir. 

etre de retour. 

faire la revue, passer en revue. 

riche comme un Cresus. 

se debarrasser, se defaire, de. 

aller a clieval. 

faire une promenade a cheval, 

en voiture. 
parcourir (un endroit) a clieval, 

en voiture. 
prefer an ridicule. 
se rendre la fable, la risee, de 

tout le monde. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



233 



to do nothing right, 

to he 7Hght to, 

that served him right ! 

to have a right to, 

right or lorong, 

right and wrong, iJidiscriminately, 

my ears are ringing, tingling, 

to rise from (meals), 

at your risk, 

to roast, 

to roll in riches, 

to make room for, 

to clean the room, 

you must not rouse the sleeping 

lion, let sleeping dogs lie, 
to make a row ivith, 
rude behavior, 
to be on the brink of ruin, 
there is no rule without exception, 

a rumor abroad, 
to run aioay. 



to run one's head against, 

to run, to glance, over (a book), 

to run over (p.), 

to run through one' s property , 

to run up and down, 

all of us, 

good and bad together, 

ill future, 

to jog on, 

not half that loas necessary, 
at sunrise, 



ne faire rien qui vaille. 

avoir raison de. 

*c'est bien fait ! | c'est paiD benit. 

avoir le droit de. 

a tort ou a raison. 

a tort et a travers. 

*les oreilles me tinteut. 

sortir de. 

a vos risques et perils, 

faire rotir. 

nager dans I'opulence, Tor. 

faire place a. 

faire la chambre. 

il ne faut pas eveiller le chat qui 
dort. 

*faire une scene a (p.). 

une conduite grossiere. 

etre a deux doigts de sa perte. 

il n'y a point de regie sans ex- 
ception. 

un bruit qui court. 

s'enfuir ; ^prendre la clef des 
champs; *prendre ses jambes 
a son cou. 

donner de la tete contre. 

Jeter les yeux sur ; parcourir . 

passer sur le corps a. 

manger son bien. 

courir 9a et la. 

tons tant que nous sommes. 

tant bons que mauvais. 

a ravenir. 

*aller son petit train, son petit 
bonhomme de chemin. 

il n'en fallait pas la moitie. 

au lever du soleil. 



to be safe, 

to arrive safely, 

no sooner said than done, 



40. 



etre en surete, bors de danger, 
arriver a bon port ; arriver sans 

accident, 
aussitot dit aussitot fait. 



234 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to have a saily 

to set sail, 

to he a good sailor, 

for the sake of, 

it is not for your sake, 

I do the same, 

show us a sample of your skill, 

to demand, to give, satisfaction 
for, 

to have, to take, to obtain, satis- 
faction for, 

to be, to remain, satisfied icith (th.), 

to be satisfied about, 

to be satisfied about it, 

to be satisfied loith the truth of (th.) , 

to satisfy (p.) fully, 

to serve (p.) loith the same sauce, 

to be saucy, 

it is so much saved out of the fire, 

to say (th.) in (j^.) face, 

that is to say, 

so to say, if I may say so, 

I can scarcely, 

to put (p.) on a lorong scent, 

to be upon the scent, 
to be a scholar, 

to have full, free, scope, 

to get out of a scrape, 

lohat a scrawl I 

to scream, 

to scruple at or to, 

not to be over-scrupulous, 

at sea, 

by the seaside, 



se promener, f aire une promenade, 

en bateau, 
mettre a la voile ; partir. 
f aire un bon mariu ; avoir le pied 

marin. 
pour I'amour de. 

*ce n'est pas pour vos beaux yeux. 
c'est ce que je fais. 
donnez-nous un echantillon de 

votre savoir-faire, 
demander, donner or faire raison 

de {th.) a (p.). 
avoir or tirer raison de. 

se contenter de. 

etre satisfait ; avoir I'esprit en 

repos sur. 
en avoir le coeur net. 
etre convaincu de la verite de. 
ne laisser rien a desirer a (p.). 

* payer {p.) de la meme monnaie. 

* faire Timpertinent. 

* c'est autant de pris sur Tennemi. 
*dire {th.) au nez de, a la barbe 

de. 
c'est-a-dire. 
pour ainsi dire, 
j'ai de la peine a. 
donner le change a ; faire prendre 

le change a. 
etre sur la voie. 
etre homme de lettres; etre fort 

instruit. 
avoir libre carriere ; * avoir les 

coudees f ranches, 
se tirer d'embarras, d'affaire, d'un 

mauvais pas. 

* quels pattes de mouche! 

Jeter, or pousser, un cri, or des oris, 
se faire scrupule de. 

* avoir la conscience large, 
en mer. 

au bord de la mer. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



235 



pray he seated! 

to second a motion^ 

to he second to none^ 

to huy (th.) second handf 

the secret is out, 

to keep o?ie's views, designs, secret, 

to he security for, 

to see (p.) to the door, 

to see (p.) home, 

to see through it, 

not to see at cdl, 

to see ichat (p.) means, 

to let see, to show, 

let me see ! let us see ! 

we shall see that ! 

loithout seeming to oh serve, 

as it seems, 

you are not fit to he seen, 

against all common sense, 

he sees no farther than the end of 

his nose, 
a long series of reproaches, 
seriously, joking aside or apart, 
I cannot understand, 
to do as much as to, 
a godsend, a vnndfall, a treasure 

trove, 
a stampede, 
to take no end of trouhle. 



veuillez vous asseoir ; donnez-vous 

la peine de vous asseoir. 
appuyer une motion, 
ne le ceder a personue. 
acheter (th.) de rencontre, de 

hasard. 
*on a decouvert le pot au rose, 
cacher, or couvrir, son jeu. 
repondre pour. 

conduire (p.) jusqu'a la porte. 
reconduire (p.) chez lui. 
voir ce que c'est. 
*n'y voir goutte. 
voir venir (p.). 
f aire voir (th.) a (p.). 
voyons ! 
c'est ce que nous allons voir ; nous 

verrons bien. 
sans faire semblant de rien. 
a ce qu'il parait. 
*vous n'etes pas presentable, 
en depit du bon sens. 
*il ne Yoit pas plus loin que le 

bout de son nez. 
*une kyrielle de reproches. 
raillerie a part. 
j'y perds mon latin, 
faire taut que de. 
une bonne trouvaille. 

un sauve qui pent. . 
*se mettre en quatre pour. 



41. 



to serve for or as, 
to serve one right, 
it serves him right, 
to do service to, 
to he of any service to, 
the way to set ahout it, 
to set ahout (th.), 



servir de. 

traiter (p.) comme (il) le merite. 
c'est bien fait! il ne I'a pas vole I 
rendre service cr un service a. 
etre utile a, servir. 
la maniere de s'y prendre, 
se mettre a, s'occuper de, se mettre 
a faire. 



236 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to set about it, 

to set fire to, 

to set up for, 

to set up again, 

to set a good example to, 

to set (p.) at ease, 

to set a-going, 

to set to rights, 

to be set on, to be bent on, 

to settle an account, 

to settle to (th.), 

to get settled, to find a situation, 

a berth, 
a severe cold in the head, 
to shade one's self from, 
to shake hands, 

to shame, 
it's a shame ! 
for shame I 
to share in, 

to shelter one's self from, 
not to know what shift to make, 
to be put to one's last shift. 



to be shipwrecked, 

to shiver with cold, 

to be, to stand, in (p.) shoes, 

to walk in (p.) shoes, 

if you icere in my shoes, 

to go shopping, 

to be short of, 

should he happen to knoiv, 

to shoio one's face, 

to show (p.) in, 

to shoio (th.), 

to make a great shoio of, 

to shrink from, 

to shut the door in one's face^ 

to shut in or up^ 

to be sick, 



s'y prendre. 

mettre le feu a. 

se donner pour ; faire ; s'eriger en. 

remettre sur pied. 

donner a {p.) un bon exemple. 

mettre {p.) a I'aise. 

*faire aller; donner le branle. 

remettre tout a fait ; remettre en 

ordre. 
etre determine a. 
arreter un compte. 
s'arreter, se fixer, a. 
se caser. 

un gros rhume de cerveau. 

se mettre a I'abri de. 

donner, se donner, une poignee de 

mains, 
faire honte a. 
c'est honteux ! 
fi done ! fi ! 
avoir part a. 
se mettre a I'abri de. 
* ne savoir de quel bois faire fleche ; 

*ne savoir a quel saint se vouer ; 

ne savoir ou donner de la tete ; 

en etre aux expedients, 
faire naufrage. 
grelotter de froid. 
etre a la place de {p.). 
courir sur les brisees de. 
si vous etiez a ma place, 
aller faire des emplettes. 
manquer de ; etre court de. 
s'il venait a savoir. 
se montrer, paraitre. 
faire entrer. 
faire voir {th.) a (p.). 
faire parade de. 
reculer devant. 
fermer la porte au nez. 
enfermer. 
avoir mal au coeur. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



237 



to he sick of (th.), 

to he sea-sick, 

to side lolth, 

to side against, 

to take the light, or the lorong, side, 

to attack (p.) on his weak side, 

I am on your side, 
the right side {of a stuff, etc.), 
the wrong side {of a stuff\ etc.), 
everything has a wrong and a 

right side, 
on hoth sides, 
to hear hoth sides, 
a grand sight, 
out of sight, out of mind, 
to silence, 

silence gives consent, 
I cannot guess it, 
don't do it, 

to laugh in one's sleeve, 
not to know what to say, 



etre degotite ; etre las de. 

avoir le mal de mer. 

etre du parti de. 

etre contre. 

prendre le boD, or le mauvais, cote. 

prendre {p.) par son endroit 

sensible, 
je suis des votres. 
I'endroit (d'une etoffe, etc.). 
I'envers (d'une etoffe, etc.). 
cbaque medaille a son revers. 

de part et d'autre. 

* entendre les deux cloches. 

un spectacle superbe. 

loin des yeux, loin du coeur. 

imposer silence a ; fermer la 

bouche a. 
qui ne dit mot, consent, 
j'y perds mon latin, 
n'en faites rien. 

rire dans la barbe, rire sous cape, 
ne savoir que dire. 



42. 



to sit down (to meals), 

to sit for one's portrait, 

to sit up loith a sick person, 

to sit close, 

to he out of a situation, 

to try one's skill, 

to he nothiiig hut skin and hone, 

to he a skinflint, 

to sleep (in such a place or such 

a bed) , 
to sleep soundly (securely), 
to sleep like a top, 
to sleep very late, 
to start out of one's sleep, 
sleep upon it, 
to pretend to he sleeping, 



se mettre a table, 
poser pour son portrait, 
veiller un malade. 
se serrer. 
etre sur le pave, 
essay er son savoir-faire, 
n'avoir que la peau et les os; 
* avoir la peau eollee sur les os. 
*tondre un oeuf. 
coucher. 

dormir sur les deux oreilles. 
*dormir comme une marmotte. 
dormir la grasse matinee, 
s'eveiller en sursaut. 
la nuit porte conseil. 
faire semblant de dormir. 



238 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



he loho steeps dines, 

to slip, to make a slip, 

to slip aioay from the company, 

to give the slip to, 

to he too sloio (a clock, etc.), 

on the sly, by stealth, 

a smart answer, a cutting answer, 

a smart reply, 

a smart saying, 

to smell close, 

he is all smiles and kindness, 

there is no smoke loithoutfire, 

there is a snake in the grass 

(figurative) , 
to lay a snare for (p.), 
to fall into a snare, 
it snoivs, 
there has been a heavy fall of 

snoiv, 
Mr. so and so, 
if so, 
so far so good, 

and so on, and so forth, 

somehow, 

somehoiv or other, 

very sorry, 

a strange sort of a man, 

to call a spade a spade, 

to have no time to spare, to lose, 

to have some spare time, 

to have to spare, 

to spare (p.) the hearing of (th.), 

to speak for itself, 

to speak highly of, 

to speak plainly , 

to begin to speak, 

to speak for the rest, 

not to speak any more of, 

it is my turn to speak, 

to speak the truth, 



qui dort dine, 
faire un faux pas. 
fausser compagnie. 

* faire faux boud a (p.). 
retarder. 

en cachette. 

une reponse mordante. 

une vive replique. 

un mot fin. 

sentir le renferme. 

*il fait patte de velours. 

*il n'y a pas de fume'e sans feu. 

*il y a quelque anguille sous roche. 

tendre, dresser, un piege a (p.). 
donner dans un piege. 
il neige ; il tombe de la neige. 
il est tombe beaucoup de neige. 

M. un tel. 

s'il en est ainsi ; si c'est ainsi. 

cela va bien jusqu'ici ; jusqu'a 

present cela ne va pas mal. 
et ainsi de suite, 
tant bien que mal. 
on ne sait comment, 
tresfache; desole. 
*un drole d'homme ; *un drole de 

corps, 
appeler un chat un chat, 
n 'avoir pas de temps a perdre. 

* avoir de la marge. 

en avoir de reste ; en avoir plus 

qu'il n'en faut." 
faire a (p.) grace de (th.). 
parler tout seul ; parler de sol. 
dire du bien de. 
parler franchement. 
prendre la parole, 
porter la parole, 
tirer le rideau sur. 
j'ai la parole, 
dire la verite. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



239 



too long speeches, 

full speed, 

God speed you ! 

to spend (money), 

to spend money in cm extravagant 

manner, 
to spend (time), 
a spendthrift, 
in high spirits, 
to be in high spirits, 
to revive (p.) S2)iriis, to cheer, 
to have a spite, a pique, against 

(p), 

to split the difference, 

he is a very good spoil-sport, a 

marplot, 
in loanton sport, loith a cheerful 

heart, 
to buy cheap, 
to go to bed, 
do help me, 

to mxike a good bargain^ 
to be pretty well, 
to be part of, 
nevertheless, 

to come to the same thing, 
to set the table for six, 
to take unawares, 



des discours a perte d'haleine. 

ventre a terre ; a toutes jambes. 

Dieu vous protege ! 

depenser. 

Jeter I'argent par les fenetres. 

passer. 

un panier perce, un mange-tout. 

en grande gaiete; fort en train. 

*etre en train ; etre tres-gai. 

reraonter le courage a {p.). 

en vouloir a; *avoir une dent 

contre. 
partager le differend par la moitie. 
*c'est un vrai rabat-joie. 

de gaiete de coeur. 

acheter a bon marclie. 

se coucher. 

donnez moi done un coup de main. 

faire un bon marche. 

aller tout doucement. 

laire partie de. 

tout de meme. 

rcvenir au meme. 

m.ttre six converts. 

prendre au deporvu. 



43. 



to make sport, to banter about, 

to make sport of ov ivith (p.), 

on the spot, 

up stairs, down stairs, 

to show, to send, to ask (p.) up 

stairs, 
a private staircase, 
his life, his honoris at stake, 
you play for a great stake, 
to stamp (letters, etc.), 
to put a postage stamp to a letter, 
to be of the right stamp f 



badiner sur. 

se moquer, se jouer de. 

sur les lieux ; sur-le-cliamp. 

en haut, en bas. 

faire monter. 

un escalier derobe. 

il y va de sa vie, de son honneur. 

vous jouez gros jeu. 

timbrer. 

affrancliir une lettre. 

*etre marque au bon coin. 



240 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to stand out against^ to cope 

with, 
to stand by (to defend) , 
to stand for, 

to stand to (an opinion) , to stick to, 
to stand upon ceremony j 
to stand staring, 
to stand, to endure, 
to come to a stand, to a stop, 
hoio can one stand it ? 
I cannot stand it, 
as matters stand, 

to sit, to stand, still, 

to befriends of old standing, 

and so it stands now, 

to stare at, on, upon, 

to stare, to look (p.) in the face, 

to be ill-starred, 

to start out of one's sleep, 

to get the start, 

to have the start of (p.) by {two 

hours) , 
to start, 

you startled me, 
to make a stay, 
to step out of (a carriage) , 
step by step, 
within a step of, 
to stick, to hold to, to keep to, 
a stitch in time saves nine, 

not to stir out, 

to leave no stone unturned, 

not to leave one stone standing on 

another, 
a rolling stone gathers no moss, 

to put a stop to, 

after a storm comes a calm, 
the best of the story, 
an old woman'' s story, 



tenir tete a, resister a. 

soutenir, defendre, tenir pour. 

tenir lieu de. 

s'en tenir a. 

*faire des ceremonies. 

faire, ouvrir, de grands yeux. 

supporter. 

s'arreter ; faire une pause. 

comment peut-on y tenir ? 

je n'y tiens plus. 

sur le pied {or au point) ou en sont 

les choses. 
r ester tranquille. 
etre amis de vieille date. 
Yoila oil en sont les choses. 
regarder fixement. 
regarder {p.) en face, 
etre ne sous une mauvaise etoile. 
s'eveiller en sursaut. 
prendre les devants. 
avoir (deux heures) d'avance sur 

tressaillir. 

vous m'avez fait peur. 

faire un sejour. 

descendre de. 

pas a pas. 

a deux pas de. 

s'en tenir a. 

*un point fait a temps en sauve 

mille. 
*ne pas bouger de chez sol. 
remuer ciel et terre. 
ne pas laisser pierre sur pierre. 

pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de 

mousse, 
mettre fin a ; faire cesser ; en finir 

avec. 
apres la pluie le beau temps, 
le plus beau de I'histoire. 
une histoire de bonne femme. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



241 



the same story over again ! 
the story goes onto say, 
as the story goes, 
straight along, 
as straight as a dart, 

you should do it in a straight- 
forward way, 
strange to say, to relate! 
he is a stranger to 7ne, 

at a stretch, 

strictly speaking, 

to be striking, to he evident, 

to have two strings to one's how, 

to strive loith all one's might, 

it has struck one, 

to study, to he undergoing a com- 
plete course of education, 
to study hard, 
it is very stupid, 
as stupid as an oicl, 

to make sure of, 

to keep (p.) in suspense, 

to sivarm with, 

to sioear hy all that is good, 

to draio the sivord, 

to put to the sword, 

it is cut out of the whole cloth, 

you can't have too much of a good 

thing, 
that goes against the gratn, 
to hit hard, 
to scream, yell. 



^toujours la meme chanson! 

on ajoute. 

a ce que dit Thistoire. 

tout droit. 

*droit comme un jonc, un i, un 

cierge. 
* il ne f aut pas y aller par quatre 

chemins. 
chose etrange ! 
*je ne le connais ni d'Eve ni 

d'Adam. 
tout d'une haleine ; d'un trait, 
a proprement parler. 
*sauter aux yeux. 
avoir deux cordes a son arc. 
suer sang et eau. 
il est une heure sonnee ; une heure 

est sonnee. 
faire ses etudes. 

travailler ferme ; *piocher. 

*c'est bien bete. 

*bete comme une oie ; sot comme 

une buse. 
s'assurer de. 
tenir {p.) ensuspens; *tenir (p.) 

le bee dans I'eau. 
etre rempli de. 
*jurer ses grands dieux. 
mettre Tepee a la main, 
passer au fil de I'epee. 
c'est un conte fait a plaisir. 
abondance de biens ne nuit pas. 

le coeur ne lui en dit pas. 

ne pas y aller de main morte. 

crier a tue-tete. 



to succeed to, to come after, 
to succeed, to he successful, 
his hook did not succeed. 



44. 



succeder a. 

reussir a ; venir a bout de. 

son livre n'a pas pris. 



242 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



a success beyond measure, 

all of a sudden, 

suffice it to say, 

sufficient unto the day is the evil 

thereof, 
one must suit one's self to the 

times, to circumstances, 
that suits me, done I 
to put one's Sunday clothes on, 
to supplant (p.), 

to he sure (of or that), 
to he sure to, 
to he sure not to, 
sure enough, 
to he sure ! 
sure! I sent it, 

I am quite sure of it, 

I suspected it ! 

my head swims, 

do not utter a syllable of it, 

to sit doivn to tahle, 

to rise from tahle, 

to turn the tables on or upon (p.), 

the tables are turned, 

to take literally, 
to take after (p.), 
to take an airing, 

to take aivay, 

to take care, 

to take care (to beware) , 

to take care not to, 

take all together, on the lohole, 

take it or not, 

to take one's departure, 

to take to one's heels, 

to take a high tone, 

to take well or ill, 



un succes fou. 

tout a coup. 

qu'il suffi.se de dire. 

a chaque jour suffit sa peine. 

a la guerre comme a la guerre. 

*cela me va, j'en suis ! 

s'endimancher. 

courir sur les brisees de ; *couper 
I'herbe sous le pied a. 

s'assurer. 

ne pas mauquer de. 

se bien garder de. 

a coup stir. 

certain ement ; mais certainement. 

tout de bon, sans plaisanter, je 
I'ai envoye. 

*j'en mettrais ma main au feu. 

je m'en doutais bien ! 

la tete me tourne. 

n'en dites rien ; ne f aites semblant 
de rien. 

se mettre a table. 

se lever, sortir, de table. 

*renvoyer le de, la balle, a {p.). 

la medaille est renversee; les 
affaires ont change de face. 

prendre {th.) au pied de la lettre. 

ressembler a, tenir de. 

prendre I'air; faire une pro- 
menade. 

emporter, enlever, emmener {p.). 

avoir soin de. 

prendre garde. 

se bien garder de ; n'avoir garde. 

a tout prendre. 

a prendre ou a laisser. 

partir, s'en aller. 

* prendre ses jambes a son cou. 

*le prendre bien haut. 

prendre bien ou mal {th.) ; prendre 
(r/i.)enboune,enmauvaisepart. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



243 



to take (th.) ill, 

to take ill or amiss if, 

to take (a letter, etc.) tOy 

to take a joke, 

to take notice of, 

to take {prizes), 

to take it upon one's self, 

to take (p.) to be, 

to take (p.) to be {20 years) old, 

to take to (th.), 

to take a trip, 

that's a thorn taken out of his side, 

to tell tales, 

to talk nonsense, 

to talk big, 

to talk it over, 

to talk of things one does not 
knoiv, 

to be the talk of, 

the talk of all the toivn, 

all that is idle talk, it is as light 
as air, 

they talked of you at dinner, 

to be a head taller than, 

to have a hard task, 

to suit the taste of, 

to teach (p.) manners, good breed- 
ing, 

with tears in his eyes, 

tears came into his eyes, 

to abound, 

to believe easily, * 

broken chairs, 

do you come ivith us f 

a deliberate system, resolution, 

to let knoio, 

you look younger than you are, 

to note doicn, 

as ivell as one could, 



prendre {th.) de travers. 

troiiver mauvais que {subjunc- 
tive) . 

porter (une lettre, etc.) a. 

entendre raillerie. 

faire attention a ; remarquer. 

remporter (des prix) . 

*en faire son affaire. 

IDrendre quelqu'un pour. 

donner a {p.) (vingt) ans. 

prendre du gout ]30ur ; *mordre a. 

faire un petit voyage. 

*il s'est tire une forte epine du 
pied. 

faire des contes. 

*dire des betises. 

*le prendre bien haut. 

en reparler. 

parler comme un aveugle des 
couleurs. 

faire I'entretien de. 

I'entretien de toute la ville. 

*autant en em^Dorte le vent. 

il fut question de vous a diner, 
depasser {p.) de la tete. 
avoir fort a faire. 
etre du gout, au gout, de. 
apprendre a {}:>.) vivre. 

les larmes aux yeux. 

les larmes lui sont venues aux 

yeux. 
foisonner, y avoir a foison. 
prendre pour argent comptant. 
des chaises boiteuses. 
etes-vous des notres ? " 
un parti pris. 
faire savoir. 
on vous donnerait moins que vous 

n'avez. 
prendre note de. 
tant bien que mal. 



244 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



45. 



on these termSy 

thank God! 

he may thank himself for it^ 

no thanks to him^ 

as to that, 

thafs it, 

through thick and thin, 

to he just the thing, 
it is no such thing, 
from one thing to another, he 

came to speak . . ., 
poor thing ! 
it is the best thing I can do, 

it is quite another thing, 

the thing is to, 
as things go, 

one of two things, 

of all things, above all things, 

I should think so ! 
to think it over, 
to think it amiss if, 
to think proper to, 
to think ivell, or ill, of, 

to be so thirsty, 

this, that, and the other, 

no thoroughfare, no road this way, 

though it were only, 

even though, xoere I, 

a thought strikes me, 

at the very thought of it, 

to speak out one's thoughts, 

to be threadbare, 

to thrbio one's self on everybody, 

to thunder. 



a ces conditions-la. 

Dieu merci ! grace a Dieu ! 

il ne pent s'en prendre qu'a lui- 

meme, c'est sa faute. 
ce n'est pas grace a lui. 
quant a cela ; pour le coup, 
c'est cela ! 
a travers tous les obstacles ; a tort 

et a travers. 
etre (son) affaire, 
point du tout ; cela n'est pas vrai. 
*de fil en aiguille, il en yint a 

parler . . . 
la pauvre creature ! 
c'est ce que j'ai de mieux a faire ; 

c'est mon i)lus court parti. 
c'est tout autre chose ; * c'est une 

autre paire de manches. 
il s'agit de. 
*par le temps qui court ; *du train 

dont 9a va. 
de deux choses I'une. 
avant {or sur) toute chose; par- 

dessus toutes choses. 
je le crois hien ! 
y reflechir. 

trouver mauvais q^xQ {subjunctive). 
juger convenable de, trouver bon. 
avoir bonne, or mauvaise, opinion 

de. 
etre si alter e. 
*et ci et 9a. 
on ne passe pas ! 
ne f ut-ce que ... 
quand bien meme ; dusse-je. 
il me vient une idee, 
rien que d'y penser. 
dire sa fa9on de penser. 
montrer la corde. 
se Jeter a la tete de tout le monde. 
tonner {impers.). 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



245 



ticket of admission^ 

single ticket, 

return ticket, 

till then, 

till to-morrow , 

from that time, 

from time to time, 

by this time, 

in a short time, 

in a proper time and place, 

all in good time, 

at the appointed time, 

at the same time, 

some time or other, 

with time, in the long run, at 

length, 
in his father's time, 
just in time to, 
this time I have you, 
time hangs heavy upon my hands, 
to come in time, in good time, 

to hit the time, 

to take the time from, 

as times go, in these days, 

to have a very smooth tongue, 

to have it at the tip of one's tongue, 

to go at it tooth and nail, 

topsy-turvy , 

the beaten track, 

every one to his trade, 

to translate at sight, 

a transparent artifice, 

to treat (p.) loith, 

to treat loith kindness, 

it is my first trial, 

in a trice, in less than no time, 

it is all over icith, 

to border on, 

to fight to the death, 

to give notice, 

so late at night, 



billet d 'entree. 

billet d'aller. 

billet d'aller et retour. 

en attendant ; jusque-la. 

a demain. 

des lors. 

de temps en temps. 

a I'heure qu'il est ; maintenant. 

sous pen. 

en temps et lieu. 

toutes Glioses en leur temps. 

a I'heure con venue. 

en meme temps. 

un jour ou I'autre; un de ces 

jours, 
a la longue. 

du vivant de son pere. 

a temps pour. 

*pour le coup je yous y prends. 

le temps me dure. 

yenir a temps pour ; venir a pro- 

pos ; venir a point nomme. 
prendre bien son temps, 
regler sa montre sur. 
*par le temps qui court. 
* avoir la langue doree. 
I'avoir sur le bout de la langue. 
ne pas y aller de main morte. 
sens dessus-dessous. 
le sentier battu. 
chacun son metier, 
traduire a livre ouvert. 
|une finesse cousue de fil blanc. 
regaler de. 
faire des amities a. 
c'est mon coup d'essai, 
en moins de rien. 
e'en est fait de. 
toucher a. 

combattre a outrance. 
prevenir, faire savoir. 
a uiie heure si mauvaise. 



246 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



as mattei^s stand, 
it's a little too much, 



au point ou en sont les choses. 
c'est par trop fort. 



46. 



to trouble one's self about, 

to cause trouble to (p.), to put (p.) 

to trouble, 
to be at, to give one's self, the 

trouble to, 
to take a great deal of trouble, 
to be in trouble, 
to bring one's self into trouble, 

you have played the truant, 

if it be true that, 

that is true enough, 

to fill, to pack, one's trunk, 

to trust to, 

to trust (p.) loith, 

to try one's best, 

to be trying to, 

to turn, to become, 

to turn to good account, 

to turn aside, 

to turn the tables, 

to turn the conversaAion to, 

to turn out of doors, 

to turn pale, 

at every turn, 

each in his turn, by turns, 

it is my turn to, 

one good turn deserves another, 

if things were to be done tivice, all 

loould be wise, 
in the tioinkling of an eye, 
to be unacquainted tuith, 
to take (p.) unawares, 
to be uncomfortable, 
to be undeceived about (p.)> 
to undergo an operation, 



s'embarrasser, s'inquieter, se 

mettre en peine, de. 
causer de I'embarras a. 

prendre, se donner, la peine de. 

se donner du mal. 
etre dans la peine, 
se mettre dans la peine, dans 

I'embarras. 
vous avez fait I'ecole buissonniere. 
si tant est que. 
c'est bien vrai. 
faire sa malle. 
se fier a. 

fier, confier {th,) a. 
faire de son mieux. 
faire ses efforts pour. 
se faire, devenir. 
mettre a profit, tirer parti de. 
detourner la tete. 
voir le revers de la medaille. 
faire tomber la conversation sur. 
mettre a la porte ; cbasser. 
changer de visage ; palir. 
a tout propos ; a tout bout de 

champ, 
a tour de role ; tour a tour, 
c'est a moi a. 

un service en vaut un autre, 
si jeunesse savait, et si vieillesse 

pouvait. 
en un clin d'oeil; en moins de rien. 
ignorer, ne pas connaitre. 
prendre au depourvu. 
etre mal a son aise. 
etre detrompe sur le compte de {p.) . 
se faire operer. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



247 



to understand how to, 
to let (p.) understand, 

to undertake to, 

to be uneasy, anxious, about, 

unexpectedly , 

there shall be no unfairness, 

unjitfor service, 

to behave in an ungrateful man- 
ner to (p.), 

unknoicn to me, 

unprepared, 

to be unprovided ivith, 

a good action never remains un- 
rewarded, 

it is unseemly to, unbecoming to, 

to buy (th.) unseen, blindfolded, 

to say whatever comes uppermost, 

to use, 

to make a good, or bad, use of, 

to be of use, 

to be out of use, obsolete, 

to use (p.) IV ell or ill, 

to use ambiguous terms, 
to accustom one's self to, 
in every particidar, 
to get something to do, 
to get frightened, 
to pay money, 



s'entendre a. 

donner a entendre a {p.) ', faire 

compreudre a (p.)- 
se charger de. 
etre inquiet sur ; s' in quieter de ; 

etre en peine de. 
a I'improviste. 

il n'y aura pas de passe-droit. 
hors de service, 
payer {p.) d' ingratitude. 

a mon insu. 

au depourvu. 

etre sans ; n'avoir pas de. 

un bienfait n'est jamais iDcrdu. 

il est inconvenant de. 
acheter {th.) les yeux fermes. 
*dire tout ce qui (nous) passe par 

la tete. 
se servir de. 
user bien, on mal, de. 
etre utile a (p.), servir a {p.). 
etre bors d'usage; n'etre plus 

d' usage. 
en user, en agir, bien on mal, avec, 

traiter bien on mal. 
parler a mots converts, 
s'accoutumer a ; se faire a. 
de point en point, 
trouver quelque chose a faire. 
s'effrayer. 
verser de 1' argent. 



47. 



to be of no use, 

it is of no use for you to try, 

lohat is the use ofP of what use is 

it to? 
what use is it for me to ? 
of what use is that to me ? 
it is of no use, 



ne servir de rien. 

vous avez beau faire. 

a quoi sert de? que sert de? a 

quoi bon? 
que gagnerai-je a ? 
a quoi cela peut-il me servir ? 
c'est inutile. 



248 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



to he used to do, 
to usher in, 
as usual, 

utterly, 

to he in vain for, 

to set value on, 

to set too great a value upon one's 

self, 
to value highly, 

not to value money, 

to he of some value, 

to venture to say, 

to he a victim to, 

to vie in cunning, 

to vie with one another, 

to take a nearer view of, 

to use violence, 

to he in good voice, 

to come to the vote, 

to vouch for the truth, 

to lay a wager, 

to accept the wager, 

to loaitfor, 

to wait on or upon (to serve), 

to wait on or upon (to visit), 

to keep waiting, 

to walk, 

to walk (for pleasure) , 

to take a walk, 

idle words, mere talk, 

no heed is given to what he says, 



avoir coutume de. 

introduire, annoncer. 

comme a Fordinaire; comme de 
coutume. 

de fond en comble. 

avoir beau. 

attacher du prix, de I'importance, 
a ; faire cas de. 

se faire trop valoir; * faire le 
rencheri. 

faire grand cas de, tenir beau- 
coup a. 

ne pas regarder a I'argent. 

avoir quel que valeur. 

ne pas craindre de dire. 

etre en butte a. 

jouer au plus fin. 

* faire a qui mieux mieux. 

voir, observer, de plus pres. 

en venir aux voies de fait. 

etre bien en voix. 

aller aux voix. 

garantir la verite. 

faire la gageure, le pari ; parier. 

tenir le pari. 

attendre. 

servir. 

aller voir. 

faire attendre. 

marcher, aller a pied. 

se promener. 

faire une promenade, un tour de 
promenade, un tour. 

des paroles en I'-air. 

autant en emporte le veut. 



48. 



to walk (tioo miles) , 
to walk over, 

it is ten minutes' walk, 
as 1 10 as walking, I saio. 



faire (deux milles) a pied, 
parcourir (un endroit) a pied, 

pousser j usque. 
11 y a dix minutes de marche. 
tout en me promenant j'ai vu. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



249 



to ivanderfrom, 

to loant (th.), to be ivithout, 

to loant with (th.), 

to he in want of (th.), 

for want of, 

you are wanted, 

how much is loanting 9 

there is hut little loanting, 

not to he lo anting in, 

for wanton sport, 

ivants three francs of the sum, 

I loarrant it, 

loaste paper, 

to waste time, 

to loatch over, 

to he on the ivatch, 

to set a ivatch, 

my mouth waters at it, 

still waters run deep, 

to make loay for (p.), 

to he in the way, 

to go the right ivay in, 

to have one's own way. 



to get out of the way, 

to go a great ivay loith (p.), 

to lead the ivay, 

to lose one's way, 

not to know one's ivay, 

to put (p.) on the right way, 

not to know what way to turn, 

the right way, 

the right way (method), 

the wrong way, ^ 

the wrong ivay (method), 

half way, 

this way, 

that way, 

which way ? 

on the ivay, 

in every way, 

this way and that, 



s'ecarter de. 

manquer de. 

vouloir faire de. 

avoir besoin de. 

faute de. 

on vous demande. 

de combien s'en faut-il? 

il ne s'en faut guere. 

ne pas manquer de. 

de gaiete de coeur. 

il manque trois francs a la somme. 

je vous en reponds. 

du papier de rebut. 

perdre le temps. 

avoir I'oeil sur. 

* avoir I'oeil au guet. 

regler une montre. 

^I'eau m'en vient a la bouche. 

11 n'y a pire eau que celle qui dort. 

faire place a. 

gener, embarrasser. 

se bien prendre a. 

faire ses fantaisies ; faire ses vo- 

lontes ; en faire a sa tete ; * avoir 

ses coudees franches. 
s'oter de la ; se ranger, 
avoir beaucoup d 'influence sur (p.). 
marcher en tete ; conduire. 
se perdre. 
etre desoriente. 
mettre {p.) sur la vole, 
ne savoir ou donner de la tete. 
le bon chemin. 
la bonne maniere. 
le mauvais chemin. 
la mauvaise maniere. 
a moitie chemin ; a mi-chemin. 
par ici ; de ce c6te-ci. 
par la ; de ce cote-la. 
par oil ? 

en chemin ; chemin faisant. 
de toute fa9on. 
9a et la. 



250 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



on my way to, 

on my loay froniy 

a great way, 

the shortest vmy, 

the shortest way (method), 

there is no other loay, 



to be very weak, 

it is not loearahle, 

in this cold iveather, 

he is a perfect weathercock, 

to he wedded to an opinion, 

ill weeds grow apace, 

this day loeek, 



to iveepfor {joy, etc.), 

to iveep bitterly, 

to be loorth one's loeight in gold, 

to give a hearty loelcome to (p.)? 

to be ivelcome (p.), 

to be welcome to (th.), 

and welcome, 

you are welcome to it, 

it was as loellfor you, 

it is very loellfor you to, 

ivell or ill, 

as ivell as he can or could, 

ivell done !' well and good ! 

all is well that ends ivell. 



well! I never! 

as it were, 

if it were not for him, but for 

him, 
to be ivet to the skin, 
I loill tell you ivhat, 
ivhat of it ? what of that ? 



comme j'allais a ; en allant a. 

comrne je revenais de. 

bien loin. 

le plus court chemin. 

le plus court parti. 

il n'y "a pas d'autre chemin 

{literal) ; il n'y a pas de milieu 

{figurative), 
n'ayoir qu'un souffle de vie. 
cela n'est pas de mise. 
par le froid qu'il fait, 
c'est une vraie girouette. 
*etre coiffe d'une opinion, 
mauvaise herbe croit toujours. 
il y a aujourd'hui huit jours 

{past), d'aujourd'hui en huit 

( future) . 
pleurer de (joie, etc.). 
pleurer a chaudes larmes. 
valoir son pesant d'or. 
faire fete a. 
etre le bienvenu. 
etre au service de {p.). 
c'est bien a votre service, 
il est, or c'est, a votre service, 
bien vous a pris de. 
vous avez beau, 
taut bien que mal. 
de son mieux. 
a la bonne heure ! 
la fin couronne I'oeuvre ; qui veut 

la fin veut les moyens ; rira bien 

qui rira le dernier ; % tout est 

bien qui finit bien. 
est-ce bien possible ! a-t-on jamais 

vu! 
pour ainsi dire, 
sans lui. 

etre trempe jusqu'aux os. 
^je vous dirai ce que c'est. 
*eh bien! apres? qu'est-ce a 
dire? 



IDIOMATIC VERBS x\.ND PHRASES. 



251 



what is that to yoii? 

to pvt a spoke in the ivheels, 

to lohile one^s time aivay, 

to be loorth one's while, 

to find it worth one's ivhile, 

for this long lohile, 

while I am about it, while my 

hand is in, 
what ivhim has got 

head 9 
to whisper, 
the very day, 

the very thought, even the thought, 
at first view, 
with a view to, 
visibly, 
on a visits 
anyiohere, 
on the contrary y 
to be desperate, 
he's a perfect bore, 
to have self-possession, 
I ivonder, 



qu'est-ce que cela vous fait ? 
Jeter, or mettre, des batons dans 

les roues, 
tuer le temps, 
valoir la peine de. 
y trouver son compte. 
depuis longtemps. 
tandis que j'ai la main a la pate. 



into your ^quelle mouche vous a pique? 



dire a I'oreille. 

le jour meme. 

la seule pensee. 

a premiere vue ; au x)remier abord. 

dans I'intention de. 

a vue d'oeil. 

en visite. 

n'importe oil. 

tant s'en faut. 

avoir le desespoir dans I'ame. 

c'est un vrai ours. 

avoir de 1' aplomb. 

je voudrais bien savoir. 



49. 

to bear (p.) ill-icill, en vouloir a. 

where there is a iviU there is a quand on a de la bonne volonte, 

ivay, on ne manque pas de moyens, 

vouloir, c'est pouvoir. 

willing or not, willing or unioill- bon gre mal gre; de gre ou de 

ing, force. 

to be willing to, etre pret a ; ne demander pas 

< mieux (que de) . 

vjillingly, de plein gre^ 

let them laugh icho vjin, rira bien qui rira le dernier. 

to win over, gagner. 

God tempers theivind to the shorn |a brebis tondue Dieu mesure le 

lamb, vent. 

it is an ill ivind that blovjs nobody a quel que chose malheur est bon. 

good, 

to have a great windfall, avoir une bonne aubaine, 



252 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



it ivas a loindfall, it loas a treas- 
ure trove, 

to loink at (a fault, etc.), 

not to be the tciser for it, 

to ivish (p.) a happy neio year, 

to wish one's self a hundred miles 
away, 

as much as one can wish^ 

to wish very much to, 

to be full of wit, 

sallies ofioit, 

to seek for, to strain after, wit, 

to be thought a ivit, 

it is luith us as with, 

icithout rhyme or reason, 

to have one's wits about one, 

to be at one's wits' end, 



to torture one^s wits, 
to live by one's wits, 
to bs frightened out of one', 

wits, 
to be extremely ivitty, 

his conversation is very loitty, 
a looman must have her way, 
no wonder, 

for a luonder, 

to tvonder at, 

I ivonder if, when, how, why, 

to be loont to, 

to send word to, 

to be a man of his word, 

to break one's word, 

to take (p.) at his word, 
not to dare to say a word, 



*c'etait une bonne aubaine. 

fermer les yeux sur. 
ne pas en etre plus avance. 
souhaiter la bonne an nee a. 
vouloir etre a cent pieds sous 

terre. 
a plaisir ; a discretion, 
mourir d'envie de. 
petiller d'esprit, 
des saillies. 
faire de 1' esprit, 
passer pour un homme d'esprit 
il en est de nous comme de. 
sans rime ni raison. 
etre sur ses gardes ; avoir sa 

presence d'esprit. 
etre au bout de son latin, *ne 

savoir plus de quel bois faire 

fleche; *ne savoir a quel saint 

se vouer. 
se creuser I'esprit. 
etre un chevalier d'industrie. 
*perdre la tete. 

* avoir de I'esprit jusqu'au bout 
des doigts. 

sa conversation petille d'esprit. 

ce que femme vent, Dieu le veut. 

ce n'est pas etonnant ; il n'y a rien 
d'etonnant. 

par extraordinaire ; chose extraor- 
dinaire. 

s'etonner de. 

je m'etonne bien si, etc.; je vou- 
drais bien savoir si, etc: 

avoir coutume de. 

faire savoir a 

etre homme de parole. 

manquer a, ne pas tenir, sa parole ; 
s'en dedire. 

prendre {p.) au mot. 

n'oser souffler. 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AXD PHRASES. 



253 



to pronounce the icord, to let out 

the loord, 
by loord of mouthy viva voce, 
take mij word for it, 
I will not say a loord about it, it 

won't go any farther, 
not to get a single loordfrom, 
an honest man is as good as his 

word, 
more words than deeds, 
vain loords, empty loords, 
not to inince one's words, 
to work by the job, 
a work requiring much time, 
that is not the work of a few hours, 

for all the world, 

it is the ivay of the icorld, such is 

the world, such is life, 
to laugh at vjhat the world may 

say, 
to grow worse and ivorse, 
not to be the ivorse for it, 
to make bad ivorse, 
to make it worse ! to make matters 

worse, 
to be worse of, 
to have the worst of it, 

let the worst come to the worst, 

to be worth (p.), 

not to be worth a penny, 

not to be worth much, - 

he is worth his weight in gold, 

it is not worth while, 

a soft answer turns away wrath, 

to be wrecked, 

to sing most wretchedly, 

to write a beautiful hand, 

that is the lorong book, 

that is wrong of him, 

oh, yes ! yes, indeed! 



laclier le mot ; trancher le mot. 

de vive voix. 
croyez-m'en. 
*cela n'ira pas plus loin. 

ne pas arracher une parole de. 
un hoiinete homme n'a que sa 

parole, 
plus de bruit que de besogne. 
des paroles en I'air. 
*ne pas macher ses paroles, 
travailler aux pieces, 
un ouvrage de lougue lialeine. 
cela ne se fait ijas du jour au 

lendemain , 
pour tout au monde. 
ainsi va le monde. 

se moquer du qu'en dira-t-on. 

aller de mal en pis, de pis en pis. 
ne pas s'en trouver plus mal. 
*jeter le manche apres la cognee. 
pour surcroit de mallieur. 

etre raoins avance. 

avoir le dessous de ; en avoir le 

dementi, 
au pis aller. 
etre riche de ; avoir, 
n 'avoir pas un sou vaillant. 
ne pas valoir grand'chose. 
il vaut son i^esant d'or. 
*le jeu ne vaut pas la chandelle. 
petite pluie abat grand vent, 
faire naufrage. 
* chanter a faire pitie. 
avoir une belle ecriture. 
ce n'est pas le livre qu'il faut. 
c'est mal a lui ; c'est mal de sa 

part. 
*ob que si ! 



254 



IDIOMATIC VERBS AND PHRASES. 



in a fortnight from yesterday ^ 
hut yesterday, 

to he heside one^s self ivith joy, 
she enjoyed herself to her hearVs 

content, 
not to say a loord, 



*si fait ! si! mais si! 

d'hier en quinze, 

hier encore. 

ne pas se sentir de joie, 

elle s'en est donne a cceur joie. 

ne pas desserer les dents. 



III. POPULAR SAYINGS. 



1. All roads lead to Rome. 

2. All is icell that ends loell. 

3. All is not gold that glitters. 

4. A stitch in time saves nine. 

5. A rolling stone gathers no 

moss. 
A word to the ivise is sufficient. 
A man is knoivn by his friends, 

A miss is as good as a mile. 

A good name is better than 
riches. 

A man^s house is his castle. 

A new broom sweeps clean. 

A bird in the hand is icorth 
two in the bush. 

A burnt child di^eadsfire. 

Barking dogs seldom bite. 

Beggars can't be choosers. 

Birds oj a feather flock to- 
gether. 

Better late than never. 

Charit^j begins at h(fme. 



6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 
11. 
12. 

13. 
14. 

15. 
16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 
20. 



Contentment is better than 

riches. 
DonH count your chickens 

before they are hatched. 



21. Diamond cut diamond. 



Tons les chemins vont a Rome. 
La fill couroniie I'oeuvre. 
Tout ce qui reluit n'est pas or, 
Uii point fait a temps en sauve 

cent. 
Pierre qui roule n'amasse pas de 

mousse. 
A bon entendeur salut ! 
Dis-moi qui tu hantes, je te dirai 

qui tu es. 
Faute d'un point Martin perdit 

son ane. 
Bonne reuommee vaut mieux que 

ceintLire doree. 
Charbonnier est maitre cbez lui. 
Tout nouveau, tout beau. 
Un tiens vaut mieux que deux tu 

r auras. 
Cbat ecbaude craint I'eau froide. 
Cbien qui aboie ne mord pas. 
Ne cboisit pas qui emprunte. 
Qui se ressemble s' assemble. 

Mieux vaut tard que jamais. 
Cbarite bien ordonnee commence 

avec soi-meme. 
Contentement passe ricbesse. 

Brebis comptees. le loup les 
mange. II ne faut pas acbeter 
la corde avant d'avoir le yeau. 

Fin contre fin ne vaut rien pour 
doublure. 



255 



256 



POPULAR SAYTXGS. 



22. Evil to him ivho evil thinks. 

23. Foreioarned is forearmed. 

24. Give the devil his due. 

25. Grasp all, lose all. 

26. Good reckonings malce good 

friends. 

27. Honor to ivhom honor is due. 

28 . He laugh s best ivho laughs last. 

29. He loas born ivith a silver 

spoon in his mouth. 

30. He is penny ivise and pound 

foolish. 

31. He reckons luithout his host. 

32. He's a chip of the old block. 

33. It is loell to have tivo strings 

to one's boio. 

34. It is an ill ivind that blows 

nobody good. 

35. /// iveeds groio apace. 

36. Like father, like son. 

37. Let well enough alone. 

38. Love me, love my dog. 

39. Misfortunes never come singly. 

40. Man proposes and God dis- 

poses. 

41. Many a little makes a mickle. 

42. Money makes the mare go. 

43. Make hay ivhile the sun shines. 

44. Nothing venture, nothing 

have. 

45. Necessity is the mother of in- 

vention. 

46. Necessity knows no law. 

47. No sooner said than done. 

48. Never judge by appearances. 

49. Other people's misfortunes af- 

fect us but little. 



Honi soit qui mal y pense. 

Uii bon averti en vaut deux. 

Ne faites pas le diable plus noir 

' qu'il n'est. 

Qui trop embrasse mal etreint. 

Les bons comptes font les bons 

amis. 
A tout seigneur, tout honneur. 
Rira bien qui rira le dernier. 
II est ne coiffe. 

C'est une economie de bouts de 

cbandelle. 
Qui compte sans son bote compte 

deux fois. 
C'est un ecliantillon de la piece. 

C'est un enfant de la balle. 
II est bon d' avoir deux cordes a 

son arc. 
A quelque cbose malheur est bon. 

Mauvaise herbe croit toujours. 
Bon cbien chasse de race. Tel 

pere, tel fils. 
Le mieux est I'ennemi du bien. 
Qui m'aime, aime mon chien. 
Un malheur ne vient jamais seul. 
L'homme propose et Dieu dispose. 

Les petits ruisseaux font les 

grandes rivieres. 
Argent fait tout. 
II faut battre le fer quand il est 

chaud. 
Qui ne risque rien n'a rien. 

La necessite est la mere de I'in- 

dustrie. 
Necessite n'a point de loi. 
Aussitot dit, aussitot fait. 
L'habit ne fait pas le moine. 
Mal d'autrui n'est que songe. 



TOPULAR SAYINGS. 



257 



50. Out of the abundance of the 

heart the mouth spealceth. 

51. Out of sight, out of mind. 

52. Out of the frying pan into the 

fire. 

53. One sioallow makes no sum- 

mer. 

54. Patient icaiters are no losers. 

55. Practice makes perfect. 

56. Speak of the devil, he is sure 

to appear. 

57. A soft answer turneth aivay 

icrath. 

58. Strike ivhile the iron is hot. 

59. Still VKiters run dee}?. 

60. Silence gives consent. 

61. Sufficient for the day is the 

evil thereof. 

62. Set a thief to catch a thief. 

63. 'Tis the last straio that 

breaks the cameVs back. 

64. The better the day, the better 

the deed. 

65. Tit for tat. 

63. The more, the merrier. 

67. The pitcher goes so often to 

the well, that at last it gets 
broken. 

68. It is the first step that counts. 

69. The pot can^t call the kettle 

black. ■* 

70. There is no rose ivithout a 

thorn. 

71. That's robbing Peter to pay 

Paul. 

72. There are tico sides to every 

story. 

73. Thori is many a .slip betvjeen 

the cup and the lip. 



Quand le coeur est plein , il deborde. 

Loin des yeux, loin du coeur. 
Tomber de Charybde en Scylla. 

Une hirondelle ne fait pas le 

printemps. 
Tout vient a point a qui sait at- 

tendre. 
A force de forger oil devient 

forgeron. 
Quand on parle du loup, on en 

voit la queue. 
Petite pluie abat grand vent. 

Battez le fer pendant qu'il est 

cliaud. 
II n'est pire eau que celle qui 

dort. 
Qui ne dit mot consent. 
A cbaque jour sufQt sa peine. 

A voleur, voleur et demi. 

C'est la goutte qui fait deborder 

le vase. 
A bon jour, bonne oeuvre. 

A bon chat, bon rat. 
Plus on est de fous, plus on rit. 
Taut va la cruche a I'eau qu'a la 
fin elle se brise. 

C'est le premier pas qui coute. 
La pelle se moque du fourgon. 

II n'y a pas de rose sans epines. 

C'est decouvrir S* Pierre pour 

couvrir S^ Paul. 
Toute medaille a un revers. 

II y a loin de la coupe aux levres. 



258 



POPULAR SAYINGS. 



74. They are hand and glove to- 

gether. 

75. To kill two birds ivith one 

stone. 

76. They agree like cats and dogs. 

77. To calory coals to Neiocastle. 

78. To build castles in the air. 

79. The die is cast. 

80. Vinegar doesn't catch flies. 

81. When you are ivith the Ro- 

mans, do as the Romans do. 

82. You should not look a gift 

horse in the mouth. 

83. You m^ust cut your coat ac- 

cording to your cloth. 

84. You can't eat your cake and 

keep it too. 

85. You cannot have of a cat more 

than her skin. 

86. You come the day after the 

fair. 



Ce sont cleiix tetes clans nn bonnet 

Faire d'une pierre deux coups. 

C'est le feu et I'eau. 

Porter de I'eau a la riviere. 

Batir des chateaux en Espagne. 

Le sort en est jete. 

On n'attrape pas les mouches 

avec du vinaigre. 
Quand on est avec les loups 11 

faut liurler. 
A cheval donne on ne regarde pas 

a la bride. 
Selon ta bourse, gouverne ta 

bouclie. 
On ne pent pas etre et avoir ete. 

II ne sort point de farine d'un sac 

a cliarbon. 
C'est de la moutarde apres diner. 



FRENCH. 43 



First French Course, 

By C. A. Chardenal, Bachelier ^s Lettres de I'Universite de France. 
i6mo, cloth, 274 pages. Price, 60 cents. 

THIS book has been prepared for all who wish to begin or 
continue the study of French ; and by the simplicity of the 
language, the careful progression of the exercises, and the thor- 
oughness of the treatment, is adapted to the wants of all pupils 
between the ages of twelve and seventeen. The First Course in 
itself supplies all the instruction necessary for reading, intelli- 
gently, easy French prose. 

Professor Scheie De Vere, U?iiversity of Virginia : After a painstaking 
examination, I can endorse Chard enaVs French Course as the work of 
an experienced, highly gifted teacher. The Junior and the Advanced 
Courses are admirably arranged, and cannot fail to bring the student 
almost imperceptibly forward, till teacher and pupil alike feel that the 
task is accomplished. I am sure the volumes reed only to be well known 
to be very generally adopted. 

Professor A. Marshall Elliott, Johns Hopkins University : We have 
adopted both the Advanced and First Courses in our work in this Uni- 
versity. I like them better than anything else I have seen in English, 

Professor Samuel B. Platner, Adelbert College, Cleveland, O. : I have used 
the books of Chardenal's Series with my classes during this year and am 
exceedingly well pleased with them. They are the best that I know of, 
for the purpose intended. 

Second French Course. 

French Syntax and Reader, by C. A. CHARDENAL. i6mo, cloth, 250 
pages. Price, 60 cents. 

THE Second Course aims to develop a mastery of all the 
principles of Syntax, as well as ease and fluency in French 
conversation. < 

French Exercises for Advanced Pupils. 

By C. A. Chardknal. i6n'io, cloth, 331 pages. Price, 90 cents. 

THIS book contains the principal rules of French Syntax, 
numerous French and English exercises on rules and idioms, 
and a long list of French idioms and phrases. 



44 FRENCH. 



Complete French Course. 



Based on the First and Second French Courses of C. A. Chardenal. 
i6mo, cloth, 359 pages. Price, ^i.oo. 

THE Complete French Course is based on ChardenaPs First 
and Second Courses and includes the exercises from both 
these books. Since its pubhcation it has met with a degree of 
success which has proved beyond question its complete fitness to 
aid pupils in gaining a sound knowledge of the principles of the 
French language. The special features of the book which have 
contributed to its success are : clearness and simplicity of lan- 
guage in the statement of rules; the carefully graded exercises 
which are peculiarly adapted to drill on forms and syntax ; the 
lessons on the personal pronouns ; and the manner in which the 
subjunctive mood and irregular verbs have been treated. 

The book also contains an Appendix giving a resume of all 
needed rules for the formation of the plural and feminine of nouns 
and adjectives. There are complete tables for the conjugation 
of regular and irregular verbs, together with other useful lists. 
Ten pages of colloquial prose form an easy stepping-stone to the 
French Reader. A full index has been inserted in the last edition. 

The book contains one hundred and twenty exercises and can 
be readily mastered within the school year. 

Irene Saniewska, IIo/>e Street High School, Providence, R.I.: I have used 
Chardenal's Complete French Course for a long time and have obtained 
most satisfactory results. It is simple and clear, and the sentences, both 
French and English, are such as one would be likely to use in conversa- 
tion. I would recommend it in particular to English teachers who teach 
French. 

D. C. Fan, Academy, Glen Falls, N.Y.: For the past two years we have 
used the Chardenal with our classes, and it affords me great pleasure to 
say that it has given us complete satisfaction. There may be better text- 
books on that subject, but if so, our attention has not been called to them. 

T. F. Crane, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.: I have not found anything 
so good as Chardenal's Complete French Course. 

Samuel J. Brun, Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Califo7-??ia : The Char- 
denal is the best text-book for beginners in French in University work 
that I know of. 



FRENCH, 45 



Complete French Course. 



Abbie I. Durkee, Hi^h School, Malde?t, Mass.: After examining many text- 
books, I find Chardenal's the most practical. I took a copy of it to Eu- 
rope, with several other grammars, and asked a competent teacher of 
French to look them over and tell me which was the best from a French- 
man's point of view. Chardenal's gained the most complimentary praise. 

Ellen Sullivan, High School, Alba?iy, N.Y.: We are using Chardenal's 
Complete French Course in our school, and we think there is nothing 
that could take its place for our use. 

Harriet M. Bliss, High School, Bingha7nton, N. Y.: We have used the 
Chardenal in our school, especially in the first year French classes, for 
several years, and are very well satisfied with the book. 

William C. Ladd, Haverfoj-d College, Pa.: I think the Chardenal admirably 
adapted to younger students beginning the language, and were I teach- 
ing in a secondary school I feel that I should use it. 

Emily E. Winward, High School, Fall River, Mass.: I continue to like 
Chardenal's Complete French Course ; and we not only use it in all our 
classes, but I always recommend it to those who wish to gain a sufficient 
knowledge of the French language to permit them to travel in France 
with profit and some degree of pleasure. 

Z. W. Coombs, PolytecJuiic bistitute, Worcester, Mass.: I have given Char- 
denal's Complete French Course a somewhat hasty examination, but 
find that it confirms all the good I have heard of it, and that has been 
a great deal. It seems to possess all the good points of the many 
" Courses " published, and few of their defects. 

H. L. Belisle, High School, Lawrence, Mass.: I take pleasure in speaking 
a good word for Chardenal's Complete French Course, because the work 
deserves it. All things considered, it seems to me that for a combination 
grammar and exercise book it could hardly be improved upon. 

H. E. Webb, High School, Geneva, N.Y.: I have used the Complete 
Course during the past year with great success. I consider it by far the 
best introductory text-book in use at the present time. The arrange- 
ment is both logical and practical, and the exercises lead to a thorough 
elementary knowledge of the language. 

Mary Abigail Stevens, High School, Lewiston, Mai^ie : I have used 
Chardenal's Complete Course for four years and have found it satis- 
factory. Although I have meanwhile examined many other grammars, I 
have found nothing for which I would exchange Chardenal. 



46 FRENCH, 



Preparatory French Reader. 

With Notes and Vocabulary. By GEORGE W. ROLLINS, Master in the 
Public Latin School, Boston. i6mo, cloth, 314 pages. Price, 90 cents. 

FICTION, history, poetry, and the drama are represented by 
the selections, which are thoroughly French in spirit. 

The historical pieces, with Napoleon, Louis XVI., and Marie 
Antoinette as dominant figures, will interest young readers in a 
fascinating period of French history, and will be of permanent 
value. 

The selection from the drama will serve as a capital introduc- 
tion to that kind of literature of which the French are the ac- 
knowledged masters. 

The freshness and the value of the material are indicated by 
the names of Ortoli, Lemaitre, Topffer, Marbot, St. Armand, 
Duruy, Lavergne, Labiche, Martin, and Laboulaye. 

The Vocabulary will be found to be especially rich in w^ords of 
every-day use. It contains explanations of the common idiomatic 
expressions found in the text, and its mastery will insure the easy 
and rapid reading of general French literature. A list of irregu- 
lar verbs, with their conjugations, accompanies the Vocabulary. 

The Notes are such as will enable the pupil to read rapidly 
and thoroughly. They serve to explain the historical and literary 
references in the texc, to help the pupil over the more difficult 
places, and to call his attention to some grammatical principles. 

John Tetlow, Principal of Girls High School, Boston : I have examined it 
with much interest and pleasure. The freshness, variety, and intrinsic 
value of the selections give the book a literary charm apart from its ser- 
viceableness as a manual for the class-room ; and the unusually discrimi- 
nating notes give help just where, and only where, the pupil will need it. 

Frederic T. Famsworth, Sanborn Seminary^ Kingston, NH. : I consider 
it a most excellent and attractive book in the variety and character of the 
selections, and the value of Vocabulary, Notes, and Verb List. 

John R. Effinger, Jr., University of Michigan : 1 am using the book with 
two of my sections in beginning French, and find it very satisfactory. 

Professor Sylvester Primerj University of Texas : It is all you claim for 
it, and I believe it superior to others of the same grade. I shall use it 
next year in my Freshman French. 



FRENCH AND GERMAN. 



Readings from French History. 

Edited by Professor O. B. Super, Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa. 
i6mo, cloth, 324 pages. Price, $1.00. 

THE choice of the selections, and to some extent also of the 
authors represented, has been detennined by the wants of 
the class room ; and, in order that the selections might be inter- 
esting, complete episodes have, so far as possible, been given. 
The notes are brief, and are for the most part confined to the 
explanation of words used in an unusual sense, or of obscure 
historical points. 

The object in the selection has been to present such extracts 
from the best French historians as will enable the student to 
judge of their style and manner of treatment. With but one 
exception the selections are arranged in the chronological order 
of the events narrated. The accuracy of the text has been insured 
by consultation of various French, English, and German editions 
of the authors quoted. 

The selections are from the following; authors : — 



Conquete de I'Angleterre. 

Jeanne d'Arc. 

Situation du Peiiple avant la Revolution. 

Prise de la Bastille. 

Discours de Vergniaud. 

Chute de Robespierre. 

Le Decret de Berlin et I'Entrevue de Tilsit. 

Napoleon a x^Ioscou. 

Napoleon a Sainte-Helene. 

Historie de la Civilisation en Europe. 



Professor B. L. Bowen, Ohio State University : It seems to me not only 
a very attractive book in the matter of letter-press, etc., but in scope and 
subject-matter is far better than anything of the kind that we have had, 
I am very much pleased with it. 



Thierry . 




Barante . . . . 


Louis Blanc . . 


Michelet . . . 


Lamartine 




Mignet . 




Lanfrey . 




Segur . 




Theirs . 




Guizot 





48 FRENCH. 



The Ca Ira Series of French Plays. 

Edited by Professor B. W. WELLS, of the University of the South. 
6 volumes, i6mo, cloth. Each, 36 cents. 

THE plays selected have not heretofore been edited for use in 
American schools. The series contains works adapted to 
the most varied needs, but these works are so treated as to ex- 
clude all expressions or suggestions which could stand in the way 
of their use in mixed classes. The introductions give brief 
biographies of the authors and such comment on their work as 
may seem helpful. The Notes explain peculiarities of idiom that 
would not naturally be sought in a dictionary. Allusions to 
social and political customs, as well as to literature andliistory, 
receive such comment as will aid the pupil to put himself in the 
place of the original audience. In this way it is hoped that the 
reading of these plays will help the student not only in the study 
of French, but also in the development of a literary taste. 
The following works are contained in the series : — 

Moi, par Labiche et Martin. 

Gringoire, par Theodore de Banville, et L'Ete de la Saint Martin, 

par Meilhac et Helevy. 
La Question d' Argent, par Alexandre Dumas, y^/j. 
La Camaraderie, par Eugene Scribe. 

Le Luthier de Cremone, et Le Tresor, par Fran9ois Coppee. 
Le Fils de Giboyer, par Emile Augier. 

Professor A. G. Cameron, Yale University : The volumes" are as admi- 
rable in editing as they are dainty in form. 

Professor H. A. Rennert, University of Pennsylvania : It (Moi) is an 
excellent book in every way, and I shall use it. 

Professor George D. Fairfield, University 0/ Illinois : I heartily commend 
both the editorial and typographical excellence apparent all through 
it (Moi). 

Professor W. A. Cooper, Marietta College, Ohio : I have already used 
two of the Qa Ira Series with classes and shall use another this term. 
The books are not only very delightful to look at, but the editor's work 
gives the student just what help he needs. 



